Claremont FSES Remediation PROJECT MANUAL

PR

OJEC

T M

AN

UA

L

Claremont FSES

Remediation for

Claremont Nursing and

Rehabilitation Center Carlisle, Pennsylvania

BID SET

Date: 24 September 2021

Project Number 18144.01

PROJECT MANUALFor

Claremont FSES Remediation(Fire Safety Evaluation Survey)

for

Claremont Nursing andRehabilitationCenterCarlisle, Pennsylvania

NOELKER AND HULL ASSOCIATES, INC. Architect30 West King StreetChambersburg, Pennsylvania 17201717.263.8464717.263.6031 Fax

GATTER AND DIEHL, INC. MEP100 Winding Creek Blvd EngineerMechanicsburg, Pennsylvania 17051717.657.9700717.657.9705 Fax

TABLE OF CONTENTS

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS 00100 Notice00200 Instructions to Bidders

BID FORMS00401 Bid Form - General Construction Contract00402 Bid Form - Plumbing Contract00403 Bid Form - Heating/Ventilating/Air Conditioning Contract00404 Bid Form - Electrical Contract00410 AIA Document A310 - 2010 - Bid Bond00420 AIA Document A305 - Contractor's Qualification Statement00430 Non-Collusion Affidavit and Adherence Statement00440 Non-Discrimination Affidavit 00450 Affidavit Accepting Provisions of the Workmen's Compensation Acts00460 Public Works Employment Verification Form

CONTRACTING FORMS 00500 AIA Document A101 - 2007 - Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and

Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum00510 AIA Document A312 - 2010 - Payment Bond00520 AIA Document A312 - 2010 - Performance Bond00530 Stipulation Against Liens

CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT00600 AIA A201 General Conditions or the Contract for Construction00601 Supplementary General Conditions00610 Prevailing Minimum Wage Rates

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS01100 Summary01120 Multiple Contract Summary01230 Alternates01270 Unit Prices01290 Payment Procedures01300 Administrative Requirements01330 Submittal Procedures01350 Alteration Project Procedures01400 Quality Requirements01460 Testing Laboratory Services01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls01600 Product Requirements01601 Substitution Request Form01700 Execution Requirements

DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION02225 Minor Demolition for Remodeling

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE thru DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICSNot Used

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION07810 Sprayed Fireproofing07840 Firestopping07900 Joint Sealers

Proj. No. 18144.01 Table of Contents TC - 1

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS08110 Standard Steel Doors and Frames08710 Door Hardware08800 Glass and Glazing

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies09510 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings09900 Paints

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES10192 Cubicle Curtains and Hardware 10445 Fire Wall Signage

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT thru DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not Used

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods15080 Mechanical Insulation15300 Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems15400 Plumbing Systems15510 Hydronic Piping and Specialties15855 Air Distribution

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods16110 Raceways16120 Wires and Cables16190 Supporting Devices16450 Grounding

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 Table of Contents TC - 2

NOTICE

RENOVATIONS TO CLAREMONT NURSING HOME

Sealed bids for the Fire Safety Evaluation Survey (FSES) remediation project involving interior

renovations of the ground floor through fourth floor of the existing Tower Building at the

Claremont Nursing Home in Carlisle, Pennsylvania, will be received at the Cumberland County

Controller’s Office, 1 Courthouse Square, Room 207, Carlisle, PA 17013 until 1:30 p.m. on

Friday October 29, 2021, which bids will be opened and read by the County Commissioners or

their designee in Room 2-C, Second Floor, Courthouse, Carlisle, PA at 2:00 p. m. the same day.

Bids may not be modified, withdrawn or cancelled by the Bidder for sixty calendar (60) days

following the actual date of opening thereof, except as provided in Act No.4 (1974).

Separate sealed bids will be received for the following prime contracts: General Construction;

Plumbing; Heating/Ventilating/Air Conditioning; and Electrical.

Drawings, the Project Manual and other bidding documents, will be available in PDF format

(Portable Document Format), and may be downloaded by Bidders from the Cumberland

County’s website, www.ccpa.net.

Each bid shall be accompanied by cash, certified check or cashier’s check in the amount of ten

(10) percent of the bid, or by a bond with corporate surety in the amount of ten (10) percent of

the bid.

The successful bidder shall provide County with a Performance Bond executed by a surety

company authorized to do business in the Commonwealth and made payable to the County in the

amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the bid prior to bid award.

The successful bidder shall provide County with a Payment Bond executed by a surety company

authorized to do business in the Commonwealth and made payable to the County in the amount

of one hundred percent (100%) of the bid prior to bid award.

A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held in the Tower Ground multipurpose room on

the south side of Claremont Nursing and Rehabilitation Center, 1000 Claremont Road,

Carlisle, Pennsylvania at 2:00 p.m. on Monday, October 11, 2021. Bids received from

bidders who did not attend the pre-bid conference will not be considered.

This project is subject to the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, Department of Labor and

Industry’s Prevailing Wage Determination.

CUMBERLAND COUNTY BOARD OF COMMISSIONERS: GARY L. EICHELBERGER,

JEAN FOSCHI, and VINCENT T. DIFILIPPO; STACY M. SNYDER, CHIEF CLERK

http://www.ccpa.net/

DOCUMENT 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONSA. All definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA

Document A-201, are applicable to the Construction Documents.B. Bidding documents include the Advertisement for Bid, Instructions to Bidders, the bid

forms, and the proposed Contract Documents including any Addenda issued prior toreceipt of Bids.

C. The Contract Documents proposed for the Work consist of the Owner-ContractorAgreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary Conditions), theDrawings, the Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to and all Modifications issuedafter execution of the Contract.

D. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the Contractwhich modify or interpret the bidding documents, including Drawings and Specifications,by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. Addenda will become part of theContract Documents when the Construction Contract is executed.

E. "Noelker and Hull Associates, Inc." will be hereafter referred to in this Project Manual as"Architect".

F. A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work for designated portionthereof for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the BiddingDocuments.

G. The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Workdescribed in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which work may be added or fromwhich work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids.

H. An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deductedfrom the amount of the Base Bid in the corresponding change in the Work, as describedin the Bidding Documents or in the proposed Contract Documents.

I. A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement formaterials or service as described in the Bidding Documents or in the proposed ContractDocuments.

J. A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid.K. A Sub-Bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials or labor for

a portion of the Work.

1.2 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND SITEA. Each Bidder, by making his Bid, represents that he has read and understands the Bidding

Documents.B. Each Bidder, by making his Bid, represents that he has visited the site performed

investigations and verifications as he deems necessary, and familiarized himself with thelocal conditions under which the Work is to be performed and will be responsible for anyand all errors in his proposal resulting from his failure to do so.

C. The location and elevations of the various utilities and pipe work included within the scopeof the work are offered as a general guide only, without guarantee as to accuracy. TheContractor shall verify and investigate to his own satisfaction the location and elevation ofall utilities, pipe work, and the like and shall adequately inform himself of their relation tothe work before submitting a proposal.

D. Each Bidder by making his Bid represents that his Bid is based upon the materials,systems and equipment required by the Bidding Documents without exception.

1.3 BIDDING PROCEDURESA. All Bids shall be prepared on the forms provided by the Architect and submitted in

accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. The Architect will furnish Bidders with BidForms which will provide for the following Bid Items

Proj. No. 18144.01 Instructions to Bidders 00200 - 1

1. A single contract price for each Bid Item as detailed and described in theseSpecifications.

2. Acknowledgement of Addenda.3. The Owner requires completion by 31 December 2021. The Owner anticipates

issuing a Notice to Proceed no later than 04 November 2021.4. Alternate Bids.5. Unit Prices.

B. A Bid is invalid if it has not been deposited at the designated location prior to the time anddate for receipt of bids indicated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or prior to anyextension thereof issued to the Bidders.

C. Unless otherwise provided in any supplement to these Instructions to Bidders, no biddershall modify, withdraw or cancel his Bid or any part thereof for 60 days after the timedesignated for the receipt of Bids in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid.

D. Prior to the receipt of Bids, Addenda will be mailed or delivered to each person or firmrecorded by the Architect as having received the Bidding Documents and will be availablefor inspection wherever the Bidding Documents are kept available for that purpose. Addenda issued after receipt of Bids will be mailed or delivered only to the selectedBidder.

E. Bids shall not contain any recapitulation of the Work to be done and no oral or telephoneproposals or modifications will be considered.

F. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the Bid Form nor limit or qualify hisBid in any other manner. Bids so qualified will be subject to disqualification.

G. Only written instructions will be binding. The Architect will not be responsible for any oral,telegraphic or telephonic instructions.

H. The names of all Subcontractors and material suppliers proposed to be employed shall besubmitted for approval by the Architect before they are employed, and all suchSubcontractors and material suppliers must be known to perform work of a high standardin their respective trades. If the Architect has reasonable objection to any such proposedperson or entity, and notifies the Bidder in writing of such objection, the Bidder shallprovide an acceptable substitute person or entity in accordance with Article 5.2 of theGeneral Conditions.

1.4 DISCREPANCIES AND AMBIGUITIESA. Each Bidder shall examine the Bidding Documents carefully and, not later than seven (7)

days prior to the date for receipt of Bids, shall make written request to the Architect forinterpretations or correction of any ambiguity, inconsistency or error therein which he maydiscover. Any interpretation or correction will be issued as an Addendum by the Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by Addendum shall be binding. No Bidder shallrely upon any interpretation or correction given by any other method.

B. Requests for Information should be sent to Jason Plank at [email protected].

1.5 SUBSTITUTIONSA. Each Bidder represents that his Bid is based upon the materials and equipment described

in the Bidding Documents.B. No substitution will be considered unless written request has been submitted to the

Architect for approval at least seven (7) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids.Requests for substitutions shall be submitted in accordance with requirements of Section01600. Submit on form bound in Project Manual.

C. If the Architect approves a proposed substitution, such approval will be set forth in anAddendum or letter of approval.

1.6 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERSA. Bidders shall submit the following documents included in the Project manual with the Bid

Form. 1. Non-Collusion Affidavit.2. AIA Document A305 - Contractor's Qualification Statement.3. Affidavit Accepting Provisions of the Workman's Compensation Acts.


mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]

4. Non-Discrimination Affidavit.5. Public Works Employment Verification Form.

B. Bidders who fail to submit or complete the required documents will be disqualified.

1.7 BASIS OF BIDA. Each Bidder shall include all unit cost items and all alternates shown on the Bid Form;

failure to comply may be cause for rejection. No segregated Bids or assignments will beconsidered.

1.8 PREPARATION OF BIDA. Bidder shall submit his Bid on the forms furnished by the Architect. All blank spaces in

forms shall be correctly filled in and the Bidder shall state the prices, written in words andin figures. Where there is discrepancy between the price written in words and the pricewritten in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If Bid is submitted by anindividual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agency. If the Bid issubmitted by a firm, association or partnership, the name and address of each membermust be given, and the Bid must be signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign Bids must be properly certifiedand must be in writing and submitted with the Bid.

1.9 BID GUARANTYA. No Bid shall be considered unless it is accompanied by a cashier's check on any State or

National Bank in Pennsylvania or acceptable Bid Bond, payable unconditionally to theOwner. The cashier's check or Bid Bond shall be in the amount of not less than tenpercent (10%) of the total amount of the Bid. The Bid guaranty is required by the Owneras evidence of good faith and as a guarantee that, if awarded the contract, the Bidder willexecute the contract and furnish the required bonds and required insurance within ten(10) days after the Bid is accepted. Said bonds shall further guarantee that if the Bid iswithdrawn after the Bids have been opened or if the Contractor refuses to execute thecontract in accordance with his Bid, the Contractor and the Surety shall become liable tothe Owner for damages incurred. If a Bidder's bond is used, the Surety thereon shalldesignate an agent resident in the local county, to whom requisite notices may bedelivered and upon whom service of process may be had. If a Bidder's bond is used, anacceptable Surety shall be determined from the latest United States Treasury Departmentlist of companies holding certificates of authority as acceptable Sureties on FederalBonds.

B. As soon as possible after prices have been tabulated for comparison of Bids, the Ownermay, at its discretion, return the Bid guaranties accompanying the Bids, which in itsjudgment, would not be considered in the award; all other Bid guaranties will be retainedby the Owner until the required contract and bonds have been executed, after which theywill be returned. No Bid guaranties will be returned until at least two days have elapsedfrom time of opening Bids.

1.10 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BONDA. Both a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond will be required, each in an amount equal

to 100 percent of the Contract Sum. B. The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the County prior to the award of the

contract.

1.11 FILING BIDA. No Bid will be considered unless it is filed with the Owner within the time limit for receiving

Bids as stated in the Advertisement. Each Bid shall be in a sealed envelope plainlymarked with the word "BID", and the name and description of the project as designated inthe Advertisement.


1.12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDA. Bid may not be modified after submittal. Bidders may withdraw at any time before

opening, but may not resubmit them.

1.13 OPENING BIDA. The Bids submitted will be opened at the time stated in the Advertisement, publicly read

aloud, and shall thereafter remain on file with the Owner.

1.14 IRREGULAR BIDA. Bids will not be considered if they show any omissions, alterations of form, additions, or

conditions not requested, unauthorized alternate Bids or irregularities of any kind. However, the Owner reserves the right to waive any irregularities and to make the awardin the best interest of the Owner.

1.15 REJECTION OF BIDA. The Bidder acknowledges the right of the Owner to reject any or all Bids and to waive any

informality or irregularity in any Bid received. In addition, the Bidder recognizes the rightof the Owner to reject a Bid if the Bidder failed to furnish any required Bid security, or tosubmit the data required by the Bidding Documents, or if the Bid is any way incomplete orirregular.

1.16 SUBMISSION OF POST-BID INFORMATIONA. Upon request by the Architect, the selected Bidder shall, within seven days thereafter

submit the following:1. A statement of cost for each major item of Work included in the Bid.2. A designation of the Work to be performed by the Bidder with his own forces.3. A list of names of the Subcontractors or other persons or organizations (including

those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)proposed for each portion of the Work. The Bidder will be required to establish tothe satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner the reliability and responsibility ofthe proposed Subcontractors. Prior to the award of the Contract, the Architect willnotify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or the Architect, after dueinvestigation, has reasonable and substantial objection to any person ororganization on such lists. If the Owner or Architect has a reasonable andsubstantial objection to any person or organization on such list, and refuses inwriting to accept such person or organization, the Bidder may, at his option,withdraw his Bid without forfeiture of Bid Security. If the Bidder submits anacceptable substitute with an increase in his Bid price to cover the difference incost occasioned by such substitution, the Owner may at his discretion, accept theincreased Bid price or he may disqualify the Bidder. Subcontractors and otherpersons and organizations proposed by the Bidder and accepted by the Ownerand Architect must be used on the Work for which they were proposed andaccepted, and shall not be changed except with the written approval of the Ownerand the Architect.

1.17 AWARD OF CONTRACTA. After Bids are opened, the Bids will be tabulated for comparison on the basis of the Bid

prices and quantities shown in the Bids. The Owner reserves the right to withhold theaward of the Contract for a period of 60 days from the date of opening Bids and no awardwill be made until the Owner is satisfied as to the responsibilities of the low Bidders. Untilfinal award of the Contract, the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids orproceed to do the work otherwise in the best interest of the Owner.


1.18 EXECUTION OF CONTRACTA. The person or persons, partnership, company, firm, association or corporation to whom a

contract is awarded shall within 10 days after such award, sign the necessary agreementsentering into the required Contract with the Owner. No contract shall be binding on theOwner until it has been executed by the Owner or his duly authorized representative, anddelivered to the Contractor.

1.19 FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONTRACTA. The failure of the Bidder to sign the required Contract within ten days after the Contract is

awarded, shall be considered by the Owner as abandonment of his Bid, and the Ownermay annul the award.

1.20 EXEMPTION FROM SALES TAX ON MATERIALSA. The Owner qualifies for exemption from State and Local Sales Tax. The Owner will

furnish the Contractor a Sales Exemption Certificate for the purchasing of eligiblematerials required for the project. The Contract between the Owner and the Contractorwill contain separate amounts, specifically stated, for the following1. Labor, overhead and profit.2. Materials to be incorporated into the construction project. The successful Bidder

shall ascertain the amounts applicable to the above classifications, whichamounts will be incorporated in the Contract.

1.21 DAMAGESA. The Owner will suffer financial loss if the project is not substantially completed on the date

set forth in the Contract Documents. The Contractor and his Surety shall be liable for andshall pay for all damages suffered by the Owner. The Contractor and his Surety agreethat the sum of One Thousand Dollars ($1000.00) per calendar day may be withheld frompayments due the Contractor in addition to the retainage to satisfy the actual damages tothe Owner. The actual damages to the Owner will be determined after final acceptance ofthe project by the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS & PART 3 - EXECUTIONNot Used

END OF DOCUMENT


DOCUMENT 00401 - BID FORM - GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

DATE: ____ October 2021

TO: Office of the Controller, Cumberland CountySecond Floor, Cumberland County Courthouse

PROJECT: Claremont FSES RemediationClaremont Nursing and Rehabilitation CenterCarlisle, Pennsylvania

Gentlemen

Pursuant to the Notice (Advertisement For Bids), Instructions to Bidders, Conditions of the Contract,General Requirements and the Drawings and Specifications prepared by Noelker and Hull Associates,Inc., the undersigned bidder hereby proposes to do all the work and furnish all materials and to completeall the work upon which he bids, as provided by the Bidding Documents, and binds himself on acceptanceof the Bid to execute a contract and bonds, according to the standard forms included herein, forperforming and completing the said Work within the required time, and furnish all required guaranties, forthe following prices to wit:

BID:

For the work associated with the Fire Safety Evaluation Survey (FSES) Remediation as indicated on theDrawings:

The Sum of ___________________________________________ DOLLARS ($__________________).

ALTERNATES:

Refer to Section 01230 - Alternates for description and provisions of the Alternates listed below.

Alternate No. 1 - Accelerated Completion (ADD)


ADDENDA:

This will acknowledge receipt of the following addenda which are part of the Bidding Documents:

Addendum No. ______________ Addendum No. _______________Addendum No. _____________


ATTACHMENTS:

The following documents are submitted with this bid:Non-Collusion AffidavitAIA Document A305 - Contractor's Qualification StatementAffidavit Accepting Provisions of the Workman's Compensation ActsNon-Discrimination AffidavitPublic Works Employment Verification Form

Proj. No. 18144.01 Bid Form - General Construction Contract 00401 - 1

CONTRACT TIME:

The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the Work and has carefullyexamined the Contract Documents pertaining to the Work covered by the above Bid, and he furtheragrees to commence work within ten days after date of written notice to do so and to substantiallycomplete the work on which he has bid on or before 31 December 2021, subject to such extensions oftime allowed by Specifications.

The undersigned Bidder agrees that his Bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of sixty(60) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.

The undersigned Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids and towaive any informalities in the Bidding.

BID GUARANTY:

Enclosed with this Bid is a Certified Check or Cashiers Check for:

The Sum of _________________________________________________________________ DOLLARS

or a Bid Bond in the sum of _____________________________________________________ DOLLARS

which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event this Bidis accepted by the Owner within sixty (60) days after the Bids are received and the undersigned fails toexecute the Contract and the required Bonds with the said Owner within ten (10) days after the date saidBid is accepted; otherwise said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand.

________________________________________________Contractor (firm name)

By________________________________________________

SEAL* Address________________________________________________

City______________________________________State______

Phone ________________________________________________*If Bidder is corporation.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Bid Form - General Construction Contract 00401 - 2

DOCUMENT 00402 - BID FORM - PLUMBING CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT




Gentlemen


BID:



ALTERNATES:




ADDENDA:




ATTACHMENTS:


Proj. No. 18144.01 Bid Form - Plumbing Construction Contract 00402 - 1

CONTRACT TIME:




BID GUARANTY:






By________________________________________________

SEAL* Address________________________________________________

City______________________________________State______


Proj. No. 18144.01 Bid Form - Plumbing Construction Contract 00402 - 2

DOCUMENT 00403 - BID FORM - HVAC CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT




Gentlemen


BID:



ALTERNATES:




UNIT PRICES:

The undersigned agrees, in case of additions to or deductions from the Work, the following unit prices willbe used in adjusting the Contract Price as described in Section 01270 - Unit Prices:

A. Unit Price No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $_____________ EAB. Unit Price No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $_____________ EAC. Unit Price No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $_____________ EAD. Unit Price No. 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $_____________ EAE. Unit Price No. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $_____________ EA

ADDENDA:




Proj. No. 18144.01 Bid Form - HVAC Construction Contract 00403 - 1

ATTACHMENTS:


CONTRACT TIME:




BID GUARANTY:






By________________________________________________

SEAL* Address________________________________________________

City______________________________________State______


Proj. No. 18144.01 Bid Form - HVAC Construction Contract 00403 - 2

DOCUMENT 00404 - BID FORM - ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT




Gentlemen


BID:



ALTERNATES:




UNIT PRICES:

The undersigned agrees, in case of additions to or deductions from the Work, the following unit prices willbe used in adjusting the Contract Price as described in Section 01270 - Unit Prices:

A. Unit Price No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $_____________ EAB. Unit Price No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $_____________ EAC. Unit Price No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $_____________ EAD. Unit Price No. 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $_____________ EAE. Unit Price No. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $_____________ EA

ADDENDA:




Proj. No. 18144.01 Bid Form - Electrical Construction Contract 00404 - 1

ATTACHMENTS:


CONTRACT TIME:




BID GUARANTY:






By________________________________________________

SEAL* Address________________________________________________

City______________________________________State______


Proj. No. 18144.01 Bid Form - Electrical Construction Contract 00404 - 2

Document A310TM – 2010Bid Bond

Init.

/

AIA Document A310™ – 2010. Copyright © 1963, 1970 and 2010 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:34:20 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No.7549747394 which expires on 01/28/2020, and is not for resale.User Notes: (729181539)

1

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text.

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.

CONTRACTOR:(Name, legal status and address)

SURETY: (Name, legal status and principal place of business)

OWNER:(Name, legal status and address)Claremont Nursing and Rehabilitation Center1000 Claremont RoadCarlisle, PA 17013

BOND AMOUNT: $

PROJECT:(Name, location or address, and Project number, if any)Claremont FSED Remediation1000 Claremont RoadCarlisle, PA 17013

The Contractor and Surety are bound to the Owner in the amount set forth above, for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, as provided herein. The conditions of this Bond are such that if the Owner accepts the bid of the Contractor within the time specified in the bid documents, or within such time period as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, and the Contractor either (1) enters into a contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms of such bid, and gives such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents, with a surety admitted in the jurisdiction of the Project and otherwise acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof; or (2) pays to the Owner the difference, not to exceed the amount of this Bond, between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Owner may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. The Surety hereby waives any notice of an agreement between the Owner and Contractor to extend the time in which the Owner may accept the bid. Waiver of notice by the Surety shall not apply to any extension exceeding sixty (60) days in the aggregate beyond the time for acceptance of bids specified in the bid documents, and the Owner and Contractor shall obtain the Surety’s consent for an extension beyond sixty (60) days.

If this Bond is issued in connection with a subcontractor’s bid to a Contractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.

When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location of the Project, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such

Init.

/

AIA Document A310™ – 2010. Copyright © 1963, 1970 and 2010 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:34:20 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No.7549747394 which expires on 01/28/2020, and is not for resale.User Notes: (729181539)

2

statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

Signed and sealed this day of ,

(Contractor as Principal) (Seal)

(Witness) (Title)

(Surety) (Seal)

(Witness) (Title)

Additions and Deletions Report forAIA® Document A310TM – 2010

This Additions and Deletions Report, as defined on page 1 of the associated document, reproduces below all text the author has added to the standard form AIA document in order to complete it, as well as any text the author may have added to or deleted from the original AIA text. Added text is shown underlined. Deleted text is indicated with a horizontal line through the original AIA text.

Note: This Additions and Deletions Report is provided for information purposes only and is not incorporated into or constitute any part of the associated AIA document. This Additions and Deletions Report and its associated document were generated simultaneously by AIA software at 11:34:20 ET on 08/19/2019.

Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A310™ – 2010. Copyright © 1963, 1970 and 2010 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:34:20 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No.7549747394 which expires on 01/28/2020, and is not for resale.User Notes: (729181539)

1

PAGE 1

Claremont Nursing and Rehabilitation Center1000 Claremont RoadCarlisle, PA 17013

…

(Name, location or address, and Project number, if any)Claremont FSED Remediation1000 Claremont RoadCarlisle, PA 17013

AIA Document D401™ – 2003. Copyright © 1992 and 2003 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:34:20 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No.7549747394 which expires on 01/28/2020, and is not for resale.User Notes: (729181539)

1

Certification of Document’s AuthenticityAIA® Document D401™ – 2003

I, Michael Allen-Hall, AIA, hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 11:34:20 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No. 7549747394 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA® Document A310™ – 2010, Bid Bond , as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report.

_____________________________________________________________(Signed)

_____________________________________________________________(Title)

_____________________________________________________________(Dated)

Document A305TM – 1986Contractor's Qualification Statement

AIA Document A305™ – 1986. Copyright © 1964, 1969, 1979 and 1986 byThe American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:29:37 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No.7549747394 which expires on 01/28/2020, and is not for resale.User Notes: (2051299180)

1



This form is approved and recommended by the American Institute of Architects (AIA) and The Associated General Contractors of America (AGC) for use in evaluating the qualifications of contractors. No endorsement of the submitting party or verification of the information is made by AIA or AGC.

The Undersigned certifies under oath that the information provided herein is true and sufficiently complete so as not to be misleading.

SUBMITTED TO:

ADDRESS:

SUBMITTED BY:

NAME:

ADDRESS:

PRINCIPAL OFFICE:

[ ] Corporation

[ ] Partnership

[ ] Individual

[ ] Joint Venture

[ ] Other

NAME OF PROJECT: (if applicable) Claremont FSES Remediation

TYPE OF WORK: (file separate form for each Classification of Work)

[ ] General Construction

[ ] HVAC

[ ] Electrical

[ ] Plumbing

[ ] Other: (Specify)

§ 1 ORGANIZATION§ 1.1 How many years has your organization been in business as a Contractor?

§ 1.2 How many years has your organization been in business under its present business name?

§ 1.2.1 Under what other or former names has your organization operated?

§ 1.3 If your organization is a corporation, answer the following:§ 1.3.1 Date of incorporation: § 1.3.2 State of incorporation:


2

§ 1.3.3 President’s name: § 1.3.4 Vice-president’s name(s)

§ 1.3.5 Secretary’s name: § 1.3.6 Treasurer’s name:

§ 1.4 If your organization is a partnership, answer the following:§ 1.4.1 Date of organization: § 1.4.2 Type of partnership (if applicable): § 1.4.3 Name(s) of general partner(s)

§ 1.5 If your organization is individually owned, answer the following:§ 1.5.1 Date of organization: § 1.5.2 Name of owner:

§ 1.6 If the form of your organization is other than those listed above, describe it and name the principals:

§ 2 LICENSING§ 2.1 List jurisdictions and trade categories in which your organization is legally qualified to do business, and indicate registration or license numbers, if applicable.

§ 2.2 List jurisdictions in which your organization’s partnership or trade name is filed.

§ 3 EXPERIENCE§ 3.1 List the categories of work that your organization normally performs with its own forces.

§ 3.2 Claims and Suits. (If the answer to any of the questions below is yes, please attach details.)§ 3.2.1 Has your organization ever failed to complete any work awarded to it?

§ 3.2.2 Are there any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings or suits pending or outstanding against your organization or its officers?

§ 3.2.3 Has your organization filed any law suits or requested arbitration with regard to construction contracts within the last five years?

§ 3.3 Within the last five years, has any officer or principal of your organization ever been an officer or principal of another organization when it failed to complete a construction contract? (If the answer is yes, please attach details.)


3

§ 3.4 On a separate sheet, list major construction projects your organization has in progress, giving the name of project, owner, architect, contract amount, percent complete and scheduled completion date.

§ 3.4.1 State total worth of work in progress and under contract:

§ 3.5 On a separate sheet, list the major projects your organization has completed in the past five years, giving the name of project, owner, architect, contract amount, date of completion and percentage of the cost of the work performed with your own forces.

§ 3.5.1 State average annual amount of construction work performed during the past five years:

§ 3.6 On a separate sheet, list the construction experience and present commitments of the key individuals of your organization.

§ 4 REFERENCES§ 4.1 Trade References:

§ 4.2 Bank References:

§ 4.3 Surety:§ 4.3.1 Name of bonding company:

§ 4.3.2 Name and address of agent:

§ 5 FINANCING§ 5.1 Financial Statement.

§ 5.1.1 Attach a financial statement, preferably audited, including your organization’s latest balance sheet and income statement showing the following items:

Current Assets (e.g., cash, joint venture accounts, accounts receivable, notes receivable, accrued income, deposits, materials inventory and prepaid expenses);

Net Fixed Assets;

Other Assets;


4

Current Liabilities (e.g., accounts payable, notes payable, accrued expenses, provision for income taxes, advances, accrued salaries and accrued payroll taxes);

Other Liabilities (e.g., capital, capital stock, authorized and outstanding shares par values, earned surplus and retained earnings).

§ 5.1.2 Name and address of firm preparing attached financial statement, and date thereof:

§ 5.1.3 Is the attached financial statement for the identical organization named on page one?

§ 5.1.4 If not, explain the relationship and financial responsibility of the organization whose financial statement is provided (e.g., parent-subsidiary).

§ 5.2 Will the organization whose financial statement is attached act as guarantor of the contract for construction?

§ 6 SIGNATURE§ 6.1 Dated at this day of

Name of Organization:

By:

Title:

§ 6.2

M being duly sworn deposes and says that the information provided herein is true and sufficiently complete so as not to be misleading.

Subscribed and sworn before me this day of

Notary Public:

My Commission Expires:




Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A305™ – 1986. Copyright © 1964, 1969, 1979 and 1986 byThe American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:29:37 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No.7549747394 which expires on 01/28/2020, and is not for resale.User Notes: (2051299180)

1

PAGE 1

NAME OF PROJECT: (if applicable) Claremont FSES Remediation


1


I, Michael Allen-Hall, AIA, hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 11:29:37 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No. 7549747394 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA® Document A305™ – 1986, Contractor's Qualification Statement , as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report.

_____________________________________________________________(Signed)

_____________________________________________________________(Title)

_____________________________________________________________(Dated)

Proj. No. Non-Collusion Affidavit

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT

State of _________________________________

County of _______________________________

I state that I am ______________________________ of _____________________

(Title) (Entity Name)

and that I am authorized to make this affidavit on behalf of said entity.

I state that:

1. The price(s) and amount(s) of this bid have been arrived at independently and

without consultation, communication or agreement with any other contractor, bidder or potential

bidder.

2. Neither the price(s) nor the amount(s) of this bid, and neither the approximate

price(s) nor approximate amount(s) of this bid, have been disclosed to any other firm or person

who is a bidder or potential bidder, and they will not be disclosed before bid opening.

3. No attempt has been made or will be made to induce any firm or person to refrain

from bidding on this contract, or to submit a bid higher than this bid, or to submit any

intentionally high or noncompetitive bid or other form of complementary bid.

4. The bid of my firm is made in good faith and not pursuant to any agreement or

discussion with, or inducement from, any firm or person to submit a complementary or other

noncompetitive bid.

5. _________________________, its affiliates, subsidiaries, officers, directors, and

(Entity)

employees are not currently under the investigation by any governmental agency and have not in

the last four years been convicted of or found liable for any act prohibited by State or Federal

law in any jurisdiction, involving conspiracy or collusion with respect to bidding of any public

contract, except as follows:

______________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

Proj. No. Non-Collusion Affidavit

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT

I state that ______________________________________ understands and

(Name of Firm)

acknowledges that the above representations are material and important, and will be relied on by

County of Cumberland in awarding the contract(s) for which this bid is submitted. I understand

and my firm understands that any misstatement in this affidavit is and shall be treated as

fraudulent concealment from County of Cumberland of the true facts relating to the submission

of bids for this contract.

_____________________________________

Name and Company Position

Sworn to and subscribed to

before me this ______ day

of _____________, 2019. *Notary Public’s seal

to be placed here:

____________________________

Notary Public*

My Commission expires: ________

.

Proj. No. Non-Discrimination Affidavit

NON-DISCRIMINATION AFFIDAVIT

State of _________________________________

County of _________________________________

_________________________________________________, being duly sworn according to law, deposes

and says,

1. He/she is_________________________________________(Owner, partner, officer,

representative, agent) of ______________________________________________________,

hereinafter referred to as Contractor.

2. CONTRACTOR shall not discriminate against any employee, applicant for employment,

independent contractor, or any other person because of race, color, religious creed, ancestry,

national origin, age, or sex. CONTRACTOR shall take affirmative action to ensure that

applicants are employed, and that employees or agents are treated, during employment,

without regard to their race, color, religious creed, ancestry, national origin, age or sex. Such

affirmative action shall include, but is not limited to the following: Employment, upgrading,

demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment and advertising; layoff or termination; rates

of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training. CONTRACTOR shall post

in conspicuous places, available to all employees, agents, applicants for employment, and

other persons a notice to be provided by the contracting agency setting forth the provisions of

the non-discrimination clause.

3. CONTRACTOR shall, in advertisements or requests for employment placed by it or on its

behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without

regard to race, color, religious creed, ancestry, national origin, age or sex.

4. CONTRACTOR shall send each labor union or workers’ representative with which it has a

collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising said

labor union or workers’ representative of its commitment to this non-discrimination clause.

Similar notice shall be sent to every other source of recruitment regularly utilized by the

CONTRACTOR.

5. It shall be no defense to a finding of non-compliance with the Contract Compliance

Regulation Commission of this non-discrimination clause that the CONTRACTOR had

delegated some of its employment practices to any union, training program, or other source or

recruitment which prevents it from meeting its obligations. However, if the evidence

indicates that the CONTRACTOR was not on notice of the third-party discrimination or

made a good faith effort to correct it, such factor shall be considered in mitigation in

determining appropriate sanctions.

6. Where the practice of a union or any training program or other source of recruitment will

result in the exclusion of minority group persons, so that the CONTRACTOR will be unable

to meet its obligations under the Contract Compliance Regulations issued by the

Pennsylvania Human Relations Commission or this non-discrimination clause,

Proj. No. Non-Discrimination Affidavit

CONTRACTOR shall then employ and fill vacancies through other non-discriminatory

employment procedures.

7. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the Contract Compliance Regulations of the Pennsylvania

Human Relations Commission, 16 PA Code Chapter 49 and with all state and federal laws

prohibiting discrimination in hiring or employment opportunities. In the event of the

CONTRACTOR’S non-compliance with the non-discrimination clause of the Contract, or

with any such laws, this Contract may after hearing and adjudication, be terminated or

suspended, in whole or in part, and the CONTRACTOR may be declared temporarily

ineligible for further contracts and other such sanctions may be imposed and remedies

invoked as provided by the Contract Compliance Regulations.

8. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all necessary employment documents and records to, and

permit access to its books, records, and accounts by the contracting agency, the Office of

Administration, Bureau of Affirmative Action, and the Human Relations Commission for

purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with the provisions of the Contract

Compliance Regulations, pursuant to 49.35 of the regulations cited above (relating to

information concerning compliance by contractors). If CONTRACTOR does not possess

documents or records reflecting the necessary information requested, it shall furnish such

information on reporting forms supplied by the contracting agency, the Bureau of Affirmative

Action or the COMMISSION.

9. CONTRACTOR shall actively recruit minority subcontractor or subcontractors with

substantial minority representation among their employees.

10. CONTRACTOR shall include the provisions of the non-discrimination clause in every

subcontract, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor.

11. The terms of this non-discrimination clause shall have the same meaning as in the

Contract Compliance Regulations issued by the Pennsylvania Human Relations Commission,

16 PA Code Chapter 49.

12. CONTRACTOR obligations under this clause are limited to the CONTRACTOR’S facilities

within Pennsylvania, or, where the contract is for the purchase of goods manufactured outside

of Pennsylvania, the facilities at which such goods are actually produced.

CONTRACTOR:

____________________________________

Sworn to and subscribed to

before me this ______ day

of _____________, 2019. *Notary Public’s seal

to be placed here:

____________________________

Notary Public*

My Commission expires: ________

Proj. No. Affidavit Accepting Provisions of the Workmen’s Compensation Act

AFFIDAVIT ACCEPTING PROVISIONS OF THE

WORKERS’ COMPENSATION ACTS

State of ________________________________

County of ______________________________

_______________________________________, being duly sworn according to law, deposes and says

that he/she is authorized to execute this affidavit on behalf of the below designated Contractor, that said

Contractor is familiar with and has accepted the provisions of the Workmen's Compensation Act of 1915

or the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania with its supplements and amendments, including the amendments

set forth in Act 44 of 1993, and that said Contractor has insured its liability thereunder, in accordance

with the terms of said Act, with ________________________________ (insurance company) under

Policy # ___________________________.

The undersigned further acknowledges that said Contractor is aware of its obligation not to subcontract all

or any part of the Work, if awarded, unless each subcontractor has presented proof of Workmen’s

Compensation Insurance, and that the Contractor and all subcontractors must provide proof of

Workmen’s Compensation Insurance to the Owner, which insurance shall be effective for the duration of

the Work. In the event that the Owner shall receive notice that any such insurance has been canceled or

terminated, Owner shall issue a stop work order as required by law.

_______________________________________

(Name of Contractor)

By:____________________________________

Sworn and subscribed to

before me this _____day

of ____________, 2019. *Notary Public Seal to

be placed here:

______________________________

Notary Public*

My Commission Expires: ________

Proj. No. Public Works Employment Verification Form

Document A101TM – 2017Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum

Init.

/

AIA Document A101™ – 2017. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:24:06 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No.7549747394 which expires on 01/28/2020, and is not for resale.User Notes: (1848325733)

1



The parties should complete A101™–2017, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds, contemporaneously with this Agreement. AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted in this document by reference. Do not use with other general conditions unless this document is modified.

AGREEMENT made as of the day of in the year (In words, indicate day, month and year.)

BETWEEN the Owner:(Name, legal status, address and other information)

Claremont Nursing and Rehabilitation Center 1000 Claremont RoadCarlisle, PA 17013

and the Contractor:(Name, legal status, address and other information)

for the following Project:(Name, location and detailed description)

Claremont FSES Remediation

The Architect:(Name, legal status, address and other information)

Noelker and Hull Associates, Inc.30 W. King StreetChambersburg, PA 17201

The Owner and Contractor agree as follows.

Init.

/


2

TABLE OF ARTICLES

1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT

3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

4 CONTRACT SUM

5 PAYMENTS

6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION

7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION

8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

EXHIBIT A INSURANCE AND BONDS

ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTSThe Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, all of which form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than a Modification, appears in Article 9.

ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACTThe Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except as specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others.

ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION§ 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be:(Check one of the following boxes.)

[ ] The date of this Agreement.

[ ] A date set forth in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner.

[ ] Established as follows:(Insert a date or a means to determine the date of commencement of the Work.)

If a date of commencement of the Work is not selected, then the date of commencement shall be the date of this Agreement.

§ 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement of the Work.

§ 3.3 Substantial Completion§ 3.3.1 Subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work:(Check one of the following boxes and complete the necessary information.)

Init.

/


3

[ ] Not later than ( ) calendar days from the date of commencement of the Work.

[ ] By the following date:

§ 3.3.2 Subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents, if portions of the Work are to be completed prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, the Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of such portions by the following dates:

Portion of Work Substantial Completion Date

§ 3.3.3 If the Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion as provided in this Section 3.3, liquidated damages, if any, shall be assessed as set forth in Section 4.5.

ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM§ 4.1 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor’s performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be ($ ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2 Alternates§ 4.2.1 Alternates, if any, included in the Contract Sum:

Item Price

§ 4.2.2 Subject to the conditions noted below, the following alternates may be accepted by the Owner following execution of this Agreement. Upon acceptance, the Owner shall issue a Modification to this Agreement.(Insert below each alternate and the conditions that must be met for the Owner to accept the alternate.)

Item Price Conditions for Acceptance

§ 4.3 Allowances, if any, included in the Contract Sum:(Identify each allowance.)

Item Price

§ 4.4 Unit prices, if any:(Identify the item and state the unit price and quantity limitations, if any, to which the unit price will be applicable.)

Item Units and Limitations Price per Unit ($0.00)

§ 4.5 Liquidated damages, if any:(Insert terms and conditions for liquidated damages, if any.)

§ 4.6 Other:(Insert provisions for bonus or other incentives, if any, that might result in a change to the Contract Sum.)

Init.

/


4

ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS§ 5.1 Progress Payments§ 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows:

§ 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the day of a month, the Owner shall make payment of the amount certified to the Contractor not later than the day of the month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment of the amount certified shall be made by the Owner not later than ( ) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment.(Federal, state or local laws may require payment within a certain period of time.)

§ 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form, and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy, as the Architect may require. This schedule of values shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment.

§ 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall show the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment.

§ 5.1.6 In accordance with AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows:

§ 5.1.6.1 The amount of each progress payment shall first include:.1 That portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work;.2 That portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably

stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction, or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing; and

.3 That portion of Construction Change Directives that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified.

§ 5.1.6.2 The amount of each progress payment shall then be reduced by:.1 The aggregate of any amounts previously paid by the Owner;.2 The amount, if any, for Work that remains uncorrected and for which the Architect has previously

withheld a Certificate for Payment as provided in Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017;.3 Any amount for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier,

unless the Work has been performed by others the Contractor intends to pay;.4 For Work performed or defects discovered since the last payment application, any amount for which

the Architect may withhold payment, or nullify a Certificate of Payment in whole or in part, as provided in Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017; and

.5 Retainage withheld pursuant to Section 5.1.7.

§ 5.1.7 Retainage§ 5.1.7.1 For each progress payment made prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, the Owner may withhold the following amount, as retainage, from the payment otherwise due:(Insert a percentage or amount to be withheld as retainage from each Application for Payment. The amount of retainage may be limited by governing law.)

Init.

/


5

§ 5.1.7.1.1 The following items are not subject to retainage:(Insert any items not subject to the withholding of retainage, such as general conditions, insurance, etc.)

§ 5.1.7.2 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows:(If the retainage established in Section 5.1.7.1 is to be modified prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, including modifications for Substantial Completion of portions of the Work as provided in Section 3.3.2, insert provisions for such modifications.)

§ 5.1.7.3 Except as set forth in this Section 5.1.7.3, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, the Contractor may submit an Application for Payment that includes the retainage withheld from prior Applications for Payment pursuant to this Section 5.1.7. The Application for Payment submitted at Substantial Completion shall not include retainage as follows:(Insert any other conditions for release of retainage upon Substantial Completion.)

§ 5.1.8 If final completion of the Work is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, the Owner shall pay the Contractor any additional amounts in accordance with Article 9 of AIA Document A201–2017.

§ 5.1.9 Except with the Owner’s prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site.

§ 5.2 Final Payment§ 5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when

.1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor’s responsibility to correct Work as provided in Article 12 of AIA Document A201–2017, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment; and

.2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect.

§ 5.2.2 The Owner’s final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect’s final Certificate for Payment, or as follows:

§ 5.3 InterestPayments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located.(Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.)

%

ARTICLE 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION§ 6.1 Initial Decision MakerThe Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker pursuant to Article 15 of AIA Document A201–2017, unless the parties appoint below another individual, not a party to this Agreement, to serve as the Initial Decision Maker.(If the parties mutually agree, insert the name, address and other contact information of the Initial Decision Maker, if other than the Architect.)

Init.

/


6

§ 6.2 Binding Dispute ResolutionFor any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation pursuant to Article 15 of AIA Document A201–2017, the method of binding dispute resolution shall be as follows:(Check the appropriate box.)

[ ] Arbitration pursuant to Section 15.4 of AIA Document A201–2017

[ ] Litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction

[ ] Other (Specify)

If the Owner and Contractor do not select a method of binding dispute resolution, or do not subsequently agree in writing to a binding dispute resolution method other than litigation, Claims will be resolved by litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction.

ARTICLE 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION§ 7.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017.

§ 7.1.1 If the Contract is terminated for the Owner’s convenience in accordance with Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017, then the Owner shall pay the Contractor a termination fee as follows:(Insert the amount of, or method for determining, the fee, if any, payable to the Contractor following a termination for the Owner’s convenience.)

§ 7.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201–2017.

ARTICLE 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS§ 8.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201–2017 or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents.

§ 8.2 The Owner’s representative:(Name, address, email address, and other information)

§ 8.3 The Contractor’s representative:(Name, address, email address, and other information)

Init.

/


7

§ 8.4 Neither the Owner’s nor the Contractor’s representative shall be changed without ten days’ prior notice to the other party.

§ 8.5 Insurance and Bonds§ 8.5.1 The Owner and the Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance as set forth in AIA Document A101™–2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 8.5.2 The Contractor shall provide bonds as set forth in AIA Document A101™–2017 Exhibit A, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 8.6 Notice in electronic format, pursuant to Article 1 of AIA Document A201–2017, may be given in accordance with AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, if completed, or as otherwise set forth below:(If other than in accordance with AIA Document E203–2013, insert requirements for delivering notice in electronic format such as name, title, and email address of the recipient and whether and how the system will be required to generate a read receipt for the transmission.)

§ 8.7 Other provisions:

ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS§ 9.1 This Agreement is comprised of the following documents:

.1 AIA Document A101™–2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor

.2 AIA Document A101™–2017, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds

.3 AIA Document A201™–2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

.4 AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, dated as indicated below:(Insert the date of the E203-2013 incorporated into this Agreement.)

.5 Drawings

Number Title Date

.6 Specifications

Section Title Date Pages

.7 Addenda, if any:

Number Date Pages

Portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding or proposal requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9.

.8 Other Exhibits:(Check all boxes that apply and include appropriate information identifying the exhibit where required.)

Init.

/


8

[ ] AIA Document E204™–2017, Sustainable Projects Exhibit, dated as indicated below:(Insert the date of the E204-2017 incorporated into this Agreement.)

[ ] The Sustainability Plan:

Title Date Pages

[ ] Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract:

Document Title Date Pages

.9 Other documents, if any, listed below:(List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201™–2017 provides that the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements, and other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. Any such documents should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.)

This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above.

OWNER (Signature) CONTRACTOR (Signature)

(Printed name and title) (Printed name and title)




Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A101™ – 2017. Copyright © 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:24:06 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No.7549747394 which expires on 01/28/2020, and is not for resale.User Notes: (1848325733)

1

PAGE 1

Claremont Nursing and Rehabilitation Center 1000 Claremont RoadCarlisle, PA 17013

…

Claremont FSES Remediation

…



1


I, Michael Allen-Hall, AIA, hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 11:24:06 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No. 7549747394 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA® Document A101™ – 2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum, as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report.

_____________________________________________________________(Signed)

_____________________________________________________________(Title)

_____________________________________________________________(Dated)

Document A312TM – 2010Payment Bond

Init.

/

AIA Document A312™ – 2010 Payment Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:25:57 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No.7549747394 which expires on 01/28/2020, and is not for resale.User Notes: (1680884022)

1





SURETY:(Name, legal status and principal place of business)


CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTDate: Amount: $ Description:(Name and location)

BONDDate: (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date) Amount: $ Modifications to this Bond: None See Section 18

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETYCompany: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal)

Signature: Signature: Name and Title:

Name and Title:

(Any additional signatures appear on the last page of this Payment Bond.)

(FOR INFORMATION ONLY — Name, address and telephone)AGENT or BROKER: OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE:

(Architect, Engineer or other party:)

Init.

/


2

§ 1 The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms.

§ 2 If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, then the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond.

§ 3 If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation to the Owner under this Bond shall arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Section 13) of claims, demands, liens or suits against the Owner or the Owner’s property by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety.

§ 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien or suit.

§ 5 The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond shall arise after the following:

§ 5.1 Claimants, who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor, .1 have furnished a written notice of non-payment to the Contractor, stating with substantial accuracy the

amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and

.2 have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Section 13).

§ 5.2 Claimants, who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor, have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Section 13).

§ 6 If a notice of non-payment required by Section 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Section 5.1.1.

§ 7 When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Sections 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following actions:

§ 7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and

§ 7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.

§ 7.3 The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2 shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If, however, the Surety fails to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2, the Surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney’s fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant.

§ 8 The Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s fees provided under Section 7.3, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety.

§ 9 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any construction performance bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work.

Init.

/


3

§ 10 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to, or give notice on behalf of, Claimants or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond.

§ 11 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.

§ 12 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Section 5.1.2 or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

§ 13 Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received.

§ 14 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

§ 15 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.

§ 16 Definitions§ 16.1 Claim. A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum:

.1 the name of the Claimant;

.2 the name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment furnished;

.3 a copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials or equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;

.4 a brief description of the labor, materials or equipment furnished;

.5 the date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;

.6 the total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim;

.7 the total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and

.8 the total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim.

§ 16.2 Claimant. An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic’s lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor’s subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or equipment were furnished.

§ 16.3 Construction Contract. The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.

Init.

/


4

§ 16.4 Owner Default. Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.

§ 16.5 Contract Documents. All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

§ 17 If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.

§ 18 Modifications to this bond are as follows:

(Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.)CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETYCompany: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal)

Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: Address: Address:




Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A312™ – 2010 Payment Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:25:57 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No.7549747394 which expires on 01/28/2020, and is not for resale.User Notes: (1680884022)

1

PAGE 1



1


I, Michael Allen-Hall, AIA, hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 11:25:57 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No. 7549747394 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA® Document A312™ – 2010, Payment Bond , as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report.

_____________________________________________________________(Signed)

_____________________________________________________________(Title)

_____________________________________________________________(Dated)

Document A312TM – 2010Performance Bond

Init.

/

AIA Document A312™ – 2010 Performance Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:27:14 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No.7549747394 which expires on 01/28/2020, and is not for resale.User Notes: (2037403971)

1





SURETY:(Name, legal status and principal place of business)


CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTDate: Amount: $ Description:(Name and location)

BONDDate: (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date) Amount: $ Modifications to this Bond: None See Section 16

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETYCompany: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal)

Signature: Signature: Name and Title:

Name and Title:

(Any additional signatures appear on the last page of this Performance Bond.)

(FOR INFORMATION ONLY — Name, address and telephone)AGENT or BROKER: OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE:

(Architect, Engineer or other party:)

Init.

/


2

§ 1 The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.

§ 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Section 3.

§ 3 If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation under this Bond shall arise after

.1 the Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is requesting a conference among the Owner, Contractor and Surety to discuss the Contractor’s performance. If the Owner does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt of the Owner’s notice, request such a conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Owner shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Section 3.1 shall be held within ten (10) business days of the Surety’s receipt of the Owner’s notice. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default;

.2 the Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety; and

.3 the Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract.

§ 4 Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Section 3.1 shall not constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or release the Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice.

§ 5 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take one of the following actions:

§ 5.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract;

§ 5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors;

§ 5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and a contractor selected with the Owner’s concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Section 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor Default; or

§ 5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances:

.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Owner; or

.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for denial.

§ 6 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Section 5 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Section 5.4, and the Owner refuses the payment or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner.

§ 7 If the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1, 5.2 or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the

Init.

/


3

Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication, for

.1 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract;

.2 additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Section 5; and

.3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor.

§ 8 If the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1, 5.3 or 5.4, the Surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this Bond.

§ 9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns.

§ 10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.

§ 11 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

§ 12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears.

§ 13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

§ 14 Definitions§ 14.1 Balance of the Contract Price. The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract.

§ 14.2 Construction Contract. The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.

§ 14.3 Contractor Default. Failure of the Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract.

§ 14.4 Owner Default. Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.

§ 14.5 Contract Documents. All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

§ 15 If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.

Init.

/


4

§ 16 Modifications to this bond are as follows:

(Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.)CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETYCompany: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal)

Signature: Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: Address: Address:




Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A312™ – 2010 Performance Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:27:14 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No.7549747394 which expires on 01/28/2020, and is not for resale.User Notes: (2037403971)

1

PAGE 1



1


I, Michael Allen-Hall, AIA, hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 11:27:14 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No. 7549747394 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA® Document A312™ – 2010, Performance Bond , as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report.

_____________________________________________________________(Signed)

_____________________________________________________________(Title)

_____________________________________________________________(Dated)

Proj. No. Stipulation Against Liens

STIPULATION AGAINST LIENS

THIS AGREEMENT made the day of , 20__,

by and between, with principal place of business at, ___________________________________,

hereinafter referred to as “CONTRACTOR”, and Cumberland County, 1 Courthouse Square,

Carlisle, Cumberland County, Pennsylvania, hereinafter referred to as “OWNER”, whereby the

former undertook and agreed to _________________________________________________ on

that certain tract of ground situate in Cumberland County, Pennsylvania, being known

as___________________________________ .

NOW, THEREFORE, THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH: That the said

CONTRACTOR, for and in consideration of the sum of One ($1.00) Dollar to it in hand paid by

OWNER, the receipt whereof is hereby acknowledged, and the further consideration mentioned in

the agreement aforesaid, for themselves and their subcontractors, and all parties acting through or

under them, covenant and agree that no mechanic’s liens or claims shall be filed or maintained by

them or any of them against the said buildings and the lot of ground appurtenant thereto for or on

account of any work done or materials furnished by them or any of them under said contract or

otherwise, for, towards, in, or about the erection and construction of the said buildings on the lot

above described, and the said CONTRACTOR, for itself, its subcontractors and others under it

hereby expressly waives and relinquishes the right to have, file, and maintain any mechanic's liens

or claims against the said buildings or any of them, and agree that this instrument, waiving the

right of lien, shall be an independent covenant.

Proj. No. Stipulation Against Liens

WITNESS our hands and seals this day of , 20__.

ATTEST: Owner: CUMBERLAND COUNTY:

______________________ ______________________________

Stacy Snyder, Chief Clerk Gary Eichelberger, Chairman

______________________________

Jean Foschi, Vice-Chairman

______________________________

Vincent T. DiFilippo, Secretary

WITNESS/ATTEST: CONTRACTOR:

______________________________ ____________________________________

____________________________________

Document A201TM – 2017General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

Init.

/


1



For guidance in modifying this document to include supplementary conditions, see AIA Document A503™, Guide for Supplementary Conditions.

for the following PROJECT:(Name and location or address)

Claremont FSES Remediation1000 Claremont RoadCarlisle, PA 17013

THE OWNER:(Name, legal status and address)


THE ARCHITECT:(Name, legal status and address)


TABLE OF ARTICLES

1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

2 OWNER

3 CONTRACTOR

4 ARCHITECT

5 SUBCONTRACTORS

6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

7 CHANGES IN THE WORK

8 TIME

9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

11 INSURANCE AND BONDS

12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

Init.

/


2

13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

Init.

/


3

INDEX(Topics and numbers in bold are Section headings.)

Acceptance of Nonconforming Work9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3Acceptance of Work9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3Access to Work3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1Accident Prevention10Acts and Omissions3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 10.2.8, 13.3.2, 14.1, 15.1.2, 15.2Addenda1.1.1Additional Costs, Claims for3.7.4, 3.7.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5Additional Inspections and Testing9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.4Additional Time, Claims for3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.6Administration of the Contract3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5Advertisement or Invitation to Bid1.1.1Aesthetic Effect4.2.13Allowances3.8Applications for Payment4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.5.4, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10Approvals2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.5, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10.1, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.4.1Arbitration8.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 ARCHITECT4Architect, Definition of4.1.1Architect, Extent of Authority2.5, 3.12.7, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.4, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.4, 15.2.1Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6.4, 15.1.4, 15.2Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses2.5, 12.2.1, 13.4.2, 13.4.3, 14.2.4Architect’s Administration of the Contract3.1.3, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5Architect’s Approvals2.5, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7

Architect’s Authority to Reject Work3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1Architect’s Copyright1.1.7, 1.5Architect’s Decisions3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, 15.2Architect’s Inspections3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4Architect’s Instructions3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.4.2Architect’s Interpretations4.2.11, 4.2.12Architect’s Project Representative4.2.10Architect’s Relationship with Contractor1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.3.2, 13.4, 15.2Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3Architect’s Representations9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1Architect’s Site Visits3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4Asbestos10.3.1Attorneys’ Fees3.18.1, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3Award of Separate Contracts6.1.1, 6.1.2Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work5.2Basic Definitions1.1Bidding Requirements1.1.1Binding Dispute Resolution8.3.1, 9.7, 11.5, 13.1, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.3.3, 15.4.1Bonds, Lien7.3.4.4, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Bonds, Performance, and Payment7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.5Building Information Models Use and Reliance1.8Building Permit3.7.1Capitalization1.3Certificate of Substantial Completion9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5

Init.

/


4

Certificates for Payment4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.4Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval13.4.4Certificates of Insurance9.10.2Change Orders1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.2, 11.5, 12.1.2Change Orders, Definition of7.2.1CHANGES IN THE WORK2.2.2, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.5Claims, Definition of15.1.1Claims, Notice of1.6.2, 15.1.3CLAIMS AND DISPUTES3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims15.4.1Claims for Additional Cost3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 7.3.9, 9.5.2, 10.2.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5Claims for Additional Time3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 9.5.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.6Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for3.7.4Claims for Damages3.2.4, 3.18, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 11.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7Claims Subject to Arbitration15.4.1Cleaning Up3.15, 6.3Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.2, 15.1.5Commencement of the Work, Definition of8.1.2Communications3.9.1, 4.2.4Completion, Conditions Relating to3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 14.1.2, 15.1.2COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND9Completion, Substantial3.10.1, 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2Compliance with Laws2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3

Concealed or Unknown Conditions3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3Conditions of the Contract1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4Consent, Written3.4.2, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 15.4.4.2Consolidation or Joinder15.4.4CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS1.1.4, 6Construction Change Directive, Definition of7.3.1Construction Change Directives1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3, 9.3.1.1Construction Schedules, Contractor’s3.10, 3.11, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts5.4, 14.2.2.2Continuing Contract Performance15.1.4Contract, Definition of1.1.2CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE5.4.1.1, 5.4.2, 11.5, 14Contract Administration3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of1.5.2, 2.3.6, 5.3Contract Documents, Definition of1.1.1Contract Sum2.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.8, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.2, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.1.2, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5Contract Sum, Definition of9.1Contract Time1.1.4, 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 6.1.5, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.3.6, 7, 7, 7.3.10, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 12.1.2, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.6.1, 15.2.5Contract Time, Definition of8.1.1CONTRACTOR3Contractor, Definition of3.1, 6.1.2Contractor’s Construction and Submittal Schedules3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.2.3, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2

Init.

/


5

Contractor’s Employees2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1Contractor’s Liability Insurance11.1Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner’s Forces3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3, 12.2.4Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 4.2.4, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1Contractor’s Representations3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the Work3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents3.2Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work2.2.2, 9.7Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract14.1Contractor’s Submittals3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Contractor’s Superintendent3.9, 10.2.6Contractor’s Supervision and Construction Procedures1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4Coordination and Correlation1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications1.5, 2.3.6, 3.11Copyrights1.5, 3.17Correction of Work2.5, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 12.3, 15.1.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents1.2Cost, Definition of7.3.4Costs2.5, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, 11.2, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14Cutting and Patching3.14, 6.2.5

Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4Damage to the Work3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4Damages, Claims for3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.3.2, 11.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.7Damages for Delay6.2.3, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2, 14.3.2Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of8.1.2Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of8.1.3Day, Definition of8.1.4Decisions of the Architect3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2Decisions to Withhold Certification9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.3, 9.5.1, 9.5.3, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1Definitions1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1, 15.1.1Delays and Extensions of Time3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5Digital Data Use and Transmission1.7Disputes6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2Documents and Samples at the Site3.11Drawings, Definition of1.1.5Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of3.11Effective Date of Insurance8.2.2Emergencies10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.5Employees, Contractor’s3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1Equipment, Labor, or Materials1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2Execution and Progress of the Work1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.3.4, 2.3.6, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.6, 8.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.1, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.4

Init.

/


6

Extensions of Time3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.6, 15.2.5Failure of Payment9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2Faulty Work(See Defective or Nonconforming Work)Final Completion and Final Payment4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3Financial Arrangements, Owner’s2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4GENERAL PROVISIONS1Governing Law13.1Guarantees (See Warranty)Hazardous Materials and Substances10.2.4, 10.3Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers5.2.1Indemnification3.17, 3.18, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3Information and Services Required of the Owner2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10.1, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4Initial Decision15.2Initial Decision Maker, Definition of1.1.8Initial Decision Maker, Decisions14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5Injury or Damage to Person or Property10.2.8, 10.4Inspections3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.4Instructions to Bidders1.1.1Instructions to the Contractor3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.4.2Instruments of Service, Definition of1.1.7Insurance6.1.1, 7.3.4, 8.2.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.2.5, 11Insurance, Notice of Cancellation or Expiration11.1.4, 11.2.3Insurance, Contractor’s Liability11.1Insurance, Effective Date of8.2.2, 14.4.2Insurance, Owner’s Liability11.2Insurance, Property10.2.5, 11.2, 11.4, 11.5

Insurance, Stored Materials9.3.2INSURANCE AND BONDS11Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy9.9.1Insured loss, Adjustment and Settlement of11.5Intent of the Contract Documents1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13Interest13.5Interpretation1.1.8, 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1Interpretations, Written4.2.11, 4.2.12Judgment on Final Award15.4.2Labor and Materials, Equipment1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2Labor Disputes8.3.1Laws and Regulations1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4Liens2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8Limitations, Statutes of12.2.5, 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1Limitations of Liability3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.12.10.1, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.6.8, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.5, 13.3.1Limitations of Time2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5Materials, Hazardous10.2.4, 10.3Materials, Labor, Equipment and1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2Mechanic’s Lien2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8Mediation8.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1, 15.4.1.1Minor Changes in the Work1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4

Init.

/


7

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS13Modifications, Definition of1.1.1Modifications to the Contract1.1.1, 1.1.2, 2.5, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, 10.3.2Mutual Responsibility6.2Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2Notice1.6, 1.6.1, 1.6.2, 2.1.2, 2.2.2., 2.2.3, 2.2.4, 2.5, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 7.4, 8.2.2 9.6.8, 9.7, 9.10.1, 10.2.8, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1, 14.2.2, 14.4.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.4.1Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Insurance11.1.4, 11.2.3Notice of Claims1.6.2, 2.1.2, 3.7.4, 9.6.8, 10.2.8, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.2.8, 15.3.2, 15.4.1Notice of Testing and Inspections13.4.1, 13.4.2Observations, Contractor’s3.2, 3.7.4Occupancy2.3.1, 9.6.6, 9.8Orders, Written1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.5, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.3.1OWNER2Owner, Definition of2.1.1Owner, Evidence of Financial Arrangements2.2, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4Owner, Information and Services Required of the2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4Owner’s Authority1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.32.4, 2.5, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7Owner’s Insurance11.2Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work2.5, 14.2.2

Owner’s Right to Clean Up6.3Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts6.1Owner’s Right to Stop the Work2.4Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work14.3Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract14.2, 14.4Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.2.2, 3.11, 3.17, 4.2.12, 5.3Partial Occupancy or Use9.6.6, 9.9Patching, Cutting and3.14, 6.2.5Patents3.17Payment, Applications for4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3Payment, Certificates for4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4Payment, Failure of9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2Payment, Final4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3Payment Bond, Performance Bond and7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2Payments, Progress9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION9Payments to Subcontractors5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2PCB10.3.1Performance Bond and Payment Bond7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws2.3.1, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.4.4, 10.2.2PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF10Polychlorinated Biphenyl10.3.1Product Data, Definition of3.12.2Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Progress and Completion4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.4Progress Payments9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4

Init.

/


8

Project, Definition of1.1.4Project Representatives4.2.10Property Insurance10.2.5, 11.2Proposal Requirements1.1.1PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY10Regulations and Laws1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4Rejection of Work4.2.6, 12.2.1Releases and Waivers of Liens9.3.1, 9.10.2Representations3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1Representatives2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.10, 13.2.1Responsibility for Those Performing the Work3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10Retainage9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and Architect3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor3.12Rights and Remedies1.1.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4Royalties, Patents and Copyrights3.17Rules and Notices for Arbitration15.4.1Safety of Persons and Property10.2, 10.4Safety Precautions and Programs3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4Samples, Definition of3.12.3Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Samples at the Site, Documents and3.11Schedule of Values9.2, 9.3.1Schedules, Construction3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2

Separate Contracts and Contractors1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2Separate Contractors, Definition of6.1.1Shop Drawings, Definition of3.12.1Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Site, Use of3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1Site Inspections3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.9.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.4Site Visits, Architect’s3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4Special Inspections and Testing4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.4Specifications, Definition of1.1.6Specifications1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14Statute of Limitations15.1.2, 15.4.1.1Stopping the Work2.2.2, 2.4, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1Stored Materials6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4Subcontractor, Definition of5.1.1SUBCONTRACTORS5Subcontractors, Work by1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7Subcontractual Relations5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1Submittals3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.4, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Submittal Schedule3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7Subrogation, Waivers of6.1.1, 11.3Substances, Hazardous10.3Substantial Completion4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2Substantial Completion, Definition of9.8.1Substitution of Subcontractors5.2.3, 5.2.4Substitution of Architect2.3.3Substitutions of Materials3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8Sub-subcontractor, Definition of5.1.2

Init.

/


9

Subsurface Conditions3.7.4Successors and Assigns13.2Superintendent3.9, 10.2.6Supervision and Construction Procedures1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4Suppliers1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6, 9.10.5, 14.2.1Surety5.4.1.2, 9.6.8, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 14.2.2, 15.2.7Surety, Consent of9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Surveys1.1.7, 2.3.4Suspension by the Owner for Convenience14.3Suspension of the Work3.7.5, 5.4.2, 14.3Suspension or Termination of the Contract5.4.1.1, 14Taxes3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.4.4Termination by the Contractor14.1, 15.1.7Termination by the Owner for Cause5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.7Termination by the Owner for Convenience14.4Termination of the Architect2.3.3Termination of the Contractor Employment14.2.2

TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT14Tests and Inspections3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 12.2.1, 13.4TIME8Time, Delays and Extensions of3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5

Time Limits2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.4Time Limits on Claims3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.1.3Title to Work9.3.2, 9.3.3UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK12Uncovering of Work12.1Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3Unit Prices7.3.3.2, 9.1.2Use of Documents1.1.1, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.12.6, 5.3Use of Site3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1Values, Schedule of9.2, 9.3.1Waiver of Claims by the Architect13.3.2Waiver of Claims by the Contractor9.10.5, 13.3.2, 15.1.7Waiver of Claims by the Owner9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7Waiver of Consequential Damages14.2.4, 15.1.7Waiver of Liens9.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4Waivers of Subrogation6.1.1, 11.3Warranty3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 15.1.2Weather Delays8.3, 15.1.6.2Work, Definition of1.1.3Written Consent1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 13.3.2, 15.4.4.2Written Interpretations4.2.11, 4.2.12Written Orders1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.4.2, 14.3.1

Init.

/


10

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS§ 1.1 Basic Definitions§ 1.1.1 The Contract DocumentsThe Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive, or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements.

§ 1.1.2 The ContractThe Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties.

§ 1.1.3 The WorkThe term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.

§ 1.1.4 The ProjectThe Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by Separate Contractors.

§ 1.1.5 The DrawingsThe Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams.

§ 1.1.6 The SpecificationsThe Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.

§ 1.1.7 Instruments of ServiceInstruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials.

§ 1.1.8 Initial Decision MakerThe Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2. The Initial Decision Maker shall not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and shall not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.

§ 1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents§ 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results.

Init.

/


11

§ 1.2.1.1 The invalidity of any provision of the Contract Documents shall not invalidate the Contract or its remaining provisions. If it is determined that any provision of the Contract Documents violates any law, or is otherwise invalid or unenforceable, then that provision shall be revised to the extent necessary to make that provision legal and enforceable. In such case the Contract Documents shall be construed, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to give effect to the parties’ intentions and purposes in executing the Contract.

§ 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade.

§ 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.

§ 1.3 CapitalizationTerms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles, or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.

§ 1.4 InterpretationIn the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.

§ 1.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications, and Other Instruments of Service§ 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights in their Instruments of Service, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights.

§ 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them, subject to any protocols established pursuant to Sections 1.7 and 1.8, solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect, and the Architect’s consultants.

§ 1.6 Notice§ 1.6.1 Except as otherwise provided in Section 1.6.2, where the Contract Documents require one party to notify or give notice to the other party, such notice shall be provided in writing to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed and shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person, by mail, by courier, or by electronic transmission if a method for electronic transmission is set forth in the Agreement.

§ 1.6.2 Notice of Claims as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be provided in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly served only if delivered to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed by certified or registered mail, or by courier providing proof of delivery.

§ 1.7 Digital Data Use and TransmissionThe parties shall agree upon protocols governing the transmission and use of Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form. The parties will use AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, to establish the protocols for the development, use, transmission, and exchange of digital data.

§ 1.8 Building Information Models Use and RelianceAny use of, or reliance on, all or a portion of a building information model without agreement to protocols governing the use of, and reliance on, the information contained in the model and without having those protocols set forth in AIA Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, and the requisite AIA Document

Init.

/


12

G202™–2013, Project Building Information Modeling Protocol Form, shall be at the using or relying party’s sole risk and without liability to the other party and its contractors or consultants, the authors of, or contributors to, the building information model, and each of their agents and employees.

ARTICLE 2 OWNER§ 2.1 General§ 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative.

§ 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of, or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein.

§ 2.2 Evidence of the Owner’s Financial Arrangements§ 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. The Contractor shall have no obligation to commence the Work until the Owner provides such evidence. If commencement of the Work is delayed under this Section 2.2.1, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately.

§ 2.2.2 Following commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract only if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner’s ability to make payment when due; or (3) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum. If the Owner fails to provide such evidence, as required, within fourteen days of the Contractor’s request, the Contractor may immediately stop the Work and, in that event, shall notify the Owner that the Work has stopped. However, if the request is made because a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum under (3) above, the Contractor may immediately stop only that portion of the Work affected by the change until reasonable evidence is provided. If the Work is stopped under this Section 2.2.2, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 2.2.3 After the Owner furnishes evidence of financial arrangements under this Section 2.2, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor.

§ 2.2.4 Where the Owner has designated information furnished under this Section 2.2 as "confidential," the Contractor shall keep the information confidential and shall not disclose it to any other person. However, the Contractor may disclose "confidential" information, after seven (7) days’ notice to the Owner, where disclosure is required by law, including a subpoena or other form of compulsory legal process issued by a court or governmental entity, or by court or arbitrator(s) order. The Contractor may also disclose "confidential" information to its employees, consultants, sureties, Subcontractors and their employees, Sub-subcontractors, and others who need to know the content of such information solely and exclusively for the Project and who agree to maintain the confidentiality of such information.

§ 2.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner§ 2.3.1 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities.

§ 2.3.2 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture, or an entity lawfully practicing architecture, in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.

Init.

/


13

§ 2.3.3 If the employment of the Architect terminates, the Owner shall employ a successor to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect.

§ 2.3.4 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work.

§ 2.3.5 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control and relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor’s written request for such information or services.

§ 2.3.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2.

§ 2.4 Owner’s Right to Stop the WorkIf the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3.

§ 2.5 Owner’s Right to Carry Out the WorkIf the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such default or neglect. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect and the Architect may, pursuant to Section 9.5.1, withhold or nullify a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to reimburse the Owner for the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. If current and future payments are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. If the Contractor disagrees with the actions of the Owner or the Architect, or the amounts claimed as costs to the Owner, the Contractor may file a Claim pursuant to Article 15.

ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR§ 3.1 General§ 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative.

§ 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor.

§ 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor§ 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.

Init.

/


14

§ 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.4, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require.

§ 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall submit Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner, subject to Section 15.1.7, as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities.

§ 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures§ 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and shall be solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owner and Architect, and shall propose alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect shall evaluate the proposed alternative solely for conformance with the design intent for the completed construction. Unless the Architect objects to the Contractor’s proposed alternative, the Contractor shall perform the Work using its alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures.

§ 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.

§ 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.

§ 3.4 Labor and Materials§ 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.

§ 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work approved by the Architect in accordance with Section 3.12.8 or ordered by the Architect in accordance with Section 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive.

Init.

/


15

§ 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them.

§ 3.5 Warranty§ 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.

§ 3.5.2 All material, equipment, or other special warranties required by the Contract Documents shall be issued in the name of the Owner, or shall be transferable to the Owner, and shall commence in accordance with Section 9.8.4.

§ 3.6 TaxesThe Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect.

§ 3.7 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws§ 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded.

§ 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.

§ 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.

§ 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown ConditionsIf the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 14 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party may submit a Claim as provided in Article 15.

§ 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15.

Init.

/


16

§ 3.8 Allowances§ 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection.

§ 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,.1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all

required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;.2 Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and

other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and

.3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs under Section 3.8.2.2.

§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness.

§ 3.9 Superintendent§ 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.

§ 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor, stating whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

§ 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed.

§ 3.10 Contractor’s Construction and Submittal Schedules§ 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall submit for the Owner’s and Architect’s information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall contain detail appropriate for the Project, including (1) the date of commencement of the Work, interim schedule milestone dates, and the date of Substantial Completion; (2) an apportionment of the Work by construction activity; and (3) the time required for completion of each portion of the Work. The schedule shall provide for the orderly progression of the Work to completion and shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents. The schedule shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project.

§ 3.10.2 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, shall submit a submittal schedule for the Architect’s approval. The Architect’s approval shall not be unreasonably delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, or fails to provide submittals in accordance with the approved submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals.

§ 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect.

§ 3.11 Documents and Samples at the SiteThe Contractor shall make available, at the Project site, the Contract Documents, including Change Orders, Construction Change Directives, and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and the approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar required submittals. These shall be in electronic form or paper copy, available to the Architect and Owner, and

Init.

/


17

delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed.

§ 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples§ 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules, and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship, and establish standards by which the Work will be judged.

§ 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.

§ 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve, and submit to the Architect, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents, in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of Separate Contractors.

§ 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.

§ 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect.

§ 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, unless the Contractor has specifically notified the Architect of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, by the Architect’s approval thereof.

§ 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.

§ 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law.

§ 3.12.10.1 If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely

Init.

/


18

upon the adequacy and accuracy of the performance and design criteria provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by an appropriately licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings, and other submittals related to the Work, designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 3.12.10.2 If the Contract Documents require the Contractor’s design professional to certify that the Work has been performed in accordance with the design criteria, the Contractor shall furnish such certifications to the Architect at the time and in the form specified by the Architect.

§ 3.13 Use of SiteThe Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, lawful orders of public authorities, and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment.

§ 3.14 Cutting and Patching§ 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting, or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting, or patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting, or patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

§ 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting, patching, or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter construction by the Owner or a Separate Contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold, from the Owner or a Separate Contractor, its consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.

§ 3.15 Cleaning Up§ 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials from and about the Project.

§ 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor.

§ 3.16 Access to WorkThe Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect with access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located.

§ 3.17 Royalties, Patents and CopyrightsThe Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for defense or loss when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications, or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if an infringement of a copyright or patent is discovered by, or made known to, the Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for the loss unless the information is promptly furnished to the Architect.

Init.

/


19

§ 3.18 Indemnification§ 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss, or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18.

§ 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT§ 4.1 General§ 4.1.1 The Architect is the person or entity retained by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.2 and identified as such in the Agreement.

§ 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified, or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.

§ 4.2 Administration of the Contract§ 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and promptly report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents, (2) known deviations from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (3) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of, and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of, the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.4 Communications The Owner and Contractor shall include the Architect in all communications that relate to or affect the Architect’s services or professional responsibilities. The Owner shall promptly notify the Architect of the substance of any direct communications between the Owner and the Contractor otherwise relating to the Project. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with Separate Contractors shall be through the Owner. The Contract Documents may specify other communication protocols.

Init.

/


20

§ 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.

§ 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.4.2 and 13.4.3, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5, and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.

§ 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may order minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4.

§ 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10.

§ 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more Project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any change in the duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Project representatives.

§ 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.

§ 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either, and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.

§ 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information.

Init.

/


21

ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS§ 5.1 Definitions§ 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a Separate Contractor or the subcontractors of a Separate Contractor.

§ 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor.

§ 5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work§ 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the persons or entities proposed for each principal portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required.

§ 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person, or entity for one previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution.

§ 5.3 Subcontractual RelationsBy appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work that the Contractor, by these Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies, and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.

§ 5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts§ 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that

.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor; and

.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract.

Init.

/


22

When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and obligations under the subcontract.

§ 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor’s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension.

§ 5.4.3 Upon assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the subcontract.

ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS§ 6.1 Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts§ 6.1.1 The term "Separate Contractor(s)" shall mean other contractors retained by the Owner under separate agreements. The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, and with Separate Contractors retained under Conditions of the Contract substantially similar to those of this Contract, including those provisions of the Conditions of the Contract related to insurance and waiver of subrogation.

§ 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.

§ 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each Separate Contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with any Separate Contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any revisions to its construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner until subsequently revised.

§ 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces or with Separate Contractors, the Owner or its Separate Contractors shall have the same obligations and rights that the Contractor has under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6, and Articles 10, 11, and 12.

§ 6.2 Mutual Responsibility§ 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and Separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.

§ 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a Separate Contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results of the Contractor’s Work. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects prior to proceeding with the Work shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner’s or Separate Contractor’s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor’s Work. The Contractor shall not be responsible for discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that are not apparent.

§ 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a Separate Contractor because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a Separate Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction.

§ 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage that the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or Separate Contractor as provided in Section 10.2.5.

Init.

/


23

§ 6.2.5 The Owner and each Separate Contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14.

§ 6.3 Owner’s Right to Clean UpIf a dispute arises among the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.

ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK§ 7.1 General§ 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. A Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor. An order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.

§ 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall proceed promptly with changes in the Work, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or order for a minor change in the Work.

§ 7.2 Change Orders§ 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:

.1 The change in the Work;

.2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and

.3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.

§ 7.3 Construction Change Directives§ 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions, or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.

§ 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order.

§ 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods:

.1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;

.2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

.3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or

.4 As provided in Section 7.3.4.

§ 7.3.4 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.4 shall be limited to the following:

Init.

/


24

.1 Costs of labor, including applicable payroll taxes, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, workers’ compensation insurance, and other employee costs approved by the Architect;

.2 Costs of materials, supplies, and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed;

.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others;

.4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use, or similar taxes, directly related to the change; and

.5 Costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.

§ 7.3.5 If the Contractor disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Time, the Contractor may make a Claim in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.

§ 7.3.6 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

§ 7.3.7 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.

§ 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change.

§ 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15.

§ 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive.

§ 7.4 Minor Changes in the WorkThe Architect may order minor changes in the Work that are consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents and do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time. The Architect’s order for minor changes shall be in writing. If the Contractor believes that the proposed minor change in the Work will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and shall not proceed to implement the change in the Work. If the Contractor performs the Work set forth in the Architect’s order for a minor change without prior notice to the Architect that such change will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor waives any adjustment to the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time.

ARTICLE 8 TIME§ 8.1 Definitions§ 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.

§ 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.

§ 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8.

Init.

/


25

§ 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined.

§ 8.2 Progress and Completion§ 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.

§ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, commence the Work prior to the effective date of insurance required to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner.

§ 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time.

§ 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time§ 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by (1) an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, of an employee of either, or of a Separate Contractor; (2) by changes ordered in the Work; (3) by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties, adverse weather conditions documented in accordance with Section 15.1.6.2, or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control; (4) by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and binding dispute resolution; or (5) by other causes that the Contractor asserts, and the Architect determines, justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.

§ 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.

§ 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION§ 9.1 Contract Sum§ 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.

§ 9.1.2 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed so that application of such unit prices to the actual quantities causes substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.

§ 9.2 Schedule of ValuesWhere the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit a schedule of values to the Architect before the first Application for Payment, allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in the form, and supported by the data to substantiate its accuracy, required by the Architect. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. Any changes to the schedule of values shall be submitted to the Architect and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require, and unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s subsequent Applications for Payment.

§ 9.3 Applications for Payment§ 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. The application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by all data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment that the Owner or Architect require, such as copies of requisitions, and releases and waivers of liens from Subcontractors and suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders.

Init.

/


26

§ 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay.

§ 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage, and transportation to the site, for such materials and equipment stored off the site.

§ 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information, and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances, in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons or entities that provided labor, materials, and equipment relating to the Work.

§ 9.4 Certificates for Payment§ 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either (1) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment in the full amount of the Application for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor; or (2) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification in part as provided in Section 9.5.1; or (3) withhold certification of the entire Application for Payment, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect’s reason for withholding certification in whole as provided in Section 9.5.1.

§ 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data in the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information, and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion, and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work; (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures; (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment; or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.

§ 9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification§ 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of

.1 defective Work not remedied;

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims, unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;

.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or suppliers for labor, materials or equipment;

Init.

/


27

.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5 damage to the Owner or a Separate Contractor;

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or

.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.5.2 When either party disputes the Architect’s decision regarding a Certificate for Payment under Section 9.5.1, in whole or in part, that party may submit a Claim in accordance with Article 15.

§ 9.5.3 When the reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld.

§ 9.5.4 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Contractor shall reflect such payment on its next Application for Payment.

§ 9.6 Progress Payments§ 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect.

§ 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner, the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner.

§ 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.

§ 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors and suppliers to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay, or to see to the payment of money to, a Subcontractor or supplier, except as may otherwise be required by law.

§ 9.6.5 The Contractor’s payments to suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4.

§ 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors or provided by suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust, or entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.

§ 9.6.8 Provided the Owner has fulfilled its payment obligations under the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall defend and indemnify the Owner from all loss, liability, damage or expense, including reasonable attorney’s fees and litigation expenses, arising out of any lien claim or other claim for payment by any Subcontractor or supplier of any tier. Upon receipt of notice of a lien claim or other claim for payment, the Owner shall notify the Contractor. If approved by the applicable court, when required, the Contractor may substitute a surety bond for the property against which the lien or other claim for payment has been asserted.

Init.

/


28

§ 9.7 Failure of PaymentIf the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents, the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8 Substantial Completion§ 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.

§ 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion; establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance; and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. Upon such acceptance, and consent of surety if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to the Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use§ 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.

§ 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor, and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work.

Init.

/


29

§ 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment§ 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection. When the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled.

§ 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment, (5) documentation of any special warranties, such as manufacturers’ warranties or specific Subcontractor warranties, and (6) if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts and releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance. If a lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging the lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees.

§ 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed, corrected, and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of the surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims.

§ 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from.1 liens, Claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents; or.4 audits performed by the Owner, if permitted by the Contract Documents, after final payment.

§ 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a supplier, shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment.

ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY§ 10.1 Safety Precautions and ProgramsThe Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract.

§ 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property§ 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to

Init.

/


30

.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody, or control of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a Sub-subcontractor; and

.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with, and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities, bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury, or loss.

§ 10.2.3 The Contractor shall implement, erect, and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards; promulgating safety regulations; and notifying the owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities of the safeguards.

§ 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment, or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel.

§ 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3. The Contractor may make a Claim for the cost to remedy the damage or loss to the extent such damage or loss is attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18.

§ 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect.

§ 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition.

§ 10.2.8 Injury or Damage to Person or PropertyIf either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, notice of the injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter.

§ 10.3 Hazardous Materials and Substances§ 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials or substances. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and notify the Owner and Architect of the condition.

§ 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of the material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of the material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will

Init.

/


31

promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable additional costs of shutdown, delay, and start-up.

§ 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss, or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity.

§ 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be responsible for hazardous materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor’s fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances.

§ 10.3.5 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner’s fault or negligence.

§ 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.

§ 10.4 EmergenciesIn an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7.

ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS§ 11.1 Contractor’s Insurance and Bonds§ 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Owner, Architect, and Architect’s consultants shall be named as additional insureds under the Contractor’s commercial general liability policy or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents.

§ 11.1.2 The Contractor shall provide surety bonds of the types, for such penal sums, and subject to such terms and conditions as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.

§ 11.1.3 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished.

§ 11.1.4 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Contractor’s Required Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Contractor becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide notice to the Owner of such impending or actual cancellation or

Init.

/


32

expiration. Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor, the Owner shall, unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Owner, have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by the Contractor. The furnishing of notice by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any contractual obligation to provide any required coverage.

§ 11.2 Owner’s Insurance§ 11.2.1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Owner shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.

§ 11.2.2 Failure to Purchase Required Property Insurance. If the Owner fails to purchase and maintain the required property insurance, with all of the coverages and in the amounts described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner, the Contractor may delay commencement of the Work and may obtain insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-Subcontractors in the Work. When the failure to provide coverage has been cured or resolved, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted. In the event the Owner fails to procure coverage, the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent the loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance to have been procured by the Owner. The cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by a Change Order. If the Owner does not provide written notice, and the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all reasonable costs and damages attributable thereto.

§ 11.2.3 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Owner’s Required Property Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Owner becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any property insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall provide notice to the Contractor of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Contractor: (1) the Contractor, upon receipt of notice from the Owner, shall have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by either the Owner or the Contractor; (2) the Contract Time and Contract Sum shall be equitably adjusted; and (3) the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent any loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance had it not expired or been cancelled. If the Contractor purchases replacement coverage, the cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by an appropriate Change Order. The furnishing of notice by the Owner shall not relieve the Owner of any contractual obligation to provide required insurance.

§ 11.3 Waivers of Subrogation§ 11.3.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, each of the other; (2) the Architect and Architect’s consultants; and (3) Separate Contractors, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, for damages caused by fire, or other causes of loss, to the extent those losses are covered by property insurance required by the Agreement or other property insurance applicable to the Project, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require similar written waivers in favor of the individuals and entities identified above from the Architect, Architect’s consultants, Separate Contractors, subcontractors, and sub-subcontractors. The policies of insurance purchased and maintained by each person or entity agreeing to waive claims pursuant to this section 11.3.1 shall not prohibit this waiver of subrogation. This waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity (1) even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, (2) even though that person or entity did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, or (3) whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the damaged property.

§ 11.3.2 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, to the extent permissible by such policies, the Owner waives all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.1 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance.

Init.

/


33

§ 11.4 Loss of Use, Business Interruption, and Delay in Completion InsuranceThe Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain insurance that will protect the Owner against loss of use of the Owner’s property, or the inability to conduct normal operations, due to fire or other causes of loss. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor and Architect for loss of use of the Owner’s property, due to fire or other hazards however caused.

§11.5 Adjustment and Settlement of Insured Loss§ 11.5.1 A loss insured under the property insurance required by the Agreement shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.5.2. The Owner shall pay the Architect and Contractor their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Owner, and by appropriate agreements the Architect and Contractor shall make payments to their consultants and Subcontractors in similar manner.

§ 11.5.2 Prior to settlement of an insured loss, the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the terms of the proposed settlement as well as the proposed allocation of the insurance proceeds. The Contractor shall have 14 days from receipt of notice to object to the proposed settlement or allocation of the proceeds. If the Contractor does not object, the Owner shall settle the loss and the Contractor shall be bound by the settlement and allocation. Upon receipt, the Owner shall deposit the insurance proceeds in a separate account and make the appropriate distributions. Thereafter, if no other agreement is made or the Owner does not terminate the Contract for convenience, the Owner and Contractor shall execute a Change Order for reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work in the amount allocated for that purpose. If the Contractor timely objects to either the terms of the proposed settlement or the allocation of the proceeds, the Owner may proceed to settle the insured loss, and any dispute between the Owner and Contractor arising out of the settlement or allocation of the proceeds shall be resolved pursuant to Article 15. Pending resolution of any dispute, the Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive for the reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work.

ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK§ 12.1 Uncovering of Work§ 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect’s examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time.

§ 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to the Contract Sum and Contract Time as may be appropriate. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the costs of uncovering the Work, and the cost of correction, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

§ 12.2 Correction of Work§ 12.2.1 Before Substantial CompletionThe Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, discovered before Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

§ 12.2.2 After Substantial Completion§ 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during

Init.

/


34

that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.5.

§ 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work.

§ 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.

§ 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.

§ 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors, whether completed or partially completed, caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.

§ 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming WorkIf the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.

ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS§ 13.1 Governing LawThe Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located, excluding that jurisdiction’s choice of law rules. If the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4.

§ 13.2 Successors and Assigns§ 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.

§ 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate the assignment.

§ 13.3 Rights and Remedies§ 13.3.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.

§ 13.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect, or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed upon in writing.

Init.

/


35

§ 13.4 Tests and Inspections§ 13.4.1 Tests, inspections, and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections, or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. The Owner shall directly arrange and pay for tests, inspections, or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations so require.

§ 13.4.2 If the Architect, Owner, or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection, or approval not included under Section 13.4.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection, or approval, by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.4.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense.

§ 13.4.3 If procedures for testing, inspection, or approval under Sections 13.4.1 and 13.4.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure, including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

§ 13.4.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection, or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.

§ 13.4.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections, or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.

§ 13.4.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work.

§ 13.5 InterestPayments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate the parties agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located.

ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT§ 14.1 Termination by the Contractor§ 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, for any of the following reasons:

.1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped;

.2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, that requires all Work to be stopped;

.3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or

.4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.

§ 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, repeated suspensions, delays, or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3, constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less.

Init.

/


36

§ 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’ notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, as well as reasonable overhead and profit on Work not executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination.

§ 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3.

§ 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause§ 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor

.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;

.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors or suppliers;

.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or

.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.

§ 14.2.2 When any of the reasons described in Section 14.2.1 exist, and upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:

.1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;

.2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and

.3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.

§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.

§ 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract.

§ 14.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience§ 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work, in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.

§ 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay, or interruption under Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent

.1 that performance is, was, or would have been, so suspended, delayed, or interrupted, by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or

.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.

§ 14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience§ 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause.

§ 14.4.2 Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;

Init.

/


37

.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and

.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders.

§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Owner shall pay the Contractor for Work properly executed; costs incurred by reason of the termination, including costs attributable to termination of Subcontracts; and the termination fee, if any, set forth in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES§ 15.1 Claims § 15.1.1 DefinitionA Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, a change in the Contract Time, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. This Section 15.1.1 does not require the Owner to file a Claim in order to impose liquidated damages in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 15.1.2 Time Limits on ClaimsThe Owner and Contractor shall commence all Claims and causes of action against the other and arising out of or related to the Contract, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, in accordance with the requirements of the binding dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement and within the period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all Claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 15.1.2.

§ 15.1.3 Notice of Claims§ 15.1.3.1 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered prior to expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party under this Section 15.1.3.1 shall be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later.

§ 15.1.3.2 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party. In such event, no decision by the Initial Decision Maker is required.

§ 15.1.4 Continuing Contract Performance§ 15.1.4.1 Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 15.1.4.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted in accordance with the Initial Decision Maker’s decision, subject to the right of either party to proceed in accordance with this Article 15. The Architect will issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decision of the Initial Decision Maker.

§ 15.1.5 Claims for Additional CostIf the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given before proceeding to execute the portion of the Work that is the subject of the Claim. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4.

§ 15.1.6 Claims for Additional Time§ 15.1.6.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary.

Init.

/


38

§ 15.1.6.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated, and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.

§ 15.1.7 Waiver of Claims for Consequential DamagesThe Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes

.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and

.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit, except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.

This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.7 shall be deemed to preclude assessment of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 15.2 Initial Decision§ 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2 or arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, and 11.5, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim. If an initial decision has not been rendered within 30 days after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker, the party asserting the Claim may demand mediation and binding dispute resolution without a decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner.

§ 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim.

§ 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner’s expense.

§ 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of the request, and shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished, or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part.

§ 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute resolution.

§ 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1.

Init.

/


39

§ 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of receipt of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party file for mediation. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within 30 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision.

§ 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy.

§ 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines.

§ 15.3 Mediation§ 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract, except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.7, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution.

§ 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings.

§ 15.3.3 Either party may, within 30 days from the date that mediation has been concluded without resolution of the dispute or 60 days after mediation has been demanded without resolution of the dispute, demand in writing that the other party file for binding dispute resolution. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for binding dispute resolution within 60 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision.

§ 15.3.4 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4 Arbitration§ 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. The Arbitration shall be conducted in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded.

§ 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim.

§ 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

Init.

/


40

§ 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement, shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4.4 Consolidation or Joinder § 15.4.4.1 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules, either party may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact, and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s).

§ 15.4.4.2 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules, either party may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent.

§ 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as those of the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement.




Additions and Deletions Report for AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 11:28:14 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No.7549747394 which expires on 01/28/2020, and is not for resale.User Notes: (1835156841)

1

PAGE 1

Claremont FSES Remediation1000 Claremont RoadCarlisle, PA 17013

…


…



1


I, Michael Allen-Hall, AIA, hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, information and belief, that I created the attached final document simultaneously with its associated Additions and Deletions Report and this certification at 11:28:14 ET on 08/19/2019 under Order No. 7549747394 from AIA Contract Documents software and that in preparing the attached final document I made no changes to the original text of AIA® Document A201™ – 2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction , as published by the AIA in its software, other than those additions and deletions shown in the associated Additions and Deletions Report.

_____________________________________________________________(Signed)

_____________________________________________________________(Title)

_____________________________________________________________(Dated)

Proj. No. 18144.01 Supplementary General Conditions 00601-1

SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS

The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the “General Conditions of

the Contract for Construction” AIA Document A201, 2017 Edition. Where any article of General Conditions is modified or any paragraph, subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered provisions of the article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall remain in effect. The General Conditions also may be supplemented elsewhere in the contract documents by provisions located in, but not necessarily limited to, Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specifications. ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS Paragraph 1.1 - Basic Definitions Subparagraph 1.1.1 – The Contract Documents

DELETE the first sentence of Subparagraph 1.1.1 in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, substitute the following:

[Substitute:] The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Advertisement for Bids, Instructions to Bidders, , Bid Forms, Contractor’s Qualification Statement (AIA Document A305), Non-Collusion Affidavit of Contractor, Non-Discrimination Affidavit, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor (AIA Document A101), Affidavit Accepting Provisions of any applicable Workman’s Compensation Act, Bid Bond (AIA Document A310), Performance & Payment Bonds (AIA Document A312), Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary), Stipulation Against Liens, (AIA Document G706A), List of Drawings, Prevailing Minimum Wage Determination, the Drawings, Specifications, all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract and all modifications thereto.

DELETE the last sentence of Subparagraph 1.1.1 in its entirety. Subparagraph 1.1.2 – The Contract

ADD the following new Sub-subparagraph to the end of Subparagraph 1.1.2:

1.1.2.1 The invalidity of any covenant, restriction, condition, limitation or any other part

or provision of the Contract Documents shall not impair or affect in any manner the validity, enforceability or effect of the remainder of the Contract Documents.

Subparagraph 1.1.3 – The Work

ADD the following to the end of the first sentence.

[Add:] . . . including any subcontractor’s and sub-subcontractor’s work and material suppliers or any other entity for which the Contractor is responsible and whether on or off the site of the Project.

DELETE the last sentence of Subparagraph 1.1.3 in its entirety.


Subparagraph 1.1.5 – The Drawings

ADD the following to the end of Subparagraph 1.1.5: [Add:] . . . and shop drawings.

ADD the following new Subparagraphs as follows:

1.1.9 The term “product” includes materials, systems and equipment. 1.1.10 The term “provide” includes furnishing and installing a product, complete in

place, operating, tested and approved. 1.1.11 The term “building code” and the term “code” refer to regulations of

governmental agencies having jurisdiction. 1.1.12 The terms “approved”, “required” and “as directed” refer to and indicate the

work or materials that may be approved, required or directed by the Architect acting as the agent of the Owner.

1.1.13 The term “similar” means in its general sense and not necessarily identical. 1.1.14 The terms “shown”, “indicated”, “detailed”, “noted”, “scheduled” and terms of

similar import refer to requirements contained in the Contract Documents.

Paragraph 1.2 - Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents


1.2.4 Computed dimensions shall take precedence over scale dimensions, and large scale drawings shall take precedence over small scale drawings.

1.2.5 Anything shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications or

mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned respectively in both. Any work shown on one Drawing shall be construed to be shown in all Drawings, and the Contractor shall coordinate the Work and Drawings to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.2.6 If any portion of the Contract Documents shall be in conflict with any other

portion, after the application of the rules of interpretation set forth in this Paragraph 1.2, the various documents comprising the Contract Documents shall govern in the order of precedence as herein set forth according to their latest date of execution: (a) Change Orders submitted, processed and approved in accordance with applicable procedure; (b) written amendment to the various agreements (including but not limited to the Agreement) entered into or executed by the Owner; (c) the various agreements entered into and executed by the Owner, including but not limited to the Agreement (as modified by any Addenda thereto); (d) Addenda; (e) Supplementary General Conditions; (f) General Conditions; (g) Division 1 Specifications; (h) Instruction to Bidders;; (i) Invitation to Bid; (j) Bid Form; and (k) Drawings and


Specifications. In the event of an inconsistency between the Specifications and Drawings, the interpretation as determined by the Architect shall prevail; as between large scale drawings and small scale drawings, the large scale shall take precedence. Specifications having greater detail or specificity take priority over specifications of lesser detail or specificity and detail takes precedence over general drawings.

ADD the following new Subparagraphs as follows: 1.9 GOVERNING LAWS AND REGULATIONS 1.9.1 The Bidder’s attention is directed to the fact that all applicable Federal and State laws,

municipal ordinances and codes, and the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over construction of the Project shall apply to the Contract throughout, and they are deemed to be included in the Contract the same as though herein written in full.

1.9.2 Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (O.S.H.A.) 1.9.2.1Attention is directed to the terms, provisions and conditions of the William-Steiger Safety

and Health Act of 1970, which is specifically applicable to this Project.

1.9.2.2 The Contractor agrees to be bound by them and further agrees and promises to conform and comply with the Standards set forth in the Act.

1.9.2.3 The Contractor is required to promptly perform all reporting and recording, compliance and safety as required by said Act.

1.9.3 Pennsylvania Act 287 - Utilities Protection:

The Contractor will be responsible for complying with Pennsylvania Act 287, commonly known as the “Call Before You Dig Act”. Excavation or digging Contractors may learn the utilities and authority Owners by calling 1-800-242-1776 statewide prior to excavation work. One call locates utility lines and the utilities are notified.

1.9.4 Pennsylvania Prevailing Wage Act 442: 1.9.4.1 The general prevailing minimum wage rates, including contributions for employees

benefits, as shall have been determined by the Secretary of the Prevailing Wage Division of the Pennsylvania Department of Labor & Industry which must be paid to the workman employed in the performance of the Contract are included in this Project Manual.

1.9.4.2 The Contract shall specifically provide that the Contractor shall pay no less than the

wage rates as determined in the decision of the Secretary of Labor and Industry and shall comply with the conditions of the Pennsylvania Prevailing Wage Act approved August 15, 1961 (Act No. 442), as amended August 9, 1963, (Act No. 342), and the Regulations issued pursuant thereto, to assure the full and proper payment of said rates.

1.9.4.3 The Contract shall contain the stipulation that such workmen shall be paid no less than such general prevailing minimum wage rates and such other provisions to assure payment thereof as heretofore set forth in this Section.


1.9.4.4 The Contract provisions shall apply to all work performed on the contract by the

contractor and to all work performed on the contract by all subcontractors. 1.9.4.5 The Contractor shall insert in each of their subcontracts all of the stipulations contained

in these required provisions and such other stipulations as may be required.

1.9.4.6 The contract shall provide that no workmen may be employed on the public work except in accordance with the classifications set forth in the decisions of the Secretary. In the event that additional or different classifications are necessary the procedure set forth in Section 7 of these Regulations shall be followed.

1.9.4.7 The contract shall provide that all workmen employed or working on the public work shall be paid unconditionally, regardless of whether any contractual relationship exists or the nature of any contractual relations which may be alleged to exist between any contractor, subcontractor and workmen, not less than once a week without deduction or rebate, on any account, whether directly or indirectly, except authorized deductions, the full amounts due at the time of payment, computed at the rates applicable to the time worked in the contract, the Act, or these Regulations shall prohibit the payment of more than the general prevailing minimum wage rates as determined by the Secretary to any workman on the public work.

1.9.4.8 The contract shall provide that the contractor and each subcontractor shall post for the entire period of construction the wage determination decisions of the Secretary, including the effective date of any changes thereof, in a prominent and easily accessible place or places used by them to pay workmen their wages. The posted notices of wage rates must contain the following information:

a. Name of project. b. Name of public bid of which it is being constructed. c. The crafts and classifications of workmen listed in the Secretary’s general

prevailing minimum wage rate determination for the particular project. d. The general prevailing minimum wage rates determined for each craft and

classification and the effective date of any changes. e. The statement advising workmen that if they have been paid less than the

general prevailing minimum wage rate for their job classification or that the contractor and/or subcontractor are not complying with the Act or these Regulations in any manner whatsoever, they may file a protest in writing with the Secretary of Labor and Industry within three (3) months of the date of the occurrence, objecting to the payment to any contractor to the extent of the amount or amounts due or to become due to them as wages for work performed on the public work project. Any workmen paid less than the rate specified in the contract shall have civil right of action for the difference between the wage paid and the wages stipulated in the contract, which right of action must be exercised within six (6) months from the occurrence of the event creating such right.

1.9.4.9 The contract shall provide that the contractor and all subcontractors shall keep an

accurate record showing the name, craft and/or classification, number of hours worked per day and the actual hourly rate of wage paid (including employee benefits) to each workman employed by them in connection with the public work and such record must include any deductions from each workman. The record shall be preserved for two years from the date of payment and shall be open at all reasonable hours to the inspection of


the public body awarding the contract and to the Secretary or his duly authorized representatives.

1.9.4.10The contract shall provide that apprentices shall be limited to such members as shall be

in accordance with a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with and approved by the Pennsylvania Apprenticeship and Training Council and only apprentices whose training and employment are in full compliance with the provisions of the Apprenticeship and Training Act approved July 14, 1961 (Act No. 304) and the Rules and Regulations issued pursuant thereto shall be employed on the public work project. Any workman using the tools of a craft who does not qualify as an apprentice within the provisions of this subsection shall be paid the rate predetermined for journeyman in that particular craft and/or classification.

1.9.4.110Wages shall be paid without any deductions except authorized deductions. Employers not parties to a contract requiring contributions for employee benefits which the Secretary has determined to be included in the general prevailing minimum wage rate shall pay the monetary equivalent thereof directly to the workman.

1.9.4.12Payment of compensation to workmen for work performed on public work on a lump sum basis, or a piece work system, or a price certain for the completion of a certain amount of work, or the production of a certain result shall be deemed a violation of the Act and these Regulations, regardless of the average hourly earnings resulting therefrom.

1.9.4.13The contract shall also provide that each contractor and each subcontractor shall file a statement each week and a final statement at the conclusion of the work on the contract with the contracting agency, under oath, and in form satisfactory to the Secretary, certifying that all workmen have been paid wages in strict conformity with the provisions of the contract as prescribed by this Section 3 of these Regulations, or if any wages remain unpaid to set forth the amount of wages due and owing to each workman respectively.

1.9.4.14The provisions of the Act and these Regulations shall be incorporated by reference in the contract.

1.9.5 Pennsylvania Human Relation Act 222: 1.9.5.1 Non-Discrimination Provision: The contractor agrees that they will comply with the

provisions of the Pennsylvania Human Relations Act pursuant to the provisions of Act 222, October 27, 1955, as amended by Act 19, February 8, 1961, and in accordance with the provisions of the Governor’s code of Fair Practice, effective June 6, 1963, and the Regulations of the Pennsylvania Human Relations Commission, as approved by the Attorney General July 17, 1965, in providing equal employment opportunities in connection with all work performed by them at the job site pursuant to this contract. The contractor, therefore, agrees:

1. That they will not discriminate nor permit discrimination by their agents, servants or

employees against any employees or applicant for employment with regard to hiring, tenure or employment, promotion, terms, conditions or privileges or employment at the job site covered by this contract, because of race, gender, color, religion, age or national origin, and will take such affirmative action as is hereinafter set forth to prevent same.


2a. That they will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which they have a collective bargaining agreement or other Contract or understanding, a notice to be provided by the Pennsylvania Human Relations Commission, advising the said labor union or worker’s representative of the Contractor’s commitments under this section and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to their employees and applicants for employment.

2b. That they will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which they have a collective bargaining agreement of other contract or understanding, a notice to be provided by the Pennsylvania Human Relations Commission, advising the said labor union or worker’s representative of the Contractor’s commitments under this section, and shall post copies of the notice on conspicuous places available to their employees and applicants for employment.

3a. That they shall supply the contracting agency of the state with a periodic report, called a “Compliance Report”, relating to work performed at the job site under this Contract as may be required by the Pennsylvania Human Relations Commission. The Commission shall, at all times have access to employment records of said Contractor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with the rules, regulations and orders of the Pennsylvania Human Relations Commission, relating to discrimination.

3b. That they shall insert the provisions of subsections (1), (2), and (3) of the paragraph in all subcontractors which are entered by the Contractor under this Contract requiring work to be done at the job site, and covenants to be binding upon such subcontractors.

1.9.6 Pennsylvania Act 57 of 1998: This project is subject to the Provisions of Pa. Act 57 of 1998 covering contracts for public work.

1.9.7 PA Tax Exempt Entities

1.9.7.1 Section 204 of the Tax Reform Code of 1971, 72 O.S. §7204(57)(i) and (ii), as amended

July 1, 1998, provides a tax exemption for the sale of retail to or use by the United States, the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania or its instrumentalities or political subdivisions, of tangible personal property or services; and the use by a construction contractor of building machinery and equipment and services thereto that are transferred pursuant to a construction contract for any charitable organization, volunteer fireman’s organization, nonprofit educational institution or religious organization for religious purposes, provided that the building machinery and equipment and services there to are not used in any unrelated trade or business. In order to permit the Contractor to benefit from the foregoing exemption, the tax-exempt entity may be required to cooperate with the construction contractors and provide certain evidence as may be required from time to time by the Pennsylvania Department of Revenue.

1.9.7.2 The Contractor is entitled to the aforementioned tax exemption, and the contractor

should reflect the tax exemption in all bids, where appropriate. 1.9.7.3 The Contractor is encouraged to use a Pennsylvania Tax Exemption Certificate (Form

REV-1220) when buying property that qualifies for the tax exemption. 1.9.7.4 Access to Accounting Records: The Contractor shall check all materials, equipment and

labor entering into the Work and shall keep such full and detailed accounts as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement, and he system shall


be satisfactory to the Owner. The Owner or its representative shall be afforded access to all the Contractor’s records, books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts vouchers, memoranda, and similar data relating to this Contract, and the Contractor shall preserve all such records for a period of three years, or for such longer period as may be required by, after the final payment.

1.9.7.5 Contracts With Subcontractors: The Contractor agrees to include the “Access to

Accounting Records” paragraph, in full, in any contracts with subcontractors. 1.9.8 Anti-Pollution Legislation 1.9.8.1 On October 26, 1972, House Bill Number 1969 was enacted into law. This Act (No.

247) became effective on November 25, 1972. It requires that Bidders on construction contracts for the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania be advised of those provision of Federal and State statutes, rules and regulations dealing with the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of public natural resources that affect the Project on which bids are being received.

1.9.8.2 The Bidder shall thoroughly acquaint itself with the terms of the listed statutes, rules and

regulations. No separate or additional payment will be made for such compliance. In the event that the listed statues, rules and regulations are amended or if new statutes, rule or regulations become effective after date of receipt of bids, upon receipt of documentation which causes the Contractor to perform additional work, the Owner may issue a change order or deviation request setting forth the additional work that must be undertaken. This change order or deviation request shall no invalidate the Contract.

1.9.8.3 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine what local ordinances, if any, will

affect its work. They shall check for any county, city, borough or township rules or regulations applicable to the area in which the project is being constructed and, in addition, for any rules or regulations of other organizations having jurisdiction, such as chambers-of-commerce, planning commissions, industries or utility companies who have jurisdiction over lands which the Contractor occupies. Any costs of compliance with local controls shall be included in the price bid, even though document of such local controlling agencies are not listed herein.

1.9.9 Public Works Employment Verification Act. 1.9.9.1The Contractor agrees that he and his Subcontractors performing work under this

Contract shall comply with the Public Employment Verification Act, Act 127 of 2012. 1.9.9.2The Act requires public works contractors and subcontractors performing work on public

works projects in this Commonwealth to comply with the Federal E-Verify program to ensure employees are authorized to work in the United States. The E-Verify program is a free Internet-based program operated by the United States Department of Homeland Security (Department) that compares information from an employee's Form I-9, Employment Eligibility Verification (“EVP”), to data from the United States Department of Homeland Security and Social Security Administration records to confirm employment eligibility.

1.9.9.3 Requirements: Each prime contractor and each subcontractor agree as follows:


(a) Public works contractors and every subcontractor performing work under a public works contract shall utilize the EVP system to verify the employment eligibility of each new employee hired after January 1, 2013.

(b) Public works contractors and every subcontractor performing work under a public

works contract shall submit the Form (attached to this Invitation to Bid as Exhibit "A") to the County with the bid or, in the event of subsequently identified subcontractors, prior to commencement of work, to ensure compliance with the Act.

(c) In addition to the Form, public works contractors and every subcontractor shall

maintain documentation of continued compliance with the Act by utilizing the EVP for new employees hired throughout the duration of the public work contract.

1.9.9.4 Specific requirements for public works contractors.

(a) As a precondition to the award of a contract for public work, a public works

contractor shall submit a completed Form to the County with its bid. During a public works contract, a new employee hired by a public works contractor, regardless of whether he will be working onsite or offsite of a public work or otherwise, shall be verified within 5 business days of his start date.

(b) Subcontracts between a public works contractor and its subcontractors are required

to contain notification of the applicability of the Act, information regarding the use of EVP and reference to the Department's web site at www.dgs.state.pa.us to obtain a copy of the Form.

(c) A public works contractor shall cooperate with the Department during an

investigation or audit arising under the Act.

1.9.9.5 Specific requirements for public works subcontractors.

(a) Prior to beginning either onsite or offsite work on a public works project, every

subcontractor shall submit a completed Form to the County. During a public works contract, a new employee hired by a public works subcontractor, regardless of whether he will be working onsite or offsite of a public work or otherwise, shall be verified within 5 business days of his start date.

(b) Subcontracts between a subcontractor and its subcontractors are required to

contain notification of the applicability of the act, information regarding the use of EVP and reference to the Department's web site at www.dgs.state.pa.us to obtain a copy of the Form.

1.9.10 Public Works Employment Verification Form.

(a) The Form for use by public bodies, public works contractors and subcontractors is

posted on the Department's web site at www.dgs.state.pa.us.


(b) The Form shall be signed by an authorized representative of the public works contractor or subcontractor. The representative shall have sufficient knowledge to make the representations and certifications in the Form.

(c) The Department may require the public works contractor or subcontractor to

provide supporting documentation that the representative signing the Form had authority to legally bind the public works contractor or subcontractor.

(d) The submitted Forms shall be retained by the County for the duration of the public

work contract.

1.9.11 Disbarment and Suspension. The Contractor certifies, for itself and all its subcontractors, that as of the date of its

execution of this agreement, that neither the Contractor nor any subcontractors are under suspension or debarment by the County, the state, the federal government, any governmental entity, instrumentality or authority and, if the Contractor cannot so certify, then it agrees to submit a written explanation of why such certification cannot be made. The Contractor’s obligations pursuant to these provisions are ongoing from and after the effective date of the agreement through the termination date thereof. Accordingly, the Contractor shall have an obligation to inform the County if, at any time during the term of the agreement, it or any of its subcontractors are suspended or debarred by the County, the state or federal governments, or any other state or governmental entity. Such notification shall be made within 15 days of the date of suspension or debarment. The failure of the Contractor to notify the County of its suspension or debarment by the County, the state, any other state or the federal government shall constitute on event of default of the agreement with the County.

1.9.12 Right-to-Know Law. 1.9.12.1 The Pennsylvania Right-to-Know Law, 65 P.S. § 67.101, et seq., applies to this

Contract. In the event the County receives a right-to-know request related to this Contract and the requested document(s) is/are in the Contractor’s possession, the County will notify the Contractor that it requires the Contractor’s assistance in providing the document(s) or otherwise responding to the request. Within fourteen (14) calendar days after notice from the County, the Contractor shall provide the County access to, and copies of, any document or information in the Contractor’s possession which properly respond to the request (“Requested Information”) and provide such other assistance as the County may request in order to comply with the RTKL. If the Contractor fails to provide the Requested Information within fourteen (14) calendar days after receipt of such notice, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the County harmless for any damages, penalties, detriment or harm that the County may incur as a result of the Contractor’s failure, including any statutory damages assessed against the County.

1.9.12.2 The County’s determination as to whether the Requested Information is a public record

is dispositive of the question as between the parties. Contractor agrees not to challenge the County’s decision to deem the Requested Information a Public Record. If the Contractor considers the Requested Information to include a request for a Trade Secret or Confidential Proprietary Information, as those terms are defined by the RTKL, the Contractor will immediately notify the County, and will provide, within seven calendar days of receiving the notice, a written statement signed by a representative of the Contractor explaining why the requested material is exempt from public disclosure under


the RTKL. If, upon review of the Contractor’s written statement, the County still decides to provide the Requested Information, Contractor will not challenge or in any way hold the County liable for such a decision.

1.9.12.3 The County will reimburse the Contractor for any costs associated with complying with

this provision only to the extent allowed under the County’s fee schedule and as authorized by law.

1.9.12.4 Contractor agrees to abide by any decision to release a record to the public made by the Office of Open Records, or by the Pennsylvania Courts. The Contractor agrees to waive all rights or remedies that may be available to it as a result of the County’s disclosure of Requested Information pursuant to the RTKL. Contractor’s duties relating to the RTKL are continuing duties that survive the expiration of this Contract and shall continue as long as the Contractor has Requested Information in its possession.

ARTICLE 2 - OWNER Paragraph 2.1 - General Subparagraph 2.1.1

CHANGE the first part of the first sentence to the identity of the Owner as follows:

Cumberland County Commissioners

1 Courthouse Square

Carlisle, PA 17013

Subparagraph 2.1.2 DELETE in its entirety. Paragraph 2.2 – Evidence of the Owner’s Financial Arrangements and all subparagraphs of Paragraph 2.2. DELETE in their entirety. Paragraph 2.3 – Information and Services Required of Owner Subparagraph 2.3.1 DELETE in its entirety. Subparagraph 2.3.3 DELETE in its entirety. Paragraph 2.4 - Owner’s Right to Stop the Work

DELETE the word “repeatedly” from the first sentence.

ADD the following new sentence to the end of the Subparagraph.

[Add:] This right shall be in addition to and not in restriction of or derogation of the Owner’s rights under Article 14 hereof. The Owner’s right to stop the Work shall not


relieve the Contractor of its responsibilities and obligations under or pursuant to the Contract Documents.

Paragraph 2.5 - Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work

REVISE the second line of the first sentence from “a ten-day period” to a “a seven-day period”. After the word “remedies” in the third line, DELETE the words “the Owner may have”. .

ADD the following new sentence to the end of the Subparagraph. [Add:] Nothing contained herein shall obligate the Owner to carry out work for the

benefit of the Contractor. Add new Paragraph 2.6 as follows: Paragraph 2.6 – Owner’s Gift Policy

2.6.1Cumberland County officials have adopted a uniform gift policy applicable to all County officials and employees. This policy prohibits any official or employee from receiving a gift of any monetary value from any source doing or seeking to do business with the County or attempting to influence the judgment of an official or employee. Further, no gifts may be made for or on behalf of the County or any of its offices or departments, unless first presented to the Board of Commissioners for decline or acceptance at a public meeting. Contractors are advised that any violation of this policy may result in employee discipline, including termination. By entering this contract, the Contractor agrees to abstain from offering or giving anything of monetary value to any County official, employee or member of their immediate families.

ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR Paragraph 3.2 - Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor Subparagraph 3.2.2

DELETE the second sentence in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new sentence:

[Substitute:] The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor should have recognized such error, inconsistency or omission and failed to report it to the Architect.

Subparagraph 3.2.4 DELETE the Subparagraph in its entirety. Paragraph 3.3 - Supervision and Construction Procedures


Subparagraph 3.3.2

ADD the following to the end of the last sentence: [Add:] . . . or claiming by, through or under the Contractor and for any damages, losses, costs and expenses resulting from such acts or omissions. If any failure by the Contractor to comply with the Contract Documents or to maintain an approved project schedule causes any damage or costs to the Owner, then the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any such damage or costs. Such damage or cost to the Owner shall include any payment by the Owner to others or liability of the Owner to others resulting from such failure by the Contractor, including but not limited to (1) any payment for liability arising from change orders, claims, arbitration, or litigation, (2) any payment or liability for fees or costs to the Architect, consultants, experts and attorneys; and/or (3) any liability for any attorney fees or costs in enforcing the provisions of this subparagraph 3.3.2 against the Contractor.

3.3.4 In the event any of the Work is required to be inspected or approved by any

governmental authority having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall cause such inspection or approval to be scheduled and performed. No inspection performed or failed to be performed shall release the Contractor from its obligations to have such work inspected nor shall it be construed as an approval or acceptance of the Work or any part thereof.

Paragraph 3.4 - Labor and Materials Subparagraph 3.4.2 DELETE Subparagraph 3.4.2 in its entirety, and in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following

new Subparagraph:

3.4.2 Refer to Division 01, Section “Substitutions”, for additional requirements regarding substitutions.

Subparagraph 3.4.3

ADD the following new sentence to the end of the Subparagraph: [Add:] The Owner encourages but does not require that laborers and mechanics employed on the project be residents of the County in which the work is being performed. The Contractor shall be licensed in accordance with all applicable requirements of Cumberland County and Middlesex Township.

Paragraph 3.5 – Warranty Subparagraph 3.5.1

DELETE the word “may” from the third sentence and replace it with “will”.

ADD the following new sentence to the end of the Subparagraph:


[Add:] The Contractor will protect both new work and existing conditions during the period of construction which may be susceptible to damage or abuse.


3.5.3The Contractor’s warranty period shall be 1 year from the date of substantial completion of the Work and/or phase of the Work, except for specific items of work or equipment for which the warranty period is specified as a longer period elsewhere in the Contract Documents. During the warranty period, the Contractor shall promptly correct all defects which are due to defective materials or workmanship at no cost to the Owner. Such correction shall extend to any other work damaged by such correction. 3.5.4At the end of the 11 month period from the commencement of the warranty period, the Contractor shall schedule a walk-through inspection with the Owner and Architect to identify any warranty items to be corrected under such warranty period.

3.5.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling the eleven (11) month walk-

through inspection contemplated in this warranty Section. The one (1) year Contractor’s warranty period shall be extended for a period of thirty (30) days beyond the date the eleven (11) month walk-through inspection is actually performed. It is the intent of this Section to extend the warranty period by thirty (30) days beyond the date the eleven (11) month walk-through inspection is finally completed in order to give the Owner the benefit of the walk-through inspection prior to the expiration of the warranty period. The thirty (30) day extension period shall not begin to run until the final completion of the walk-through inspection. Thus, if the walk-through inspection takes more than one day to complete, the thirty (30) day extension begins to run from the date the walkthrough is actually completed. If the Owner unreasonably refuses to schedule the eleven (11) month walk-through inspection, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of a date on which the Contractor shall be available to perform the walk-through inspection, which date shall not be less than ten (10) days after the date of the Contractor’s letter, and the thirty (30) day extension shall begin to run from the date of the proposed walk-through inspection. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor’s warranty expire in less than one (1) full year.

Paragraph 3.6 - Taxes

ADD the following new Subparagraph 3.6.1

3.6.1 Bidder shall include all applicable sales taxes in its bid and sales taxes shall

not be owning in addition to bid amount. The Owner is exempt from most sales taxes.

Paragraph 3.7 - Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws Subparagraph 3.7.3 ADD the following new sentence to the end of Subparagraph 3.7.3 as follows:

[Add:] The Owner shall not be responsible for any inspection fees due to re-inspection of rejected work due to faulty or defective workmanship of the Contractor, or scheduling


error by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for all such re-inspection fees.

Paragraph 3.8 - Allowances

DELETE Paragraph 3.8 in its entirety. No cash allowances are permitted.

Paragraph 3.9 – Superintendent


3.9.4 If at any time throughout the project, the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objections to any superintendent or assistant, the Contractor shall submit a substitute to whom the Owner or the Architect has no reasonable objection; no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for any such substitution.

3.9.5 If during the course of the Project, it is evident that the superintendent is not

managing the progress of the Project in a reasonable manner, is not coordinating the various trades in a reasonable manner, or is otherwise not competent to oversee the Project, then the Architect will document such findings to the Contractor. If within 10 days of receiving such notice, no substantial effort for correction of the findings is made, then the Architect/Owner may require the replacement of the superintendent with an acceptable one. No increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for any such substitution.

3.9.6 If during the course of the Project, the superintendent changes, written notice

shall be given to the Owner and Architect. Written notice shall include a resume of the new superintendent. Approval of such new superintendent shall be given in such manner as provided for in this Paragraph 3.9.

Paragraph 3.11 - Documents and Samples at the Site

DELETE the last sentence of Paragraph 3.11 and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new sentence:

[Substitute:] These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Owner, in good condition, upon completion of the Work and before final payment is made.

Paragraph 3.12 - Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples

ADD new Subparagraph 3.12.11 as follows: 3.12.11 Refer to Division 01, Section “Submittal Procedures”, for further requirements

regarding shop drawings, product data and samples. Paragraph 3.14 - Cutting and Patching

DELETE Paragraph 3.14 in its entirety, and in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE it with the following new Paragraph:


3.14 Refer to Division 1, Section “Alteration Project Procedures”, for requirements

regarding cutting and patching. Paragraph 3.15 – Clean Up

ADD new Subparagraph 3.15.3 as follows:

3.15.3 Refer to Division 1, Section “Execution Requirements”, for further

requirements regarding cleaning up. Paragraph 3.18 – Indemnification In 3.18.1 CHANGE the phrase “but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions” to “caused by acts or omissions”. ARTICLE 4 - ARCHITECT Paragraph 4.1 - General Subparagraph 4.1.2 DELETE the word “Contractor”. Subparagraph 4.2.11 CHANGE the words “either the Owner or Contractor” to “the Owner”. ARTICLE 5 – SUBCONTRACTORS Paragraph 5.2 - Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work Subparagraph 5.2.1

DELETE the first sentence of Subparagraph 5.2.1 and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new sentence:

[Substitute:] Within thirty (30) days after the award of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner and the Architect in writing the names of the persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each of the principal portions of the Work.

ADD new Paragraph 5.5 as follows: Paragraph 5.5 - Payment to Subcontractors

5.5.1 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, an amount equal to the percentage of completion allowed to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor’s Work, less the percentage retained from payments to the Contractor; The Contractor shall also require each Subcontractor to make similar payments to Sub-subcontractors. All such payments shall be paid within the time limits required by the Commonwealth Procurement Code, 62 P.A.C.S.A. §§ 3931 and 3941.


5.5.2 If the Owner fails to approve an Application for Payment for a cause which the Owner and Architect determine is the fault of the Contractor and not the fault of a particular subcontractor, or if the Contractor fails to make payment which is properly due to a particular subcontractor, the Owner may pay such subcontractor directly, less the amount to be retained under its Subcontract. Any amount so paid by the Owner shall be repaid to the Owner by the Contractor in the manner set forth in Paragraph 2.4. The Owner shall have no obligation to pay or to see to the payment of any monies to any subcontractor. Nothing contained in Paragraph 5.5 shall be deemed to create any contractual relationship between the Owner and any subcontractor or to create any rights in any subcontractor against the Owner. The Contractor shall promptly advise the Owner of any claim or demand by a subcontractor claiming that any amount is due to such subcontractor or claiming any default by the Contractor in any of its obligations to such subcontractor.

ARTICLE 6 – CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS Paragraph 6.2 – Mutual Responsibility Subparagraph 6.2.3

DELETE the second sentence of Subparagraph 6.2.3 in its entirety and SUBSTITUTE the following new sentence in lieu thereof:

[Substitute:] Costs caused by delays, or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be borne by the responsible party therefore.

ADD the following new sentence to the end of Subparagraph 6.2.4:

[Add:] The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold the Owner harmless for any claims or damages brought by a separate contractor arising out of the actions or omissions of the Contractor, its subcontractors or suppliers in performing their work under the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK Paragraph 7.1 – General Subparagraph 7.1.2

REVISE the first sentence of Subparagraph 7.1.2 to read as follows:

[Revise:] A Change Order shall be based upon agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

Subparagraph 7.1.3

DELETE Subparagraph 7.1.3 in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new Subparagraph:

7.1.3 Before any Change Order is prepared, the Contractor shall submit to the

Architect an itemized breakdown of the cost of the proposed Change in the


Work. The term “cost” shall be interpreted to mean and include the actual cost of the following:

1. Labor, including foremen. 2. Materials at cost plus applicable taxes entering permanently into the work. 3. Rental cost of construction plant and equipment whether rented from the

Contractor or others. 4. Power and consumable supplies for the operation of power equipment. 5. Liability insurance and bonds. 6. Social security, old age and unemployment contributions. Fifteen percent (15%) of the total cost of the above will be allowed the Contractor for overhead, profit, supervision and miscellaneous expenses if they perform the work with their own forces or to the Subcontractor who performs the work. In the case where the work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor may add five percent (5%) to the Subcontractor’s total amount as the Contractor’s commission. Where Change Orders include both increases and decreases in the Contract Amount, the above fifteen percent (15%) will be allowed on the net increase only.

Paragraph 7.2 - Change Orders Subparagraph 7.2.1


7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed

by the Owner, Contractor and Architect. A Change Order is the only method by which the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time may be adjusted. A Change Order shall provide for the following: (1) a change in the Work, if any; (2) the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any; and (3) the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any.


7.2.2 The Contractor is responsible for submitting accurate cost and pricing data to

support its proposals for change orders and other contract price adjustments under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall certify in writing that to the best of its knowledge and belief, the cost and pricing data submitted is accurate, complete, current and in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents with respect to pricing of change orders. The Contractor shall also certify in writing that he has made reasonable good faith inquiries to appropriate individuals within its organization to confirm that the data submitted is accurate, complete and current. The above-described certification shall be required for all change order requests with a positive or negative value greater than $1,000.00. If it is later determined by audit or by other means that the cost and pricing data submitted is inaccurate, incomplete, not current or not in compliance with the terms of the Contract Documents regarding the pricing of change orders, then an appropriate contract price reduction shall be made.


ARTICLE 8 - TIME Paragraph 8.3 – Delays and Extensions of Time Subparagraph 8.3.1

MODIFY Subparagraph 8.3.1, after the word “pending” in the fifth line, to read “a proceeding pursuant to Article 15;”

ADD the following to the end of Subparagraph 8.3.1:

[Add:] All claims for extension of time shall be made, in writing, to the Architect and Owner no more than seven (7) calendar days after the occurrence of the event causing the delay. If an extension of the Contract Time for a contractor is granted due to neglect, misconduct or failure to comply with the Contract Documents by another contractor and such delay causes any contractor to miss a Milestone in the Project Schedule, then liquidated damages for delay pursuant to Paragraph 8.4, or the Owner’s actual damages caused by the delay, shall be applied against the Contractor responsible for having caused such extension of the Contract Time.

Subparagraph 8.3.3

DELETE Subparagraph 8.3.3 in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following:

8.3.3 The Contractor recognizes that delays, acceleration or hindrances to the Work may occur. No claim or litigation for increased costs, charges, expenses or damages of any kind shall be filed by the Contractor against the Owner or the Architect (or against any of their respective employees or agents) for any delays, acceleration, hindrances, or sequencing of work due to any cause whatsoever, notwithstanding whether such delays are caused by factors within or outside the Contractor’s control. The Contractor’s sole remedy for delays, acceleration, hindrances or sequencing of work shall be an extension of the Contract Time pursuant to this Paragraph 8.3. Should the Contractor file any claim or litigation for money damages against the Owner or the Architect (including their employees or agents) in violation of this provision, such contractor shall provide indemnification for any costs incurred in the defense against such claim or litigation, including all fees by attorneys and experts, plus 10% interest per annum on all such costs from the date of occurrence of such costs up to the date of payment.

ADD new Paragraph 8.4 as follows:

Paragraph 8.4 – Liquidated Damages for Delays

8.4.1 The amount of Liquidated Damages shall be $1000.00 per day.

8.4.2 The damages incurred by the Owner due to the Contractor’s failure to complete the Work, or portions thereof, designated in the Project Schedule as a Milestone by the Contract Time or the Specific Dates, including any extensions thereof under the Contract Documents, shall be in the amount set forth in the Contract Documents for each consecutive calendar day beyond each Specific Date (Sunday and all holidays included) for which the Contractor


shall fail to complete the Work or designated portion thereof designated in the Project Schedule as a Milestone.

8.4.3 The amount of liquidated damages provided in the Contract Documents shall not be considered a penalty and shall compensate the Owner only for the Owner’s inability to use or otherwise have available, the Project or any portion thereof for its intended purpose by the Dates set forth in the Contract Documents.

8.4.4 If, during the course of the Contractor’s performance of the Work, the Contractor shall fail to complete the Work, or portions thereof, in accordance with Specific Dates or the Contract Time, the Owner may retain the estimated amount of liquidated damages for which the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner under the Contract Documents, from amounts which become payable or are otherwise certified as payable to the Contractor under the Contract Documents.

8.4.5 In the event that the Work must be conducted beyond the normal working hours specified or if the Project is not completed within the specified duration, the Contractors shall reimburse the Consultants (A/E, CM, etc.) for all of their expenses. Expenses shall be calculated at the cost times 2.75 on labor, and costs times 1.15 on all other items.

ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION Paragraph 9.2 – Schedule of Values


9.2.1 Refer to Division 01, “Payment Procedures” for requirements regarding the schedule of values.


9.2.2 [Add] The Schedule of Values shall be prepared in such a manner that each

major item of Work and each subcontracted item of Work is shown as a line item on AIA Document G703, Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Each major item of Work shall be further broken down into separate line items for work done in each area of the building, site and each phase of construction. Each work item shall be broken down into separate line items for material and labor. Each line item shall include quantities and unit prices in such detail as required by the Architect.

Paragraph 9.3 - Applications for Payment Subparagraph 9.3.1



9.3.1 At least fifteen (15) days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers and reflecting retainage.

Notwithstanding the language in Section 9.10.5 or any other section hereof, before the Owner shall have any obligation to release any payments for Work completed to the Contractor, the Contractor shall deliver an executed and notarized “Partial Waiver and Release of Mechanics Lien Claims” in the form provided. The partial waiver of liens shall waive the Contractor’s right to file a lien against the Property or the Owner for an amount equal to the payment received by the Contractor at that time.

The Contractor shall obtain and post a bond guaranteeing payment for labor and materials provided by subcontractors in an amount, form, and a surety acceptable to the Owner.

The Contractor acknowledges that the Owner has filed with the Office of the Prothonotary of Cumberland County, the relevant provisions of the Contract containing the total amount of the Contract price, and the Contractor acknowledges that it is aware of the total Contract price. The Contractor further agrees to provide copies of the Owner's filing regarding the total Contract price to each subcontractor before each such subcontractor is engaged to perform any work or provide any materials to the Project.

The Contractor hereby agrees that it will defend, indemnify and hold harmless

the Owner from and against any mechanics’ lien or claim filed by any subcontractor by reason of the Contractor’s failure to pay the subcontractor any amount owed to such subcontractor. The Contractor shall prevent the filing of any mechanics’ lien, or should a lien be filed, the Contractor shall undertake any and all action necessary to remove the said lean. Any failure of the Contractor in any of its obligations in this §9.3.5 shall constitute a material breach of this Contract. Furthermore, the Contractor shall be obligated to pay the Owner all of the Owner’s costs incurred in defending or removing any such mechanics’ lien whether filed by the Contractor or any subcontractor. This shall include payment of all of the Owner's attorney’s fees, whether incurred in removing or challenging any mechanics’ lien claim filed by the Contractor or any subcontractor, or in enforcing the Contractor's obligations hereunder.

The Owner shall retain ten percent (10%) of all amounts due the Contractor until the Work is fifty percent (50%) completed. When the Work is fifty percent (50%) completed, one-half of the amount retained by the Owner shall be returned to the Contractor, provided the Contractor provides written consent of surety to such reduction in retainage to the Owner along with its Application for Payment, provided the Architect approved the application and reduction of retainage, and further provided that the Contractor is making satisfactory progress and there is no specific cause for greater withholding.


The Owner shall retain five percent (5%) of all amounts due the Contractor after the Work is fifty percent (50%) completed. The retained five percent (5%) will be paid on with the final Payment or as otherwise provided hereafter. In the event a dispute arises between the Owner and the Contractor, which dispute is based upon increased costs claimed by the Contractor occasioned by damages or other actions of another contractor, additional retainage, in the sum of one and one half times the amount of any possible liability, may be withheld until such time as a final resolution is agreed to by all parties directly or indirectly involved, unless the contractor causing the additional claim furnishes a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against the claim. The full Contract retainage may be reinstated if the manner of completion of the Work and its progress do not remain satisfactory to the Architect or if Surety withholds its consent or for other good and sufficient reasons.

9.3.1.1 Refer to Division 01, “Payment Procedures” for additional requirements

regarding applications for payment.

Paragraph 9.5 - Decisions to Withhold Certification Subparagraph 9.5.1

DELETE the first sentence of Subparagraph 9.5.1 and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE it with the following:

[Substitute:] The Architect shall not certify payment and shall withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part to the extent necessary to protect the Owner.

REVISE Sub-subparagraph 9.5.1.7 as follows:

9.5.1.7 DELETE the word “repeated”.

ADD the following new Sub-subparagraphs as follows:

9.5.1.8 Unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

9.5.1.9 Failure to comply with government statues and the law. 9.5.1.10 Failure to submit progress schedule updates as required by the Contract

Documents. 9.5.1.11 Failure to submit wage certification as required by the Contract Documents. 9.5.1.12 Failure to submit a schedule of values that is acceptable to the Architect.

Subparagraph 9.6.7

DELETE Subparagraph 9.6.7 in its entirety.

Paragraph 9.10 - Final Completion and Final Payment


Subparagraph 9.10.2

ADD new Subsections (6) and (7) immediately following (5) as follows: [Add:] (6) Final “as built” prints of record drawings marked by the Contractor with record information as set forth in the Contract Documents, (7) A final Contractor’s sworn statement from the Contractor duly executed and acknowledged, showing all subcontractors to be fully paid and similar final sworn statements from subcontractors and, where appropriate, from sub-subcontractors.

Renumber previously numbered subparagraph (6) as subparagraph (8). Subparagraph 9.10.4

ADD the following new Sub-subparagraphs as follows:

.5 Latent failures of the Contractor to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

.6 Architect’s fees resulting from re-inspections due to the Contractor’s failure to satisfactorily, fully and finally complete the Work or legal and accounting costs and expenses arising there from.

.7 Architectural fees for services (60) days after the date of Substantial Completion shall be borne by the responsible contractor.

ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Paragraph 10.2 - Safety of Persons and Property Subparagraph 10.2.8

ADD new Subparagraph 10.2.9 as follows: 10.2.9 The Contractor shall promptly report in writing to the Owner and Architect all

accidents, other than minor accidents for which no medical treatment is required, arising out of, or in connection with the Work which cause death, personal injury or property damage, giving full details and statements of any witnesses whether or not the Owner has actual knowledge of the accident. In addition, if death or serious personal injuries or serious damage are caused, the accident shall be reported immediately by telephone or messenger to the Owner and Architect.

ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS Paragraph 11.1 - Contractor’s Liability Insurance

AMPLIFY Paragraph 11.1, Contractor’s Liability Insurance, by ADDING the following: [Add:] During the term of the Contract, the Contractor and each Subcontractor shall, at their own cost and expense, maintain the following insurance in a company or companies properly licensed and satisfactory to the Owner:

1. State Statutory Coverage and Employer’s Liability Insurance

(a) Statutory:


Amounts and overage as required by law. (b) Employer’s Liability:

$1,000,000 each accident. $1,000,000 disease, policy limit. $1,000,000 disease, each employee.

2. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance including coverage for direct operations, sublet work, demolition and wrecking, elevators, and contractor liability with limits not less than stated below: (a) Bodily Injury Liability including Personal Injuries: $1,000,000 each occurrence. (b) Property Damage Insurance: Shall include explosion, collapse and underground.

$1,000,000 each occurrence. $3,000,000 general aggregate. $3,000,000 products & completed operations aggregate $1,000,000 personal & advertising injury

(c ) Products and completed operations insurance shall be maintained for a minimum period of 2 years after final payment, and the Contractor shall continue to provide evidence of such coverage to the Owner on an annual basis during the aforementioned period.

(d) Contractual Liability

1. Bodily Injury - $1,000,000 each occurrence. 2. Property Damage - Included each occurrence and aggregate.

Note: The required aggregate limits are applicable to this Contract and not the total business operation of the Contractor.

3. Automobile Liability Insurance including coverage for owned, non-owned and hired vehicles with limits not less than stated below:

(a) Bodily Injury Liability:

$1,000,000 each occurrence. (b) Property Damage Liability:

$1,000,000 each occurrence. $3,000,000 aggregate.

4. Umbrella Excess Liability

(a) Bodily Injury


$4,000,000 each occurrence. $4,000,000 aggregate.

(b) Property Damage

Included each occurrence. Included aggregate.

Note: As with general liability, the aggregate limits are applicable to this Contract and not the total business operation of the Contractor.

5. Other Instructions Related to Bonds or Insurance - Current certificates of insurance and bonds of carriers qualified to do business in Pennsylvania and carrying a Best Rating of “A-” are required. The Owner and Architect shall be carried as additional insured.

6. The Contract carrier shall provide the Owner not less than 30 days written

notice of cancellation. 7. The Contractor shall provide to the Owner, no later than 30 days prior to

expiration, a replacement Certificate for the succeeding 12 month period. Where Owner’s and Contractor’s/Subcontractor’s policies each apply, the

Contractor’s/Subcontractor’s policies shall be considered primary. Claims made policies shall be maintained in effect for a period of 6 years following the

date of final payment. Subparagraph 11.1.2

DELETE Subparagraph 11.1.2 in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new Subparagraph: 11.1.2 The Contractor shall provide bonds in accordance with the provisions of the

Public Works Contracts’ Bond Law of 1967, 8 P.S. Section 191 and in so doing shall provide: (a) A Performance Bond at one hundred percent (100%) of the Contact

amount, conditioned upon the faithful performance of the Contractor in accordance with the plans, specifications and conditions of the Contract. Such bond shall be solely for the protection of the Owner or assignee as authorized in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 13.2.1 herein.

(b) A Payment Bond at one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract amount. Such bond shall be solely for the protection of claimants supplying labor or materials to the Contractor or to any of their Subcontractors in the prosecution of the Work provided for in the Contract Documents and shall be conditioned for the prompt payment of all such material furnished or labor supplied or performed in the prosecution of the Work. “Labor or Materials” shall include public utility services and reasonable rentals of


equipment, but only for periods when the equipment rented is actually used at the site.

(c ) A Maintenance Bond providing additional coverage in the full amount of the Contract Sum insuring against defective or inferior materials or workmanship which may develop during the period of one (1) year from the date of Final Completion of the Project.

(d) Each of such bonds required by the Contract Documents shall be executed by one or more surety companies legally authorized to do business in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania and not otherwise objectionable to the Owner. The surety of whom the Contractor has purchased bonds shall have an “A-“ or better rating, plus a financial rating of VI or better with the A. M. Best’s Company (Key Rating Guide – Latest Edition) and listed in the Department of Treasury Circular 570, with a capacity which meets or exceeds the contract amount. The bond shall be payable the Owner or assignee as provided for in Paragraph 13.2.1

Both a Performance Bond and Payment Bond shall be required as specified in the Instructions to Bidders.

Paragraph 11.3 – Waivers of Subrogation DELETE Paragraph 11.3 in its entirety Subparagraph 11.4. – Loss of Use Insurance

DELETE the last sentence of Subparagraph 11.4 in its entirety.

Subparagraph 11.5.1

DELETE the words “as fiduciary”.

ARTICLE 12 - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK Paragraph 12.2 - Correction of Work Sub-subparagraph 12.2.2.1

DELETE the following from the first sentence and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following:

[Delete:] ……..“if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or after the date for commencement of warranties” [Substitute:] ……“if, within one (1) year after the date of Final Completion of the Work or within one (1) year from date of Partial Occupancy or Use of designated portions thereof (whichever shall first occur) or after the date for commencement of warranties”.

DELETE sub-subparagraph 12.2.2.3 in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new sub-subparagraph:


12.2.2.3 In the event any Work, material or equipment is replaced or repaired as a consequence of latent defects or failure to meet the terms of the Contract Documents, all warranties with respect to such Work, material or equipment replaced or repaired shall continue following repair or replacement of such Work, material or equipment for an additional period equivalent to the original period of warranty for such Work, material or equipment.

ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

DELETE Subparagraph 13.4.1 in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new subparagraph:

13.4.1 If the Contract Documents or any laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes,

rules, regulations or orders of any governmental body or public or quasi-public authority having jurisdiction over the work or the site of the Project require any portion of the Work to be inspected, tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Architect and the Owner timely notice thereof so the Architect and the Owner may observe such inspection, testing or approval.

ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT Paragraph 14.1 - Termination by the Contractor

DELETE Paragraph 14.1 in its entirety.

Paragraph 14.2 - Termination by the Owner for Cause Subparagraph 14.2.1

DELETE Subparagraph 14.2.1 in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following:

14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor:

.1 shall institute proceedings or consent to proceedings requesting relief or arrangement under the Federal Bankruptcy Code or any similar or applicable federal or state law; or if a petition under any federal or state bankruptcy or insolvency law is filed against the Contractor and such petition is not dismissed within sixty (60) days from the date of said filing; or if the Contractor admits in writing, his inability to pay his debts generally as they become due, or if it makes a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver, liquidator, trustee or assignee is appointed on account of his bankruptcy or insolvency; or if a receiver of all or any substantial portion of the Contractor’s properties is appointed.

.2 abandons the Work; or if he fails, except in cases for which an extension of time is provided, to prosecute promptly and diligently the Work or to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials for the Work;

.3 submits an Application for Payment, sworn statement, affidavit or document of any nature whatsoever which is intentionally falsified;

.4 fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor or otherwise breaches their obligations under any subcontract with a Subcontractor; or if a materialman’s lien or notice of lien is filed against any


party of the Work or the site of the Project and not promptly bonded or insured over by the Contractor in a manner satisfactory to the Owner;

.5 disregards any laws, statutes, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any governmental body or public or quasi-public authority having jurisdiction of the Work or the site of the Project;

.6 otherwise violates any provision of the Contract Documents; then the Owner, upon the occurrence of the events described in clauses .1 through .5 above, without prejudice to any right or remedy available to the Owner under the Contract Documents or at law or in equity may, after giving the Contractor and his surety under the Performance Bond and under the Labor and Material Payment Bond, if any, seven (7) days written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and, in accordance with the Uniform Commercial Code, may enforce a Security Agreement by taking possession of and using all or any part of the Contractor’s materials, equipment, supplies and other property of every kind used by the Contractor in the performance of the Work in the completion of the Work. If requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall remove any part or all of its equipment, machinery and supplies from the site of the Project within seven (7) days from the date of such request, and in the event of the Contractor’s failure to do so, the Owner shall have the right to remove or store such equipment, machinery and supplies at the Contractor’s expense. In case of such termination, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment for Work performed by the contract through the date of termination. The Owner’s right to terminate the Owner-Contractor Agreement pursuant to this Subparagraph 14.2.1 shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any rights or remedies existing hereunder or pursuant hereto or at law or in equity.

Subparagraph 14.2.4

DELETE Subparagraph 14.2.4 in its entirety and, in lieu thereof, SUBSTITUTE the following new Subparagraph 14.2.4:

14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds all costs to the Owner of

completing the Work, then the Contractor shall be paid for all Work performed by the Contractor to the date of termination. If such costs to the Owner of completing the Work exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner upon the Owner’s demand. The costs to the Owner of completing the Work shall include, but not be limited to, the cost of any additional architectural, managerial and administrative services required thereby, any costs incurred in retaining another contractor or other subcontractors, any additional interest or fees which the Owner must pay by reason of a delay in completion of the Work, attorneys’ fees and expenses and any other damage, costs and expenses the Owner may incur by reason of completing the Work. The amount, if any, to be paid to the Contractor shall be certified by the Architect upon application, in the manner provided in Paragraph 9.4, and this obligation for payment shall survive the termination of the Contract.

Paragraph 14.3 - Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Subparagraph 14.3.1



[Add:] Any suspension by the Owner for convenience does not constitute grounds of termination by the Contractor.

ADD new Paragraph 14.5 as follows: Paragraph 14.5 Indemnification

14.5 Contractor and each Subcontractor shall indemnify and hold harmless, the Owner, its officers, directors, agents, and employees, the Architect and its officers, directors, agents and employees, and each of them, as “indemnitee”, from and against any and all fines, penalties, losses, costs, damages, injuries, expenses, claims, liens, encumbrances and/or liabilities (individually and collectively referred to herein as “liabilities”) arising out of, or resulting from (a) any claim for any service or goods allegedly infringed, including without limitation any patent, copyright, trademark, service mark, trade secret, or other legally-protected proprietary right; and (b) the Work as described in the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to, any claim of injury (including death) to persons or damage to property, and contamination of, or any adverse impact upon the environment, except to the extent that any such claim is finally found by the court or arbitration entity by which such claims are finally resolved, to have arisen from the willful misconduct of the indemnitee. A finding of “willful misconduct” as against one indemnitee shall not nullify the indemnification provided to any other indemnitee who is not found to have performed any willful misconduct. As used herein, “willful misconduct” shall mean gross negligence or any intentional criminal act. The Owner shall notify the Contractor and Subcontractors of any suit or legal proceeding asserting a claim for liabilities. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall, at no cost to any indemnitee, defend and/or settle such suit or legal proceeding, or judgment, including any appellate proceeding, asserting a claim for liabilities. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall pay any costs and legal fees incurred by any indemnitee in connection with any liabilities, whether or not litigation is actually commenced, and shall keep indemnities informed as to the progress of the defense. If requested, the Contractor and Subcontractors shall afford indemnities the opportunity to participate in the defense or settlement of any claim. With regard to any claim of infringement as referred to herein, the Contractor and Subcontractors shall procure the right to continue using the services or goods, or at the indemnities’ option, replace or modify the services or goods to make them non-infringing services or goods.

ARTICLE 15 – CLAIMS AND DISPUTES Paragraph 15.1 - Claims Subparagraph 15.1.1 - Definition


[Add:] All Claims as defined in §15.1.1, and any other claim or dispute between and among Contractors, or any Contractor and the Owner or Architect, including without limitation those claims set forth in §15.3, shall be governed by this Article 15.


Subparagraph 15.1.2 – Time Limits on Claims CHANGE 10 years to 12 years. Subparagraph 15.1.6 – Claims for Additional Time ADD the following new Sub-subparagraphs as follows:

15.1.6.3 In planning the construction schedule within the agreed Contract Time, it shall be assumed that the Contractor has anticipated the amount of adverse weather conditions normal to the site of the Work for the season or seasons of the year involved. Only those weather delays attributable to other than normal weather conditions will be considered.

15.1.6.4 The following Standard Baseline of monthly anticipated adverse weather

delays is based on National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) or similar data for the project location and will constitute the baseline for monthly weather time evaluations. “Standard Baseline” is defined as the normal number of calendar days for each month during which construction activity exposed to weather conditions is expected to be prevented and suspended by cause of adverse weather. “Adverse Weather” is defined as the occurrence of one or more of the following conditions within a twenty-four (24) hour day that prevents construction activity exposed to the weather conditions or access to the site:

1. Precipitation (rain, snow, or ice) in excess of 1/10 inch liquid measure.

2. Temperatures that did not rise above that required for the day’s

construction activity, if such temperature requirement is specified or accepted as standard industry practice.

3. Sustained wind in excess of 25 mph.

15.1.6.5 The Contractor’s Construction Schedule must reflect the following anticipated adverse weather delays in all weather dependent activities.

Standard Baseline JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

14 7 7 8 8 7 4 5 4 4 5 7

15.1.6.6 Upon acknowledgement of the Notice to Proceed and continuing throughout the Contract, the Contractor will record in a daily log the occurrence of adverse weather and resultant impact to normally scheduled Work. Actual adverse weather delay days must prevent work on critical activities for 50 percent or more of the Contractor’s scheduled work day in order to constitute an adverse weather delay day. The number of actual adverse weather delay days shall include days impacted by actual adverse weather (even if adverse weather occurred in a previous month), be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day of each month, and be recorded as full days. If the number of actual adverse weather delay days exceeds the number of days


anticipated in sub-subparagraph 15.1.5.5 above, the Architect will convert any qualifying delays to calendar days, giving full consideration for equivalent fair weather work days, and issue a no-cost Change Order for additional days, to be executed by the Owner, Architect and Contractor. This no-cost Change Order shall be the sole remedy for delays associated with weather.

Subparagraph 15.1.7 – Waiver of Claims for Consequential Damages

DELETE Subparagraph 15.1.7 in its entirety. Subparagraph 15.1.7 – Owner as a Contracting Body


15.1.7 The Contractor agrees and acknowledges that the Owner is a “contracting body” under the Public Works Contractors’ Bond Law of 1967 (the “Bond Law”), and the Work on the Project is public construction and not subject to the filing of Mechanics Liens, and further agrees to provide and specify in its subcontracts with subcontractors for their acknowledgment that their sole remedy against the Owner exists only under the provisions of the Bond Law and in accordance with the Payment Bond.

ADD new Sub-subparagraph 15.2.8.1 as follows:

15.2.8.1 The Contractor agrees and acknowledges that the Owner is a “contracting

body” under the Public Works Contractors’ Bond Law of 1967 (the “Bond Law”), and the Work on the Project is public construction and not subject to the filing of Mechanics Liens, and further agrees to provide and specify in its subcontracts with subcontractors for their acknowledgment that their sole remedy against the Owner exists only under the provisions of the Bond Law and in accordance with the Payment Bond.

ADD the following new Subparagraph as follows:

15.3.5 The Owner shall have the right, at any time after bringing any claim against another or after any claim is raised against the Owner, to reject and/or waive mediation or arbitration, and such election shall be binding on the Contractor, and may be made by the Owner at any time prior to the entry of a final award by the Arbitrator. In such event, a Claim arising under this Agreement shall be subject to a bench trial in the Court of Common Pleas of Cumberland County, Pennsylvania, and the parties waive the right to a jury in such proceeding. If any claim is brought by any Contractor as against the Architect only, the Architect shall have the right, at any time after any Claim is raised against the Architect, to waive mediation or arbitration, and such election shall be binding on the Contractor, and such election may be made by the Architect at any time prior to the entry of a final award by the Arbitrator. In such event, any such Claim shall be subject to a bench trial in the Court of Common Pleas of Cumberland County, Pennsylvania, and the parties waive the right to a jury in such proceeding.



15.4.3.1 In any arbitration proceeding commenced pursuant to this Paragraph 15.4,

the parties shall be entitled to conduct pre-hearing discovery for a period of ninety (90) days, which discovery may include depositions, written interrogations not to exceed forty (40) in number (inclusive of subparts) and written requests for the inspection and production of relevant documents or tangible things. Responses to written interrogations and document requests shall be served within thirty (30) days of service thereof. With respect to expert testimony and discovery related thereto, Rule 4003.5 of the Pennsylvania Rules of Civil Procedure shall apply. The arbitrator(s) shall have the authority to issue appropriate orders to enforce the parties’ entitlement to discovery hereunder and, upon disobedience of any such order, may prohibit the disobedient party from introducing in evidence designated documents, things, or testimony.

15.4.3.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator(s) shall be final, and judgment may be

entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

15.4.3.3 The Contractor acknowledges that the mediation and arbitration procedures

outlined in paragraphs 15.3 and 15.4 hereof shall be the Contractor’s exclusive remedies with regard to claims against the Owner or Architect, subject to the Owner’s and Architect’s rights to elect to forego mediation or arbitration.

15.4.3.4. Should any Contractor bring a claim against the Owner or Architect, then,

unless the fact finder finds that the Contractor had a good faith basis for the Claim against the Owner or Architect, the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner and Architect for all of the Owner’s and Architect’s costs in having all such claims dismissed, or in defending all such claims, or both. These costs shall include all of the Owner’s or Architect’s costs, including without limitation personnel costs, attorney fees, expert fees, travel expenses, and the like.

ADD new Paragraph 15.5 as follows: 15.5 - Scheduling and Completion

15.5.1 It is the intention of these Contract Documents that all claims between the Contractors related to coordination and scheduling of the Work, and all delays, disruptions, and interferences caused by the Contractors, be resolved between the Contractors. Specifically, by execution of the Agreement, the Contractor agrees to the following:

.1 The Owner and Architect are not responsible for delays caused by any

Contractor. The Owner and Architect are not responsible for problems caused by the failure of a Contractor to coordinate and schedule his Work with other Contractors. The Owner and Architect are not liable for any damages suffered by a Contractor arising from any Contractor’s delays and/or failure to coordinate his Work. The Contractor hereby waives and releases the Owner and Architect from any liability and damages caused by


a lack of coordination by a Contractor, or between or among the Contractors, including their subcontractors and suppliers.

.2 The Architect and Owner and their representatives shall not be liable to a Contractor for any increased costs or damages for defective work, interference, or delays resulting from any conflict between or among the Contractors, their subcontractors and suppliers. Neither the Owner nor the Architect shall be a party to disputes or actions between or among the Contractors or their subcontractors and suppliers concerning such additional expense or damage. The Contractor’s exclusive remedy in this regard is mediation or arbitration between the Contractors involved. Should any Contractor attempt to join the Owner or Architect in any proceeding arising from any Claim between Contractors, the Contractor attempting to join the Owner or Architect shall be liable to the Owner and Architect for all of the Owner’s and Architect’s costs in having all such claims dismissed, or in defending all such claims, or both. These costs shall include all of the Owner’s or Architect’s costs, including without limitation personnel costs, attorney fees, expert fees, travel expenses, and the like.

.3 It is agreed by all parties that disputes or actions between Contractors concerning any additional expense or damage herein before mentioned shall not delay completion of the Work, which shall be continued by the parties pending final resolution of a claim, including without limitation, judicial proceedings, as more fully set forth in §3.3.5. All final construction decisions regarding scheduling and coordination of the Work, whether rendered orally or in writing, shall be observed and followed fully.

.4 Each Contractor hereby waives privity of Contract defenses, and any assertion that the Owner or Architect is vicariously or otherwise responsible for the acts and omissions of other Contractors. Each Contractor agrees that other Contractors have the right to file claims in mediation and arbitration against the Contractor in the event the Contractor is alleged to have caused damages to another Contractor by reason of delay, disruption, interference, or lack of coordination.

.5 It is agreed by the parties to this Contract (the Owner as promisee and the Contractor as promisor) that the intent of this Paragraph 15.3.5 is to benefit the Owner and the Architect, and the Owner’s interests, and that the provisions of the Contract Documents raises the Contractor and such other Contractors to the status of third party beneficiaries in connection with the coordination and scheduling of the Project and claims between the Contractors, and for no other purpose. The Contractor specifically releases, foregoes and waives any claims against the Owner or the Architect for extended overhead, delay damages, “impact” damages, loss of efficiency, loss of productivity, or any other similar form of loss, damage or compensation, or other damages related to coordination and scheduling of the Project and all delays, disruptions, and interferences caused by the other Contractors.

END OF SECTION

Project Name: Claremont FSES Remediation, Claremont Nursingand Rehab Center, Carlisle

Awarding Agency: Cumberland County, Director Facilities Management

Contract Award Date: 10/24/2021

Serial Number: 21-06931

Project Classification: Building

Determination Date: 9/28/2021

Assigned Field Office: Harrisburg

Field Office Phone Number: (717)787-4763

Toll Free Phone Number: (800)932-0665

Project County: Cumberland County

BUREAU OF LABOR LAW COMPLIANCEPREVAILING WAGES PROJECT RATES

Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Department of Labor & IndustryReport Date: 9/28/2021 Page 1 of 13

Project: 21-06931 - Building EffectiveDate

ExpirationDate

Hourly Rate FringeBenefits

Total

Asbestos & Insulation Workers 6/26/2017 $32.00 $26.51 $58.51








Boilermaker (Commercial, Institutional, and MinorRepair Work)

3/1/2017 $28.52 $18.22 $46.74


3/1/2018 $29.52 $18.22 $47.74


1/1/2019 $29.26 $18.48 $47.74

Boilermakers 1/1/2018 $46.26 $33.36 $79.62

Boilermakers 3/1/2018 $45.89 $33.73 $79.62

Boilermakers 1/1/2019 $45.51 $34.11 $79.62

Boilermakers 8/1/2019 $47.21 $34.11 $81.32

Boilermakers 1/1/2021 $49.32 $34.90 $84.22

Bricklayer (Pointer, Cleaner, Caulker, Cement Mason,Plasterer, Tile Setter)

5/1/2018 $28.15 $22.45 $50.60

Bricklayers, Stone Masons, Pointers, Caulkers,Cleaners

5/1/2017 $32.54 $16.06 $48.60


5/1/2018 $32.95 $16.45 $49.40


5/1/2019 $33.43 $16.87 $50.30


5/3/2020 $33.99 $17.31 $51.30


5/1/2021 $34.62 $17.78 $52.40

Carpenters, Drywall Hangers, Framers, InstrumentMen, Lathers, Soft Floor Layers

6/1/2017 $28.88 $15.75 $44.63


6/1/2018 $29.53 $16.20 $45.73


6/1/2019 $30.18 $16.65 $46.83


6/1/2020 $30.88 $17.10 $47.98


6/1/2021 $31.77 $17.41 $49.18

Cement Finishers & Plasterers 5/2/2021 $27.25 $20.25 $47.50

Cement Finishers 5/1/2017 $27.20 $22.45 $49.65

Cement Masons 5/1/2019 $29.05 $22.50 $51.55

Cement Masons 5/1/2020 $29.85 $22.70 $52.55

Cement Masons 5/1/2021 $30.70 $22.85 $53.55

Drywall Finisher 5/1/2017 $23.30 $12.39 $35.69






ExpirationDate


Total


Electricians 6/1/2017 $30.00 $23.06 $53.06

Electricians 6/1/2018 $30.60 $23.63 $54.23

Electricians 6/1/2019 $31.60 $24.37 $55.97

Electricians 6/1/2020 $32.50 $25.20 $57.70

Electricians 6/1/2021 $33.50 $25.94 $59.44

Elevator Constructor 1/1/2018 $45.35 $33.00 $78.35




Glazier 5/1/2017 $25.63 $11.45 $37.08

Glazier 5/1/2018 $25.63 $11.95 $37.58

Glazier 5/1/2019 $25.63 $12.45 $38.08

Glazier 5/1/2020 $25.63 $12.95 $38.58

Glazier 5/1/2021 $25.63 $13.45 $39.08

Iron Workers (Bridge, Structural Steel, Ornamental,Precast, Reinforcing)

7/1/2017 $31.33 $28.42 $59.75


7/1/2018 $32.53 $28.42 $60.95


7/1/2019 $32.76 $29.88 $62.64


7/1/2020 $33.76 $30.13 $63.89


7/1/2021 $34.01 $31.13 $65.14

Laborers (Class 01 - See notes) 5/1/2017 $20.86 $13.33 $34.19


Laborers (Class 01 - See notes) 5/1/2019 4/30/2020 $21.76 $14.53 $36.29








Laborers (Class 02 - see notes) 5/1/2018 4/30/2019 $23.31 $13.93 $37.24

Laborers (Class 02 - see notes) 5/1/2018 4/30/2019 $23.31 $13.93 $37.24













ExpirationDate


Total

















Marble Mason 5/1/2017 $29.27 $15.62 $44.89

Marble Mason 5/1/2018 $29.88 $16.01 $45.89

Marble Mason 5/1/2019 $30.46 $16.43 $46.89

Marble Mason 5/1/2020 $31.02 $16.87 $47.89

Marble Mason 5/1/2021 $31.55 $17.34 $48.89

Millwright 5/1/2017 $33.79 $18.16 $51.95

Operators (Building, Class 01 - See Notes) 5/1/2017 $35.24 $24.58 $59.82





Operators (Building, Class 01A - See Notes) 5/1/2017 $37.49 $25.23 $62.72




















ExpirationDate


Total



















Operators (Building, Class 07A- See Notes) 5/1/2017 $42.44 $28.13 $70.57





Operators (Building, Class 07B- See Notes) 5/1/2017 $42.09 $28.03 $70.12





Painters Class 1 (see notes) 5/1/2017 $23.47 $13.32 $36.79












Pile Driver Divers (Building, Heavy, Highway) 1/1/2017 $49.13 $17.95 $67.08







ExpirationDate


Total

Piledrivers 1/1/2018 $33.55 $18.55 $52.10

Piledrivers 1/1/2019 $34.30 $19.30 $53.60

Piledrivers 1/1/2020 $35.40 $19.70 $55.10

Piledrivers 1/1/2021 $36.50 $20.10 $56.60

Piledrivers 1/1/2022 $37.60 $20.50 $58.10

Plasterers (Use Cement Finisher Rates) 5/1/2018 $25.88 $20.58 $46.46

Plasterers 5/1/2017 $25.03 $20.58 $45.61

Plasterers 5/1/2019 $26.73 $20.63 $47.36

Plasterers 5/1/2020 $27.48 $20.83 $48.31

Plasterers 5/1/2021 $28.33 $20.98 $49.31

Plumber/Pipefitter 5/1/2017 $35.82 $24.51 $60.33





Roofers (Composition) 5/1/2017 $36.15 $30.22 $66.37





Roofers (Shingle) 5/1/2016 $25.70 $19.17 $44.87

Roofers (Shingle) 5/1/2019 $28.50 $20.87 $49.37

Roofers (Shingle) 5/1/2020 $29.50 $21.25 $50.75

Roofers (Slate & Tile) 5/1/2016 $28.70 $19.17 $47.87




Sheet Metal Workers 6/1/2016 $33.60 $33.43 $67.03






Sign Makers and Hangars 7/17/2021 $29.49 $23.90 $53.39

Sprinklerfitters 4/1/2017 $37.40 $21.74 $59.14



Terrazzo Finisher 5/1/2017 $31.64 $15.62 $47.26





Terrazzo Grinder 5/1/2020 $32.95 $18.48 $51.43

Terrazzo Grinder 5/1/2021 $33.94 $19.03 $52.97




ExpirationDate


Total

Terrazzo Mechanics 5/1/2020 $32.91 $20.11 $53.02

Terrazzo Mechanics 5/1/2021 $33.83 $20.78 $54.61

Terrazzo Setter 5/1/2017 $30.63 $18.85 $49.48

Terrazzo Setter 5/1/2018 $31.23 $19.25 $50.48

Terrazzo Setter 5/1/2019 $31.81 $19.67 $51.48

Tile & Marble Finisher 5/1/2017 $26.89 $13.86 $40.75






Tile Setter 5/1/2017 $29.27 $15.62 $44.89

Tile Setter 5/1/2018 $29.88 $16.01 $45.89

Tile Setter 5/1/2019 $30.46 $16.43 $46.89

Tile Setter 5/1/2020 $31.02 $16.87 $47.89

Tile Setter 5/1/2020 $31.02 $16.87 $47.89

Tile Setter 5/1/2021 $31.55 $17.34 $48.89

Truckdriver class 1(see notes) 5/1/2017 $34.47 $0.00 $34.47





Truckdriver class 2 (see notes) 5/1/2017 $34.54 $0.00 $34.54










Window Film / Tint Installer 6/1/2019 $24.52 $12.08 $36.60



Project: 21-06931 - Heavy/Highway EffectiveDate

ExpirationDate


Total

Carpenter 5/1/2018 $30.75 $15.96 $46.71

Carpenter 5/1/2019 $31.51 $16.55 $48.06

Carpenter 5/1/2020 $32.22 $17.19 $49.41

Carpenter 5/1/2021 $33.12 $17.74 $50.86

Carpenters 5/1/2017 $30.12 $15.34 $45.46

Cement Finishers 5/1/2016 $26.40 $22.48 $48.88

Electric Lineman 5/29/2017 $44.22 $23.94 $68.16









7/1/2017 $31.33 $28.42 $59.75


7/1/2018 $32.53 $28.42 $60.95


7/1/2019 $32.76 $29.88 $62.64


7/1/2020 $33.76 $30.13 $63.89


7/1/2021 $34.01 $31.13 $65.14


























ExpirationDate


Total
















































ExpirationDate


Total







Operators (Heavy, Class 01 - See Notes) 5/1/2016 $32.16 $22.64 $54.80






Operators (Heavy, Class 01A - See Notes) 5/1/2017 $36.05 $24.82 $60.87



































ExpirationDate


Total









Operators (Heavy, Class 07B - See Notes) 5/1/2017 $40.38 $27.53 $67.91





Operators (Highway, Class 01 - See Notes) 5/1/2016 $32.16 $22.64 $54.80






Operators (Highway, Class 01a - See Notes) 5/1/2017 $35.18 $24.56 $59.74




























ExpirationDate


Total











Operators (Highway, Class 06/A - See Notes) 5/1/2016 $34.65 $23.36 $58.01












Operators (Highway, Class 07/B - See Notes) 5/1/2016 $37.17 $25.57 $62.74
















Piledrivers 1/1/2017 $32.75 $17.95 $50.70

Piledrivers 1/1/2018 $33.55 $18.55 $52.10

Piledrivers 5/1/2018 $30.75 $15.96 $46.71

Piledrivers 1/1/2019 $34.30 $19.30 $53.60

Piledrivers 5/1/2019 $31.51 $16.55 $48.06

Piledrivers 5/1/2020 $32.22 $17.19 $49.41




ExpirationDate


Total

Piledrivers 5/1/2021 $33.12 $17.74 $50.86

Steamfitters (Heavy and Highway - Gas Distribution) 5/1/2017 $40.98 $32.53 $73.51





















SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Contract description.B. Contractor's use of site.C. Work Sequence.D. Owner occupancy.

1.2 CONTRACT DESCRIPTIONA. Project includes interior renovations of the “F” Wing (Ground through Fourth Floor of the

existing Tower Building), “G” and “H” Wings at the Claremont Nursing and RehabilitationCenter, 1000 Claremont Road, Carlisle, PA 17013.

B. The scope includes architectural, mechanical, electrical and plumbing Work as indicatedon the Drawings.

C. FSES Remediation: Fire Safety Evaluation Survey Remediation.D. Work of the four separate Contracts is identified in Section 01120 - Multiple Contract

Summary.E. Perform Work of each Contract under separate stipulated sum contract with Owner in

accordance with Conditions of Contract.

1.3 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE A. Confine operations at site to areas permitted by Law, Ordinances, Permits, and Contract

Documents.B. Work Hours: No restrictions. Contractors to coordinate night and weekend work with

Owner.C. Limit use of site for Work and storage as follows:

1. Restrict work and storage to construction areas indicated on Drawings.2. Access site only as designated by Owner.3. Restrict parking to areas designated by Owner.4. Do not perform operations that would interrupt or delay Owner's daily operations.5. Maintain Owner, and public access at all times to existing buildings, parking,

drives and walks.6. Restrict construction personnel from access to other areas of site and existing

building areas, except as required to perform new and alterations Work.D. Do not unreasonably encumber site with materials or equipment.E. Do not load structure with weight that will endanger structure.F. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products stored on premises.G. Move stored products which interfere with operations of Owner. H. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations.

1.4 WORK SEQUENCEA. Construct Work during construction period in accordance with the following requirements.

1. "F" Wing Tower Building will be vacant and available for contractors use.2. “G” and “H” Wings are occupied, will remain in operation during construction, and

require coordination with the Owner to access the spaces. B. Construction phasing sequence shall be managed by the General Contractor and

coordinated with the Owner and local jurisdiction having authority. C. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner.D. Exit routes shall remain free and clear and building systems shall remain operational.

1.5 OWNER OCCUPANCYA. Owner will occupy portions of the premises during the entire period of construction for the

conduct of Owner's normal, daily operations. Cooperate with Owner's representative in allconstruction operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner usage.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Summary 01100 - 1

B. Contractor shall conduct his operations to insure least inconvenience to Owner'soperation.

C. Contractor shall take precautions to avoid excessive noise or vibration that would disturbOwner's operations. When directed by Owner, Contractor shall perform certainoperations at designated time of day or night in order to minimize disturbance to Owner'soperations.

D. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.

PART 2 PRODUCTSNot Used.

PART 3 EXECUTIONNot Used.

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 Summary 01100 - 2

SECTION 01120 - MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Related SectionsB. CoordinationC. Project CoordinatorD. General Requirements of ContractsE. General Construction ContractF. Plumbing ContractG. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) ContractH. Electrical ContractI. Description of Alterations Work for Each Prime Contractor

1.2 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 01100 - Summary: Contract description.B. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Additional Prime Contractor

requirements.

1.3 COORDINATIONA. Project Coordinator shall be responsible for coordination between the General

Construction Contract, Plumbing Contract, Heating/ Ventilation/ Air Conditioning Contract, and Electrical Contract.1. General Construction Contractor shall act as Project Coordinator.

B. Mechanical/electrical coordinator, who shall be under the direction of Project coordinator,shall be responsible for coordination between the Plumbing Contract, HVAC Contract,and Electrical Contract.1. HVAC Contractor shall act as mechanical/electrical coordinator.

1.4 PROJECT COORDINATOR RESPONSIBILITIESA. Project Coordinator: Full-time Project Coordinator shall be experienced in administration

and supervision of building construction, including Heating/ Ventilation/ Air Conditioning and electrical work.1. Coordination activities of Project Coordinator include, but are not limited to, the

following:a. Provide overall coordination of the Work.b. Coordinate shared access to work spaces.c. Coordinate product selections for compatibility.d. Provide overall coordination of temporary facilities and controls.e. Coordinate, schedule, and approve interruptions of permanent and

temporary utilities, including those necessary to make connections fortemporary services.

f. Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performedby each contract.

g. Coordinate sequencing and scheduling of the Work. Include thefollowing:1) Initial Coordination Meeting: At earliest possible date, arrange

and conduct a meeting with separate contractors for sequencingand coordinating the Work; negotiate reasonable adjustments toschedules.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Multiple Contract Summary 01120 - 1

2) Prepare a combined Contractor's Construction Schedule forentire Project. Base schedule on Preliminary ConstructionSchedule. Secure time commitments for performing criticalconstruction activities from separate contractors. Show activitiesof each contract on a separate sheet. Prepare a simplifiedsummary sheet indicating combined construction activities ofcontracts.

3) Distribute copies of schedules to Architect, Owner, and separatecontractors.

h. Provide quality-assurance and quality-control services specified inSection 01400 - Quality Requirements.

i. Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate tests and inspections,and coordinate schedule of tests and inspections.

j. Provide information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utilitystructures affected by construction.

k. Provide progress cleaning of common areas and coordinate progresscleaning of areas or pieces of equipment where more than one contractorhas worked.

l. Coordinate cutting and patching.m. Coordinate protection of the Work.n. Coordinate firestopping.o. Coordinate completion of interrelated punch list items.p. Coordinate preparation of Project Record Documents if information from

more than one contractor is to be integrated with information from othercontractors to form one combined record.

q. Print and submit Record Drawings if installations by more than onecontractor are indicated on the same Contract Drawing or Shop Drawing.

r. Collect Record Specification Sections from other contractors, collateSections into numeric order, and submit complete set.

s. Coordinate preparation of operation and maintenance manuals ifinformation from more than one contractor is to be integrated withinformation from other contractors to form one combined record.

t. Provide common-use field office for use by all personnel engaged inconstruction activities.

1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTSA. General Requirements pertaining to each prime contract:

1. Each Bidder shall receive bound herein the Notice (Advertisement), PerformanceBond, Payment Bond, AIA General Conditions of Contract, Division 1 andSpecifications Divisions 2 through 16 and the Contract Drawings. Every part ofthese documents listed herein are binding upon each Prime Contractor and uponeach Subcontractor insofar as they can or do apply to him or to his work and heshall be responsible for neglect to read or to attend to any paragraph or itemcontained herewith therein.

2. The General Construction contractor shall assign a superintendent to coordinateall the prime contractors, and be on site full time.

3. Each Prime Contractor is responsible for the cost of all permits and feesassociated with their Work.

4. Each Prime Contractor is responsible for scheduling the work and setting up atthe job site, following the official Notice to Proceed, and coordinating the Workwith the General Construction contractor.

5. Each Prime Contractor shall verify all reference points for laying out his work withthe Owner and the Architect. Where a Prime Contractors work is dependentupon the accuracy and suitability of a prior Contractor's work for the performanceof his contract work, he shall immediately call any discrepancies or error in suchwork to the attention of the Architect for correction before beginning his owncontract work.


6. Each Prime Contractor shall at all times be neat in his work, conflict as little aspossible with the work of other Contractors and remove daily from the siteaccumulated rubbish and debris resulting from his contract work within andwithout the building.

7. Upon completion of his work, each Prime Contractor shall leave all areas affectedby his contract work broom clean.

B. In addition to the requirements for each Prime Contract described in the Notice(Advertisement), Instructions to Bidders, Bonding and Bid Forms, Construction ContractAgreement Form, and AIA General Conditions of Contract, the scope of Work to beperformed and provided under each of the Prime Contracts is generally described in thefollowing Articles. Other sections and drawings when noted are for reference indicatingScope of Work and for coordination with other Prime Contractor's work.

C. Extent of Contract: Unless the Agreement contains a more specific description of theWork, names and terminology on Drawings and in Specification Sections determine whichcontract includes a specific element of Project.1. Unless otherwise indicated, the Work described in this Section for each contract

shall be complete systems and assemblies, including products, components,accessories, and installation required by the Contract Documents.

2. Local custom and trade-union jurisdictional settlements do not control the scopeof the Work of each contract. When a potential jurisdictional dispute or similarinterruption of work is first identified or threatened, affected contractors shallnegotiate a reasonable settlement to avoid or minimize interruption and delays.

3. Cutting and Patching: Provided by the General Construction Contract.4. Through-penetration firestopping for the Work of each contract shall be provided

by the General Construction Contract.D. Temporary Facilities and Controls: In addition to specific responsibilities for temporary

facilities and controls indicated in this Section and in Division 1 Section "TemporaryFacilities and Controls," each contractor is responsible for the following:1. Installation, operation, maintenance, and removal of each temporary facility

usually considered as its own normal construction activity. 2. Plug-in electric power cords and extension cords, supplementary plug-in task

lighting, and special lighting necessary exclusively for its own activities.3. Its own field office, complete with necessary furniture, utilities, and telephone

service.4. Its own storage and fabrication sheds.5. Temporary enclosures for its own construction activities.6. General hoisting facilities for its own construction activities, up to 2 tons.7. Waste disposal facilities, including collection and legal disposal of its own

hazardous, dangerous, unsanitary, or other harmful waste materials.8. Progress cleaning of its own areas on a daily basis.9. Secure lockup of its own tools, materials, and equipment.10. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities necessary exclusively

for its own construction activities.11. COVID requirements.

1.6 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT A. Work in the General Construction Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Selective interior demolition.2. Interior construction, including drywall partitions, doors, hardware, and interior

glazed openings.3. Through-penetration firestopping for the Work of each contract.4. Interior finishes, ceilings, and wall finishes.5. Includes all work in Divisions 1 - General Requirements thru 10 - Specialties

unless noted otherwise.6. Refer to other Articles in this section for additional requirements affecting the

scope of this prime contract.


B. Temporary facilities and controls in the General Construction Contract include, but are notlimited to, the following:1. Project temporary signs.2. General waste disposal facilities.3. Pest control.4. Temporary fire-protection equipment.5. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.6. Security enclosure and lockup.7. Environmental protection.8. Restoration of Owner's existing facilities used as temporary facilities.

1.7 PLUMBING CONTRACTA. Work in the Plumbing Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Domestic water distribution.2. Sanitary waste.3. Vent piping.4. Fire-suppression systems.5. Includes all Plumbing Work in Divisions 15 - Mechanical, unless noted otherwise.6. Refer to other Articles in this section for additional requirements affecting the


1.8 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) CONTRACTA. Work in the Heating/ Ventilation/ Air Conditioning Contract includes, but is not limited to,

the following:1. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems and equipment.2. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning ductwork and insulation.3. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning instrumentation and controls.4. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning testing, adjusting, and balancing.5. Building automation system.6. Mechanical connections to equipment furnished by the General Construction

Contract, Plumbing Contract, and Heating/ Ventilation/ Air Conditioning Contracts.7. Includes all Heating/ Ventilation/ Air Conditioning Work in Divisions 15 -

Mechanical, unless noted otherwise.8. Refer to other Articles in this section for additional requirements affecting the


1.9 ELECTRICAL CONTRACTA. Work in the Electrical Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Interior lighting.2. Tenting of existing lights and speakers. Provide fire rated covers over existing

fixtures in accordance with the notes on the Drawings.3. Electrical connections to equipment installed by the General Contractor.4. Electrical connections to equipment furnished by the other Prime Contracts.5. Includes all Electrical Work in Divisions 16 - Electrical, unless noted otherwise.6. Refer to other Articles in this section for additional requirements affecting the


1.10 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK FOR EACH PRIME CONTRACTOR A. The following is a general description of work for each prime contract for alteration work.

Work includes but is not necessarily limited to items listed.B. General Contract:

1. Work generally includes demolition, and new construction associated with interiorrenovations.

2. Patching where existing work is removed by any contractor (prime or sub).C. Plumbing Contract:

1. Work generally includes demolition of certain plumbing piping, and furnishing ofnew in the existing building.


2. The Plumbing Contractor shall also make plumbing connections to new andrelocated equipment.

D. Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning Contract: 1. Work generally includes demolition of certain heating, ventilating, and air

conditioning ductwork, diffusers and accessories, and furnishing of new in theexisting building.

2. The heating, ventilating, and air conditioning Contractor shall also make ductworkconnections to new and relocated equipment.

E. Electrical Contract: 1. Work generally includes demolition of certain electrical wiring, devices, and

accessories, and furnishing of new in the existing building. 2. The Electrical Contractor shall make electrical connections to new and relocated

equipment.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Alternates.

1.2 DESCRIPTIONA. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's

option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner-Contractor Agreement.B. Alternates, as described below, add work to or deduct work from the Base Bid.C. Referenced sections of specifications or Drawing details stipulate pertinent requirements

for products and methods to achieve the work stipulated under each Alternate.D. Coordinate pertinent related work and modify surrounding work as required to properly

integrate the work under each Alternate, and to provide the complete constructionrequired by Contract Documents.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATESA. ALTERNATE NO. 1 - ACCELERATED SCHEDULE (ADD)

1. Provide the cost to complete the project on or before December 15, 2021.



END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 Alternates 01230 - 1

SECTION 01270 - UNIT PRICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Unit prices.

1.2 GENERALA. Where unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents, the unit price shall include,

except as otherwise noted, the providing of all costs required for the completeconstruction of the specified unit of work, including: cost of materials and delivery; cost ofinstallation labor, including social security, insurance and other required fringe benefits;workman's compensation insurance; bond premiums; rental value of equipment andmachinery; taxes; incidental expenses; and supervision.

B. Each unit price shall be total cost or credit to Owner.C. Materials and methods for unit prices shall be in accordance with applicable product

specifications included in this Project Manual.

1.3 METHOD OF ADJUSTMENTA. Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents are for adjusting the Contract Sum in case of

additions to or deductions from the Work described in the Contract Documents. B. Except as otherwise specified, unit prices stated shall apply to both deductive and additive

variations of quantities.C. Unit prices included in the Agreement shall remain in effect until date of final completion of entire

Work.D. Adjustment to Contract Sum will be by Change Order on basis of net accumulative change for

each category.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICESA. Unit Price No. 1: Tenting of 8" recessed downlight. Provide a fire rated light cover in

accordance with Division 16 specifications.

B. Unit Price No. 2: Tenting of recessed speaker. Provide a fire rated cover in accordance withDivision 16 specifications.

C. Unit Price No. 3: Tenting of remote indicator lights (associated with duct smoke detectors).Provide a fire rated cover in accordance with Division 16 specifications.

D. Unit Price No. 4: Provide a unit price to remove and replace ceiling diffuser with a new fire rateddiffuser in accordance with Division 15 specifications. Basis for pricing shall be a CD-12x12-8"diameter, 200 cfm.

E. Unit Price No. 5: Provide a unit price to remove and replace ceiling register with a new fire rated

register in accordance with Division 15 specifications. Basis for pricing shall be a ER-10x8.



END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 Unit Prices 01270 - 1

SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Schedule of values.B. Applications for payment.C. Change procedures.D. Defect assessment.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUESA. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Continuation Sheet for G702. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to

Proceed.C. Format: Utilize Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with

number and title of major specification Section. Provide separate columns for cost ofmaterial and labor.

D. Provide on separate line item, amount of Allowances specified.E. Provide separate line item, for amount of Contractor's overhead and profit.F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment.

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENTA. Submit four copies of each application to Architect on AIA Form G702 - Application and

Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet for G702. Submit Contractor'selectronic media driven form when approved in paragraph 1.2A above.

B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application forPayment.

C. Submit updated construction schedule with each Application for Payment.D. Submit updated Record Drawings with each Application for Payment. Pay applications will

not be processed until Record Drawings have been reviewed and approved by theArchitect.

E. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement.F. Submit with transmittal letter as specified for Submittals in Section 01330. G. Submit lien waivers.H. Substantiating Data: When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data

justifying dollar amounts in question. Include the following with Application for Payment:1. Current construction photographs specified in Section 01330.2. Partial release of liens from major subcontractors and vendors.3. Record documents as specified in Section 01700, for review by Architect at site

prior to application approval.4. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products.5. Construction progress schedules, revised and current as specified in Section

01330.

1.4 CHANGE PROCEDURESA. Submittals: Submit name of individual authorized to receive change documents, and be

responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or Subcontractors of changes tothe Work.

B. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment toContract Sum/Price or Contract Time by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA FormG710.

C. The Architect may issue a Proposal Request including a detailed description of proposedchange with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change in ContractTime for executing the change and the period of time during which the requested pricewill be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit estimate within 10 days.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Payment Procedures 01290 - 1

D. Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for change to Architect,describing proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statementdescribing reason for the change, and effect on Contract Sum/Price and Contract Timewith full documentation.

E. Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's fixedprice quotation or Contractor's request for Change Order as approved by Architect.

F. Unit Price Change Order: For contract unit prices and quantities, the Change Order willbe executed on fixed unit price basis. For unit costs or quantities of units of work whichare not pre-determined, execute Work under Construction Change Directive. Changes inContract Sum/Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and MaterialChange Order.

G. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue directive, on AIA Form G713Construction Change Directive signed by Owner, instructing Contractor to proceed withchange in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document will describechanges in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in ContractSum/Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute change.

H. Time and Material Change Order: Submit itemized account and supporting data aftercompletion of change, within time limits indicated in Conditions of the Contract. Architectwill determine change allowable in Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time as provided inContract Documents.

I. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. Provide fullinformation required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs forchanges in the Work.

J. Document each quotation for change in cost or time with sufficient data to allowevaluation of quotation.

K. Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order. L. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties

as provided in Conditions of the Contract.M. Correlation Of Contractor Submittals:

1. Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to recordeach authorized Change Order as separate line item and adjust ContractSum/Price.

2. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect change in Contract Time, revisesub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, andresubmit.

3. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.

1.5 DEFECT ASSESSMENTA. Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements.B. If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the

Architect will direct appropriate remedy or adjust payment.C. The defective Work may remain, but unit sum/price will be adjusted to new sum/price at

discretion of Architect.D. Defective Work will be partially repaired to instructions of Architect and unit sum/price will

be adjusted to new sum/price at discretion of Architect. E. Individual specification sections may modify these options or may identify specific formula

or percentage sum/price reduction.F. Authority of Architect to assess defects and identify payment adjustments, is final.G. Non-Payment For Rejected Products: Payment will not be made for rejected products for

any of the following:1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable.2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement.3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle.


4. Products placed beyond lines and levels of required Work.5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work.6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 01300 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Coordination and project conditions.B. Preconstruction meeting.C. Progress meetings.D. Preinstallation meetings.E. Cutting and patching.F. Special procedures.

1.2 COORDINATION AND PROJECT CONDITIONSA. The following applies to each prime contractor. B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various sections of Project Manual to

ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent constructionelements.

C. Verify utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible withbuilding utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependentresponsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, operating equipment.

D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electricalWork indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, andconduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spacesefficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and forrepairs.

E. In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within construction. Coordinatelocations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of Work of separate sections in preparation forSubstantial Completion.

G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defectiveWork and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption ofOwner's activities.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETINGA. Architect will schedule meeting after Notice of Award.B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect, and each Prime Contractor.C. Agenda:

1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.2. Distribution of Contract Documents.3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and

progress schedule.4. Designation of personnel representing parties in Contract, and Architect.5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions,

applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contractcloseout procedures.

6. Scheduling.7. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.8. Owner's requirements.9. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner.10. Temporary utilities provided by Owner.11. Survey and building layout.12. Security and housekeeping procedures.13. Schedules.14. Application for payment procedures.15. Procedures for testing.16. Procedures for maintaining record documents.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Administrative Requirements 01300 - 1

17. Requirements for start-up of equipment.18. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction

period.D. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within four days after meeting to

participants, with copies to each Prime Contractor, Owner, and those affected bydecisions made.

1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGSA. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum every

two week intervals.B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at

meetings.C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, each Prime Contractor, Owner, Architect, as

appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.D. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings.2. Review of Work progress.3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.4. Identification of problems impeding planned progress.5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.7. Maintenance of progress schedule.8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.10. Coordination of projected progress.11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.13. Other business relating to Work.

E. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within four days after meeting toparticipants, with copies to each Contractor, Owner, and those affected by decisionsmade.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGA. When required in individual specification sections, convene preinstallation meeting at

Project site prior to commencing work of specific section.B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of specific section.C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date.D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:

1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures.2. Review coordination with related work.

E. Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within four days after meeting toparticipants, with copies to Contractor, Owner, and those affected by decisions made.

PART 2 PRODUCTSNot Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CUTTING AND PATCHINGA. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching.B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements affecting:

1. Structural integrity of element.2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element.4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.


5. Work of Owner or separate contractor.C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and

to:1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work.2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work.3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work.4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing.5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and

electrical Work.D. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and to provide proper surfaces

to receive patching and finishing.E. Cut masonry and concrete materials using masonry saw or core drill.F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract

Documents.G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids.I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal

voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07840 to full thickness ofpenetrated element.

J. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearestintersection; for assembly, refinish entire unit.

K. Identify hazardous substances or conditions exposed during the Work to Architect fordecision or remedy.

3.2 SPECIAL PROCEDURESA. Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing with new products for patching

and extending work.B. Employ installer to perform alteration work.C. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work.

Replace and restore at completion.D. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, including rotted wood, corroded

metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified forfinished Work.

E. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces.F. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to permit installation of new work and

finishes.G. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of

temperature and humidity.H. Remove, cut, and patch Work in manner to minimize damage and to permit restoring

products and finishes to specified condition.I. Refinish existing visible surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified

condition for each material, with neat transition to adjacent finishes.J. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, provide smooth and even transition. Patch

Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance.K. When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition with new Work is not possible,

terminate existing surface along straight line at natural line of division and submitrecommendation to Architect for review.

L. Where change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providingsmooth transition; to Architect for review.

M. Trim existing doors to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim to specified condition.N. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or

showing other imperfections.O. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product sections.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Submittal procedures.B. Construction progress schedules.C. Submittal schedule.D. Proposed products list.E. Product data.F. Shop drawings.G. Samples.H. Design data.I. Test reports.J. Certificates.K. Requests for Information.L. Manufacturer's instructions.M. Manufacturer's field reports.N. Erection drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURESA. Identify Project, Prime Contractor, subcontractor and supplier; pertinent drawing and

detail number, and specification section number, appropriate to submittal.B. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialled certifying that review, approval, verification

of products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination ofinformation is in accordance with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

C. Schedule submittals to expedite Project, and deliver to Architect. Coordinate submissionof related items.

D. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and fromContractor, except as noted in Article 1.4 below.

E. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which maybe detrimental to successful performance of completed Work.

F. Allow space on submittals for Contractor and Architect review stamps.G. When revised for resubmission, identify changes made since previous submission.H. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report

inability to comply with requirements.I. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.

1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULESA. Submit a construction schedule prior to the first application for payment. The construction

schedule shall be coordinated with all trades and subcontracts. B. Failure to submit a complete and coordinated schedule will result in reduction of General

conditions monies due the contractor until such schedule is provided and will constitute amaterial breach of contract.

C. Submit initial schedules within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. Afterreview, resubmit required revised data within ten days.

D. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment.E. Distribute copies of reviewed schedules to Project site file, subcontractors, suppliers, and

other concerned parties.F. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections

indicated in schedules.G. Submit computer generated horizontal bar chart with separate line for each major portion

of Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week.H. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages

and other logically grouped activities. Indicate early and late start, early and late finish,float dates, and duration.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Submittal Procedures 01330-1

I. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission.J. Submit separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and

samples, including and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Indicatedecision dates for selection of finishes.

K. Revisions To Schedules:1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion

date of each activity.2. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and

other identifiable changes.3. Prepare narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact

on Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect.

1.4 PRODUCT DATAA. Product Data: Submit to Architect for review for limited purpose of checking for

conformance with information given and design concept expressed in ContractDocuments. Provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTALPROCEDURES article and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700.

B. Submit number of copies Contractor requires, plus three copies Architect will retain.C. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.

Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.D. Indicate product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and

location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.E. After review distribute in accordance with Submittal Procedures article above and provide

copies for record documents described in Section 01700.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGSA. Shop Drawings: Submit to Architect for review for limited purpose of checking for

conformance with information given and design concept expressed in ContractDocuments. Produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTALPROCEDURES article and for record documents purposes described in Section 01700.

B. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, andlocation of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

C. Submit electronic shop drawings in files in PDF format to Architect.

1.6 SAMPLESA. Samples: Submit to Architect for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance

with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. Produceduplicates and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and forrecord documents purposes described in Section 01700.

B. Samples For Selection as Specified in Product Sections:1. Submit to Architect for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.2. Submit samples of finishes textures, and patterns for Architect selection.3. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL

PROCEDURES article and for record documents purposes described in Section01700.

C. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of Products, withintegral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.

D. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.E. Submit number of samples specified in individual specification sections; Architect will

retain one sample.F. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual

specification sections.

1.7 DESIGN DATAA. Submit for Architect knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.B. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information

given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.


1.8 TEST REPORTSA. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.B. Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with

information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.

1.9 CERTIFICATESA. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer,

installation/application subcontractor, or Contractor to Architect, in quantities specified forProduct Data.

B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submitsupporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.

C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must beacceptable to Architect.

1.10 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATIONA. When the Contractor is unable to determine matters concerning performance under and

requirements of the Contract Documents, submit a written Request for Information (RFI)for the Architect to determine or interpret the matter.1. Submit RFI on form acceptable to Architect.2. Include reference to specific Drawing number and/or Specification Section, page,

and paragraph in question.3. Number RFI’s sequentially and record in Log.4. Clearly mark attachments with RFI number designation.

B. Contractor shall endeavor to minimize the number of RFI’s.1. Before submitting RFI, diligently examine Contract Documents to ensure

information is not available therein.2. When clarification at Progress Meeting is not possible either because of the

urgency of the matter or its complexity, prepare and submit RFI to Architect.C. RFI’s shall not be used for the following purposes:

1. To request submittal approval.2. To request substitution approval.

D. When RFI’s are used for coordination issues, include a proposed solution drawn to scale.E. Sub-contractor RFI’s:

1. Review before submitting to Architect, and do not forward if information is in theContract Documents.

2. RFI’s sent by sub-contractors directly to the Architect or Architect’s consultantswill be returned unprocessed.

F. Architect’s Action:1. The Architect shall have fifteen (15) calendar days from receipt of the RFI to

provide an answer, or to provide in writing a reason why more review time isrequired.

2. Contractor shall bear responsibility for delays caused by backlog of unnecessaryor frivolous RFI’s.

3. Architect’s action will be in the form of instructions recorded in the Meetingminutes, a written response on the RFI form, or an Architects SupplementalInstructions (ASI).

4. The following RFI’s will be returned without action taken:a. Incomplete or incorrectly submitted RFI’s.b. RFI’s which in the opinion of the Architect are frivolous, unnecessary, or

requesting information readily available on the Contract Documents as aresult of careful study and comparison, other Owner providedinformation, Contractor prepared coordination Drawings, or other projectcorrespondence or documentation.

5. The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum amounts paid to theArchitect for the Architect to evaluate and respond to the Contractor’s requestsfor information, where such information was available to the Contractor from acareful study and comparison of the Contract Documents, field conditions, other


Owner provided information, Contractor prepared coordination drawings, or priorProject correspondence or documentation.

6. Delay claims will not be permitted based on the RFI process or on the failure ofthe Contractor to adequately examine the Construction Documents.

1.11 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONSA. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery,

storage, assembly, installation, adjusting, and finishing, to Architect for delivery to Ownerin quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and specialenvironmental criteria required for application or installation.

1.12 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTSA. Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.B. Submit report within 30 days of observation to Architect for information.C. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information

given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.

1.13 ERECTION DRAWINGSA. Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.B. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information

given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.C. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Architect

or Owner.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 01350 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDEDA. Procedural requirements for alteration work.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONSA. Use of site - Section 01100.B. Sequence of work - Section 01100.C. Temporary facilities and controls, including temporary partitions - Section 01500.D. Material and equipment - Section 01500.E. Cleaning - Section 01700.

1.3 DESCRIPTIONA. Coordinate work of alterations with new construction.B. The procedures and administrative requirements of this Section apply to all Sections of

the Specifications which are involved in alterations to the existing buildings.C. During demolition and alteration work, exercise extreme care not to damage, deface or

alter existing elements of building scheduled to remain, except as specifically notedotherwise.

D. In addition to demolition and removal specifically indicated, cut into or partially removeportions of the existing building as necessary to allow for new construction. Include suchwork as:1. Cutting, moving or removing of items not shown to be cut, moved, or removed,

but which must be cut, moved, or removed to allow the new work to proceed. Work or items which are to remain in the finished work shall be patched orreinstalled after their cutting, moving, or removing, and their joints and finishesmade to match adjacent or similar work.

2. Cleaning and removal of existing surface finishes as needed to install new workand new finishes.

3. Removal of abandoned items serving no useful purpose, such as abandonedequipment, piping, ductwork, conduit and wiring.

4. Removal or repair of hazardous conditions.5. Removal of debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces.

E. Patch, match, repair, refinish or reinstall existing items to remain in finished work, tospecified condition for each material, with joints and finishes made to match adjacent orsimilar work.

F. Relocate and reinstall designated existing materials.

1.4 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING SERVICES AND ACCESSA. Security: When keys to locked areas are needed to perform work, obtain from Owner.

Return keys at end of each day's work.B. Maintenance of Fire Department Access:

1. During entire period of construction, maintain designated fire lane access routesto existing and new buildings.

2. Keep fire hydrants clear of construction operations.C. Maintenance of Access and Operations:

1. During period of construction, the Owner will continue to perform normal activitiesin existing buildings. Maintain proper and safe access to the Owner-occupiedareas at all times. Keep free of construction debris at all times.

2. Schedule demolition and remodeling operations in such a manner as to allowOwner’s operations to continue with minimum interruption.

3. During periods of construction when Owner occupies building, do not obstruct inany manner existing exit ways of Owner-occupied areas. Prior to removal ofexisting exit ways (stairs, corridors, doors) as part of new Work, provide and

Proj. No. 18144.01 Alteration Project Procedures 01350 - 1

maintain new exit ways so as to maintain same number of exit ways. Maintainexisting exit doors in an operable condition.

D. Maintenance of Existing Services:1. Refer to Section 01300 for utility shut down restrictions.

E. Building Access:1. Access buildings at entrances predetermined with Owner. 2. Access to construction areas within Owner-occupied buildings shall be as

designated by Owner.3. Restrict construction traffic to designated work areas and to other areas

specifically designated by Owner.

1.5 ALTERATIONS, CUTTING AND PROTECTIONA. Extent:

1. Perform cutting and removal work so as not to cut or remove more than isnecessary and so as not to damage adjacent work.

2. Conduct work in such a manner as to minimize noise and to minimizeaccumulation and spread of dirt and dust.

B. Shoring, Bracing and Capping: Provide shores, needling and bracing required to keepbuilding structurally secure and free of deflection in all its parts, and as required forinstallation of new structural members.

C. Responsibility and Assignment to Trades:1. Contractor shall assign the work of moving, removal, cutting, patching and repair

to trades under his supervision so as to cause the least damage to each type ofwork encountered, and so as to return the building as much as possible to theappearance of new work.

2. Patching of finish materials shall be assigned to mechanics skilled in the work ofthe finish trade involved.

D. Sleeving:1. Where new pipes, conduit and ducts penetrate existing walls, roofs and floors,

provide sleeves appropriate to existing construction and new penetrating work.2. Fill voids between sleeves and penetrating pipes, conduit and ducts.3. Where sleeves are not required, fill voids between edges of penetration and

penetrating pipes, conduits and ducts using material to match existingconstruction.

4. Where penetrations are through fire-rated walls and floors, fill voids withfirestopping materials to maintain fire rating of assembly being penetrated.

E. Protection:1. Protect remaining finishes, equipment, and adjacent work from damage caused

by cutting, moving, removal and patching operations. Protect surfaces which willremain a part of the finished work.

2. Protect existing and new work from weather elements. Where openings are cutinto existing work, provide waterproofing, weather protection, and other facilitiesand protection required to prevent weather damage to new work, to remaining oldwork, and to building interior..

3. During demolition, cutting, moving, removal and construction, provide positivedust-control.

4. During demolition, cutting and removal, examine debris for presence ofhazardous materials. If hazardous materials are encountered, comply with local,state and federal regulations for handling, removal and disposal procedures.

F. Demolition:1. Cut and carefully remove designated items.2. Do not cut or remove structural members, unless otherwise noted.3. Avoid excessive vibrations in demolition procedures that would be transmitted

through existing structure and finish materials.


G. Salvage:1. Salvage sufficient quantities of cut or removed material to replace damaged work

or patch new work where required. Protect and provide dry, secure storage foritems to be reused.

2. Salvage items specifically indicated for salvage and reuse.3. Do not incorporate salvaged or used material in new construction, except where

small quantities of finish material which are difficult to match or duplicate areapproved for patching or extending purposes by Owner or except as specificallyindicated.

4. Salvaged items left over after completion of Work shall be disposed of byContractor, unless scheduled to be turned over to Owner.

H. Debris:1. Remove debris promptly from the site each day. Debris resulting from cutting,

removal or moving, except that scheduled for salvage, becomes property of theContractor. Load removed material directly on trucks for removal from site. Dispose of removed material legally. Do not burn on site. Do not allow debris toenter sewers.

2. Do not let piled material endanger structure.3. Prevent occurrence of unsanitary conditions, staining or damage due to debris.

1.6 REPAIRING, PATCHING, EXTENDING, MATCHING AND RELOCATIONA. Extent: Perform patching, extending, matching, relocation and reworking of existing

elements as designated on Drawings and as required to make work complete. B. Skill: Patch and extend existing work using skilled mechanics who are capable of

matching existing quality of workmanship. Quality of patched or extended work shall notbe less than that specified for new Work.

C. Patching:1. In areas where a portion of an existing finished surface is damaged, lifted, or

stained as a result of alterations work, patch or replace damaged portion ofsurface with matching material.

2. Patch holes in walls, partitions and floors resulting from removal of piping orequipment.

3. Provide adequate support or substrate for patching of finishes.4. If damaged surface was a painted or coated one, repaint or recoat patched

portion in such a way that uniform color and texture over entire surface results.5. If surrounding surface cannot be matched, repaint or recoat entire surface to a

visible stopping point or change of plane.D. Transitions:

1. Where new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make transition assmooth and neat as possible. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work intexture and appearance so as to make patch or transition invisible to eye at adistance of 3 ft.

2. Where masonry, plaster, metal or other finished surface is cut in such a way thata smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surfaceneatly along a straight line at a natural line of division, and provide trimappropriate to finished surface.

3. Where two or more spaces are indicated to become one space, rework floors sothat horizontal planes, without breaks, steps or bulkheads result.

4. In cases of extreme change of level (3 in. or more), obtain instructions fromOwner as to method of making transition. Either stepping, bulkheading,encasement, ramping, sloping or change or transition line shall be employed.

E. Matching:1. Restore existing work that is damaged during construction to a condition equal to

its condition at time of start of Work.2. At locations in existing areas where partitions are removed, patch floors and walls

with finish materials to match adjacent finishes.3. Patched areas shall match adjacent surfaces.


F. Overall Requirement that Work Be Complete:1. Where a product or type of construction occurs in existing building, and it is not

specified as a part of new work, provide such products or types of construction asneeded to patch, extend or match existing work.

2. These Specifications will generally not describe existing products or standards ofexecution, nor will they enumerate products which are not a part of newconstruction. The existing product is its own specification and standard forstrength, appearance, and other characteristics. Provide products in qualitywhich is in no way inferior to existing products.

3. Presence of product or type of construction in existing work shall cause itspatching, extending, or matching to be performed, as necessary to make workcomplete and consistent, to identical standards of quality.

1.7 REPAIRA. Replace work damaged in course of alterations, except at areas approved by Owner for

repair.B. Small existing surface defects and existing conditions of minor wear and tear of masonry

and metal surfaces will not require removal and replacement, except as otherwisespecifically noted.

C. If repaired work is not brought up to standard for new work, Owner will direct that it be cutout and replaced with new work.

1.8 CLEANINGA. At completion of each phase of alterations work, clean work area and make work

surfaces ready for succeeding work.B. Clean areas daily.C. As soon as work in each area of alterations is complete, clean up surfaces, remove

equipment, salvage and debris, and return in condition suitable for proceeding with newWork as quickly as possible.

PART 2 - MATERIALSNot Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used

End of Section


SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Quality control and control of installation.B. TolerancesC. References.D. Manufacturers' field services.E. Examination.F. Preparation.

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATIONA. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions,

and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.C. When manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification

from Architect before proceeding.D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more

stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or moreprecise workmanship.

E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by

manufacturer.G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to

withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement.

1.3 TOLERANCESA. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable

Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. When manufacturers' tolerances conflict with

Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

1.4 REFERENCESA. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus

standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirementsare specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents,except where specific date is established by code.

C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.D. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request

clarification from Architect before proceeding.E. Neither contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor

those of Architect shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inferenceotherwise in reference documents.

1.5 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICESA. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers

or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditionsof surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, and test,adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions whennecessary.

B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of requiredobservations.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Quality Requirements 01400 - 1

C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installersthat are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

D. Refer to Section 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, MANUFACTURERS' FIELDREPORTS article.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent

Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.B. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being

applied or attached.C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.D. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner

prior to applying new material or substance in contact or bond.

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 Quality Requirements 01400 - 2

SECTION 01460 - TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Testing and inspection services.

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATIONA. Monitor quality control over services, and site conditions to produce Work of specified

quality.B. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more

stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards.C. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

1.3 REFERENCESA. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus

standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirementsare specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents,except where specific date is established by code.

C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.D. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request

clarification from Architect before proceeding.E. Neither contractual relationships, duties, nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor

those of Architect shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inferenceotherwise in reference documents.

1.4 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICESA. Owner will employ and pay for specified services of an independent firm to perform

testing and inspection.B. The independent firm will perform tests, inspections and other services specified in

individual specification sections and as required by Architect. 1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate at Project location.2. Laboratory Staff: Maintain full time registered Engineer on staff to review

services.3. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an

accuracy traceable to National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of naturalphysical constants.

C. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Performoff-site testing as required by Architect or Owner.

D. Reports will be submitted by independent firm to Architect and Contractor, in duplicateindicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliancewith Contract Documents.

E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment,tools, storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested.1. Notify Architect and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time for

operations requiring services.2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and

tests required for Contractor's use.F. Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of

obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.G. Re-testing or re-inspection required because of non-conformance to specified

requirements shall be performed by same independent firm on instructions by Architect. Payment for re-testing or re-inspection will be charged to Contractor by deducting testingcharges from Contract Sum/Price.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Testing Laboratory Services 01460 - 1

H. Agency Responsibilities:1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in

performance of services.3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified

standards.4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract

Documents.5. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-

conformance of Work or products.6. Perform additional tests required by Architect.7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings.

I. Agency Reports: After each test, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and toContractor. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of test results. Includethe following:1. Date issued.2. Project title and number.3. Name of inspector.4. Date and time of sampling or inspection.5. Identification of product and specifications section.6. Location in Project.7. Type of inspection or test.8. Date of test.9. Results of tests.10. Conformance with Contract Documents.

J. Limits On Testing Authority:1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements

of Contract Documents.2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.3. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor.4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 Testing Laboratory Services 01460 - 2

SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Temporary Utilities:

1. Temporary electricity.2. Temporary lighting for construction purposes.3. Temporary ventilation and dehumidification..4. Temporary water service.5. Temporary sanitary facilities.

B. Construction Facilities: 1. Vehicular access.2. Parking.3. Progress cleaning and waste removal.

C. Temporary Controls:1. Barriers.2. Protection of the Work.3. Security.4. Enclosures.5. Mold control.6. Noise control.

D. Removal of utilities, facilities, and controls.

1.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITYA. Owner will pay for electrical service. Use measures to conserve energy where possible.B. Provide power outlets, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required for

construction operations. Provide flexible power cords as required for portableconstruction tools and equipment.

C. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.

1.3 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSESA. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve

minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq ft.B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark

for security purposes.C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft. lighting to interior work areas after dark for security

purposes.D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors,

pigtails, and lamps for specified lighting levels.E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.

1.4 TEMPORARY HEATINGA. Owner will pay cost of temporary heat. Exercise measures to conserve energy. Utilize

Owner's existing system. Supplement with temporary heat devices as needed to maintainspecified conditions for construction operations.

B. Provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille within 30 feet of dust producingoperations, and remove at end of construction.

1.5 TEMPORARY VENTILATION AND DEHUMIDIFICATIONA. Ventilate enclosed areas to achieve curing of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to

prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.B. Provide temporary units to maintain specified, required or recommended humidity levels

that have been tested and labeled by UL, FMG or another trade association.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Temporary Facilities 01500-1

1.6 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICEA. Owner will pay for water service.B. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded

connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing.

1.7 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIESA. Provide and maintain enclosed weathertight toilets and wash stations.

1. Provide complete sanitary wash stations including hand sanitizer.2. Clean and sanitize facilities trice a week.3. Existing facility use is not permitted. 4. Provide facilities at time of project mobilization.

B. COVID Requirements:1. All contractors working on campus must abide by CDC and PA-DOH, CMS and

OSHA guidelines.2. Testing will be by the Owner.3. Workers who have been vaccinated shall provide proof of vaccination to the

Owner for reporting to CMS (www.cms.gov).4. Non-vaccinated workers must be tested twice a week per CMS guidelines. Any

contractor who tests positive will not be permitted to work on site until they areable to provide a negative test.

5. The Owner will screen each worker in a designated area, and perform dailytemperature screening and symptom reporting prior to entering the facility.Contractors with a temperature deemed above the safe threshold will not bepermitted to enter the facility and are subject to additional testing in order to becleared to enter.

6. Contractors are required to wear a face mask at all times. Surgical masks andface shields are required when working in the G and H Wings.

7. Requirements are subject to change and will be reviewed at the preconstructionmeeting.

1.8 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDSA. Space in Wing “F” the Tower may be used for field offices and for storage.B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 10 people.

1.9 VEHICULAR ACCESSA. Provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles. Maintain 20 feet wide driveways with

turning space between and around combustible materials.B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants free of obstructions.C. Use designated existing roads for construction traffic.

1.10 PARKINGA. Use of designated existing on-site streets and driveways used for construction traffic is

permitted. B. Use of designated areas of existing parking facilities used by construction personnel is

permitted, as approved by Owner.

1.11 PROGRESS CLEANING AND WASTE REMOVALA. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in clean and

orderly condition.B. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue

cleaning to eliminate dust.C. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and

dispose off-site.D. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate

containers with lids.


http://www.cms.gov

1.12 ENCLOSURES A. Interior Enclosures:

1. Provide temporary partitions as indicated on Drawings to separate work areasfrom Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture intoOwner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials andequipment.

2. Construction: Framing and gypsum board materials with closed joints and sealededges at intersections with existing surfaces:a. 3 Inches of sound batt insulation.b. Maximum flame spread rating of 25 in accordance with ASTM E84.

3. Paint surfaces exposed to view from Owner occupied areas.

1.13 BARRIERSA. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to allow for Owner's

use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage fromconstruction operations.

B. Protect vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.

1.14 SECURITYA. Security Program

1. Protect Work existing premises from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry.2. Initiate program at project mobilization.3. Maintain program throughout construction period until Owner occupancy.

B. Entry Control:1. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site and existing facilities.2. Allow entrance only to authorized persons with proper identification.

C. Personnel Identification:1. Provide identification badge to each person authorized to enter premises.2. Badge To Include: Personal photograph, name and employer.3. Maintain list of accredited persons, submit copy to Owner on request.4. Require return of badges at expiration of their employment on the Project.

1.15 MOLD CONTROL A. Take necessary precautions to reduce conditions and sources that encourage the growth

and spread of mold spores. B. Keep materials dry during storage, and after installation. Wet materials delivered to the

site, that may be susceptible to mold growth are not to be accepted except upon writtenapproval of an independent testing laboratory.

C. Upon inspection, materials on site with active mold growth are to be removed from siteand replaced with new, dry materials. Encapsulation may be used when it is determinedthere is a satisfactorily documented remedy for the situation, and contractor has receivedprior approval from the Owner for the procedure.

D. When conditions warrant, provide desiccant dehumidification equipment to dry out thebuilding.

1.16 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLSA. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Final Application for

Payment inspection.B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore

permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.




END OF SECTION


SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Products.B. Product delivery requirements.C. Product storage and handling requirements.D. Product options.E. Product substitution procedures.

1.2 PRODUCTSA. Furnish products of qualified manufacturers suitable for intended use. Furnish products

of each type by single manufacturer unless specified otherwise.B. Furnish interchangeable components from same manufacturer for components being

replaced.

1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY REQUIREMENTSA. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure products comply with requirements, quantities are

correct, and products are undamaged.C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage.

1.4 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTSA. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.B. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.C. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment

favorable to product.D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.E. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage

or protection.F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide

ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.G. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in well-drained area. Prevent mixing

with foreign matter.H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage.I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify

products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

1.5 PRODUCT OPTIONSA. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting

those standards or description.B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: products of one of

manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with Provision for

Substitutions: Submit request for substitution for any manufacturer not named inaccordance with the following article.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Product Requirements 01600 - 1

1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONSA. Listed Manufacturers:

1. Manufacturers listed in a product or system specification are those manufacturersconsidered capable of manufacturing products conforming to the specificationrequirements.

2. The "listing" of a manufacturer does not imply "acceptance" or "approval" of anystandard product of that manufacturer.

3. Products offered by listed manufacturers shall be equal to or superior in allrespects to specified or named products and shall meet or exceed specificationrequirements.

4. The description of specific qualities takes precedence over the referencestandards and the description of qualities and reference standards together takeprecedence over the named product of listed manufacturers.

B. Product Options:1. Products specified only by Reference Standards or by Description only: any

product meeting those standards or descriptions, by any manufacturer.2. Products specified by naming several products or manufacturers: any product

and manufacturer named.3. Products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer: no option,

unless a substitution is accepted. Submit a request for substitution for anyproduct or manufacturer not specifically named.

4. Products specified by Description, Reference Standard and naming severalproducts or manufacturers: Any product and manufacturer named meeting thosedescriptions and standards. Submit a request for substitution for any product ormanufacturer not specifically named.

C. Limitations on Substitutions:1. During Bidding period, Instructions to Bidders govern times for submitting

requests for substitutions under requirements specified in this Section.2. Within 30 days after date of Contract, Architect will consider written requests from

Contractor for substitutions of products in place of those specified. Subsequentrequests will be considered only in case of product unavailability or otherconditions beyond control of Contractor, such as strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy, ordiscontinued production.

3. Substitutions will not be considered when indicated or implied on shop drawingsor product data submittals without separate formal request, when requesteddirectly by subcontractor or supplier, or when acceptance will require substantialrevision of Contract Documents.

4. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance.5. Only one request for substitution for each product will be considered. If

substitution is not accepted, Contractor shall provide specified product.6. Architect will determine acceptability of substitutions.

D. Requests for Substitutions: 1. Submit separate requests for each substitution on Substitution Request form

following this Section. 2. Incomplete forms will be returned.3. Give cost data comparing proposed substitution with specified product, and

amount of net change to Contract Sum.E. Contractor's Representation: Request for substitution constitutes a representation that

Contractor:1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it is equal to or superior

in all respects to specified product, or that the cost reduction offered is amplejustification for accepting the offered substitution.

2. Will provide same warranties for substitution as for product specified.3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, and make such

other changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects.4. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, related to

substitution which subsequently becomes apparent.


1.7 SUBSTITUTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURESA. During the bidding period, substitutions will not be considered.B. Immediately after award of Contract, Contractor shall submit substitution requests in

writing to Architect for review. Architect will notify Contractor of decision to accept or rejectrequested substitutions.

C. Submit PDF copy of each request for substitution on form following this Section.D. Architect will review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.E. For accepted products, submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples in

accordance with Section 01330.



END OF SECTION


SUBSTITUTION REQUESTPROJECT: Claremont Nursing Home PROJECT NO.: 18114.01

TO (ARCHITECT): FROM (CONTRACTOR):Noelker and Hull Associates, Inc. _________________________________30 West King Street _________________________________Chambersburg, PA 17201 _________________________________

CONTRACTOR HEREBY REQUESTS ACCEPTANCE OF THE FOLLOWING PRODUCT OR SYSTEMS AS ASUBSTITUTION IN ACCORD WITH PROVISIONS OF DIVISION ONE OF SPECIFICATIONS:

1. SPECIFIED PRODUCT OR SYSTEM:Substitution request for (Generic Description):

Specification Section No. Article(s) Para.(s)

2. SUPPORTING DATA:~ Product data for proposed substitution is attached (description of product, reference standards,

performance and test data).

~ Sample is attached

~ Sample will be sent if requested

3. QUALITY COMPARISON:

SPECIFIED PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONName, brand:Catalog No.:Manufacturer:Vendor:Significantvariations:

Maintenance Service Available: Yes No

4. PREVIOUS INSTALLATIONS:Identification of similar projects on which proposed substitution was used: (Attach list)Project: Architect: Address: Owner:

Date Installed:

5. REASON FOR NON-AVAILABILITY OF SPECIFIED ITEM:Attach affidavit, certification or other data as proof of non-availability.~ Strikes ~ Discontinuance of production~ Lockouts ~ Proven shortage~ Bankruptcy ~ Similar occurrences (explain below)

6. EFFECT OF SUBSTITUTION:Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: ~ No ~ Yes (If yes, explain)

Proj. No. 18144.01 Substitution Request 01601-1

Substitution changes Contract Time: ~ No ~ Yes Add/Deduct days.

Substitution requires dimensional revision or redesign of structure or M & E Work:

~ No ~ Yes (If yes, attach complete data.)

Saving or credit to Owner, if any, for accepting substitution: $ .

7. CONTRACTOR'S STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE OF PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION TO CONTRACTREQUIREMENT:I/we have investigated the proposed substitution. I/we:

! believe that it is equal or superior in all respects to specified product, except as stated above; ! will provide the same warranty as specified for specified product; ! have included complete cost data and implications of the substitution; ! will pay redesign and special inspection costs caused by the use of this product; ! will pay additional costs to other contractors caused by the substitution;! will coordinate the incorporation of the proposed substitution in the Work;! will modify other parts of the Work as may be needed, to make all parts of the Work complete and

functioning; ! waive future claims for added cost to Contract caused by the substitution.

Contractor: Date:

By:

Answer all questions and complete all blanks - use "NA" if not applicable.

ARCHITECT'S REVIEW AND ACTION:

~ Resubmit substitution request:~ Provide more information in following categories:

~ Sign Contractor's Statement of Conformance.

~ Submit proof of non-availabilitly.

~ Substitution is accepted.

~ Substitution is accepted, with the following comments:

~ Substitution not accepted.

Noelker and Hull Associates, Inc. Date

Proj. No. 18144.01 Substitution Request 01601-2

SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Closeout procedures.B. Final cleaning.C. Starting of systems.D. Demonstration and instructions.E. Testing, adjusting and balancing.F. Protecting installed construction.G. Project record documents.H. Operation and maintenance data.I. Manual for materials and finishes.J. Manual for equipment and systems.K. Spare parts and maintenance products.L. Product warranties and product bonds.M. Maintenance service.N. Refer to Section 01120 - Multiple Contract Summary for responsibilities.

1.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURESA. Each Prime Contractor shall submit written certification that Contract Documents have

been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance withContract Documents and ready for Architect's review.

B. Provide submittals to Owner required by authorities having jurisdiction.C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous

payments, and sum remaining due.

1.3 FINAL CLEANINGA. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels,

stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpetedand soft surfaces.

C. Clean equipment and fixtures to sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate tosurface and material being cleaned.

D. Replace filters of operating equipment.E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from site.

1.4 STARTING OF SYSTEMSA. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.B. Notify Architect seven days prior to start-up of each item.C. Verify each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive

rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage.D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those

required by equipment or system manufacturer.E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractors' personnel in accordance

with manufacturers' instructions.G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide

authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipmentor system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system inoperation.

H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01300 that equipment or system hasbeen properly installed and is functioning correctly.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Execution Requirements 01700 - 1

1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONSA. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks

prior to date of Substantial Completion.B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other

season within six months.C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of

manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation andmaintenance.

D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing,maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed time at equipmentlocation.

E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need foradditional data becomes apparent during instruction.

F. Required instruction time for each item of equipment and system is specified in individualsections.

1.6 PROTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTIONA. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual

specification sections.B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in

immediate work area to prevent damage.C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or

movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. When traffic or activity is

necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing materialmanufacturer.

F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.

1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTSA. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the

Work:1. Drawings.2. Specifications.3. Addenda.4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.D. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly.E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual

products installed, including the following:1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actualconstruction including:1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and

appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.4. Field changes of dimension and detail.5. Details not on original Contract drawings.

G. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment.


1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATAA. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch (A4) text pages, three D side ring binders with

durable plastic covers.B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

INSTRUCTIONS", title of project.C. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as

described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.D. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger

drawings to size of text pages.E. Contents: Prepare Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system

description identified, typed on white paper, in three parts as follows:1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect,

Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and

subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names,addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify thefollowing:a. Significant design criteria.b. List of equipment.c. Parts list for each component.d. Operating instructions.e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.f. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning

methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimentalagents.

3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:a. Shop drawings and product data.b. Air and water balance reports.c. Certificates.d. Originals of warranties.

1.9 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHESA. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents

before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and

operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.C. Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. Draft copy to be

reviewed and returned with Architect comments. Revise content of document sets asrequired prior to final submission.

D. Submit two sets of revised final volumes in final form within 10 days after final inspection.E. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog

number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. F. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for

cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, andrecommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

G. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include product data listingapplicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Includerecommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.

H. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.I. Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for

insertion of data.

1.10 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMSA. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents

before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.B. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and

operated by Owner, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.


C. Submit one copy of completed volumes 15 days prior to final inspection. Draft copy bereviewed and returned with Architect comments. Revise content of document sets asrequired prior to final submission.

D. Submit two sets of revised final volumes in final form within 10 days after final inspection.E. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and

component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limitingconditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and completenomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

F. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, andcommunications; typed.

G. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.H. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating

instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, andemergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and special operating instructions.

I. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventativemaintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; andalignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

J. Include servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.K. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.L. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.M. Include original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams

required for maintenance.N. Include control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.O. Include Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed.P. Include charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to

flow and control diagrams.Q. Include list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended

quantities to be maintained in storage.R. Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01400.S. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.T. Include listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for

insertion of data.

1.11 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTSA. Furnish spare parts, maintenance, and extra products in quantities specified in individual

specification sections.B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed by Owner; obtain receipt prior to

final payment.

1.12 PRODUCT WARRANTIES AND PRODUCT BONDSA. Obtain warranties and bonds executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors,

suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of applicable item of work. B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents and bonds from subcontractors,

suppliers, and manufacturers.C. Verify documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.D. Co-execute submittals when required.E. Include Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable plastic

cover.F. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.G. Time Of Submittals:

1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service duringconstruction with Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days afteracceptance.

2. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, priorto final Application for Payment.


3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of SubstantialCompletion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptanceas beginning of warranty or bond period.

1.13 MAINTENANCE SERVICEA. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.B. Examine system components at frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean,

adjust, and lubricate as required.C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or

replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by manufacturer of originalcomponent.

D. Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or Subcontractor without priorwritten consent of Owner.



END OF SECTION


SECTION 02225 - MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. Section includes removal of designated building equipment and fixtures; removal of

designated construction; dismantling, cutting and alterations for completion of the Work;disposal of materials; identification of utilities; salvaged items; and protection of items toremain as indicated on Drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALSA. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate demolition and removal sequence and location of salvageable

items; location and construction of temporary work.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for submittals.B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, and

subsurface obstructions.C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit description of system, inspection data, and

parts lists.

1.4 SCHEDULINGA. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for scheduling.B. Schedule Work to coincide with new construction.C. Describe demolition removal procedures and schedule.D. Perform noisy, work:

1. Between hours of 7 a.m. and 7 p.m.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas.B. Cease operations immediately when structure appears to be in danger and notify

Architect. Do not resume operations until directed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATIONA. Erect, and maintain temporary safeguards, including warning signs and lights, barricades,

and similar measures, for protection of the public, Owner, Contractor’s employees, andexisting improvements to remain.

B. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings.C. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to

permit continued Owner occupancy.D. Protect existing materials and existing improvements not indicated to be demolished.E. Prevent movement of structure; provide temporary bracing and shoring required to ensure

safety of existing structure.F. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements.G. Mark location and termination of utilities.H. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Minor Demolition for Remodeling 02225 - 1

3.2 DEMOLITIONA. Disconnect and remove designated utilities within demolition areas.B. Demolish in orderly and careful manner. Protect existing improvements, and supporting

structural members to remain.C. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do

not burn or bury materials on site.D. Remove materials as Work progresses. Upon completion of Work, leave areas in clean

condition.E. Remove temporary Work.

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 Minor Demolition for Remodeling 02225 - 2

SECTION 07810 - SPRAYED FIREPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:A. Sprayed-on cementitious fireproofing for patching and repairing existing fireproofing.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:A. Gypsum drywall fireproofing - Section 09260.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:A. Applicator: Acceptable to manufacturer of fireproofing materials.B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.: Products, execution and thickness shall conformto approved UL Designs as published in UL Fire Resistance Directory, unlessotherwise specified. Fire resistance designs for floor and roof beams (other thanprimary structural frame) shall be assembly designs approved for each scheduleddeck construction. Sprayed fireproofing designs shall be as tested and certifiedto attain specified fire resistance ratings in accordance with ASTM E119.

2. Local Building Code: Conform to governing code authorities requirements for fireresistance ratings.

C. Fire Resistance Rating Schedule: Refer to Drawings for rating requirements.

1.4 REFERENCES:A. ASTM E84 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.B. ASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.C. ASTM E605 - Thickness and Density of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material Applied to

Structural Members.D. ASTM E736 - Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to

Structural Members.E. ASTM E759 - Effect of Deflection on Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to

Structural Members.F. ASTM E760 - Impact on Bonding of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural

Members.G. ASTM E761 - Compressive Strength of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to

Structural Members.H. ASTM E859 - Air Erosion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural

Members.I. ASTM E937 - Corrosion of Steel by Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural

Members.J. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:A. Fire rating designs and fireproofing products are limited to cementitious type fireproofing.

Mineral fiber based fireproofing and fireproofing containing asbestos are not acceptable.

1.6 SUBMITTALS:A. Procedures for Submittals: Section 01330.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets for each product furnished.C. Fireproofing Design: Submit copies of each UL Design selected for each required fire

resistance rating.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Sprayed Fireproofing 07810-1

D. Quality Control Submittals (For Information Only):1. Certificates:

a. Applicator: Furnish applicator's notorized certification that each ULDesign selected will provide the scheduled fire resistance rating inaccordance with UL requirements.

b. Manufacturer: Furnish manufacturer's certification or independent testreports confirming that materials meet or exceed specificationrequirements.

2. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Refer to Section 01600.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:A. Deliver materials in original unopened packages bearing name of manufacturer, product

identification, and Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. label.B. Store under cover in dry area off ground. Discard materials that are exposed to water

before actual use.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS:A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply fireproofing when temperature of substrate

material is below 40EF. and surrounding air temperature is below 40EF.B. Protection:

1. Provide ventilation in area to receive fireproofing.2. Provide temporary enclosures to prevent spray from contaminating air or adjacent

property.3. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fall-out and

dusting-off of fireproofing.4. Close off and seal ductwork in areas where fireproofing is being applied.5. Protect applied sprayed fireproofing from damage.

C. Coordination: Coordinate installation with other work to avoid cutting and patching ofinstalled fireproofing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING:A. Qualities: Lightweight aggregate or other binder, mill-mixed, free of asbestos, or other

finely divided particulate matter that can be released as an airborne health hazard duringor after application, requiring only addition of water at job site.1. Dry Density: Minimum of 14 or 17 pcf with average minimum density of 15 or

17.5 pcf, ASTM E605.2. Deflection: No cracking or delaminating of material when tested in accordance

with ASTM E759.3. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion or bond failure when tested in

accordance with ASTM E937.4. Bond Strength: 200 psf minimum, applied over uncoated or galvanized steel,

ASTM E736.5. Air Erosion: Maximum allowable weight loss of material not more than 0.025 gm

per sq. ft. when tested in accordance with ASTM E859.6. Impact Resistance: No cracking or delaminating of material when tested in

accordance with ASTM E760.7. Compression: Not more than 10 percent deformation in material when subjected

to 500 psf compressive forces in accordance with ASTM E761.8. Fire Hazard Rating - ASTM E84:

Flame spread: 10 maximumSmoke developed: 0 maximum

B. Source:1. Mono-Kote by W.R. Grace.2. Cafco 300 by Isolatek International Corp.


3. Pyrolite 15 by Carboline.4. Type 5 by Southwest Vermiculite Co., Inc.

2.2 RELATED MATERIALS:A. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended bonding adhesive.B. Water: Clean, potable.C. Non-Metallic Mesh: Listed in approved UL Design.D. Metal Lath: Listed in approved UL Design.

2.3 MIXING:A. Mix materials with clean, potable water as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION:A. Verify that surfaces to receive fireproofing are free of oil, grease, dirt, loose paint, mill

scale or other matter that would impair bond. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.B. Test painted steel surfaces to verify that paint will not impair bond.C. Verify completion of preparatory work that is to be covered by fireproofing, including clips,

hangers and other attachments.D. Verify that ducts, piping, equipment or other items which would interfere with application

of fireproofing are not positioned until fireproofing application is completed.

3.2 APPLICATION:A. Apply fireproofing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation to comply with fire

rating requirements and approved fire resistance designs.B. Apply bonding adhesive prior to application of fireproofing, where required by approved

fire resistance designs and where required to achieve specified bond strength.C. Spray apply with as many coats as necessary to obtain required thickness and uniform

density.D. Completely cover members scheduled to be fireproofed.E. Completely fill areas between fluted steel deck and beam top flange with fireproofing.

3.3 PATCHING:A. Examine members for complete coverage, correct unacceptable work and patch.B. Patch areas damaged or cut by subsequent work.C. Replace areas where excessive shrinkage or cracking is evident.

3.4 CLEANING:A. Remove equipment and thoroughly clean wall and floor surfaces of overspray deposits of

fireproofing materials.

3.5 TESTING SPRAYED FIREPROOFING:A. Section 01460 - Testing Laboratory Services.B. Verify that applied thickness, density and bond strength of sprayed fireproofing meets fire

rating requirements of approved designs.C. Verify that installation meets fire rating requirements of approved designs.D. Inspect and test for thickness as follows:

1. Test 25% of structural frame columns and beams in each building level.2. Test 10% of beams other than structural frame in each building level.

E. Inspect and test for density on beams, one of each test for beams for each 10,000 s.f. ofbuilding area.

F. Inspection and test procedures in accordance with ASTM E605 and E736.

End of Section


SECTION 07840 - FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. Section Includes:

1. Firestopping penetrations through fire-rated walls and partitions.2. Firestopping openings between tops of fire-rated partitions and floor or roof slabs.

B. Related sections:1. Section 09260 - Gypsum Drywall Systems.

1.2 REFERENCESA. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.B. ASTM E136 - Non-combustibility of Elementary Materials.C. ASTM E814 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.D. FS HH-1-521F - Insulation Blankets, Thermal.E. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.F. UL Building Materials Directory - Through-Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ),

Through-Penetration Firestop Devices (XHCR) and Fill, Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW).

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONA. Design Criteria - Firestopping System:

1. Capable of providing required fire resistance rating.2. Expanding type materials that fill cavities or adhere to substrate and that will

maintain seal under normal expected movements of substrates.3. Materials which exhibit shrinkage, cracking, spalling or signs of visible

degradation of the firestop seal will not be acceptable.

1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Procedures for Submittals: Section 01330.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive product data sheets for each product.C. Quality Control Submittals (For Information Only):

1. Test Reports: Submit 2 copies of certified test reports of firestopping applicationto substrate materials similar to project conditions and test reports from anindependent testing agency of each product proposed for use, which indicatesconformance to ASTM E814.

2. Certificates: Submit applicator's certification that firestopping has beencompleted in accordance with code requirements to provide necessary fireresistance ratings.

3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit installation instructions for applying productsin accordance with Section 01600.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Regulatory Requirements:

1. UL Classification: Firestopping products currently classified with UL as "Fill, Voidor Cavity Materials", "Through Penetration Firestop Devices" and "Through Pene-tration Firestop Systems."

2. Fire Tests: Tested in accordance with ASTM E814 and UL1479.B. Fire Resistance Rating: Same as partition, wall, floor or roof being penetrated.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Deliver materials in original, tightly sealed containers or unopened packages, with labels

intact and with legible mixing and application instructions.

B. Store materials out of the weather in original containers, at temperatures as

Proj. No. 18144.01 Firestopping 07840-1

recommended by manufacturer.C. When using firestopping foam, store unmixed liquid components in their original,

unopened containers at a temperature between 65 and 80EF. for 12 hours before use.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTSA. Do not apply sealants or foams when temperature of substrate material and surrounding

air is below 40EF.B. Maintain sealant at a minimum 70EF. for best workability.C. Do not apply firestop mortar if ambient temperature or substrate temperature is below

40EF. during installation, or is anticipated to be below 40EF. during the first 24 hours afterinstallation.

D. Use forced air ventilation when installing foam if areas of installation have less than 2cubic feet of free air for each pound of liquid mixture being foamed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE SAFING INSULATIONA. Qualities: Mineral fiber safing insulation, 4 pcf density, 4 in. thick. (deep).

1. Fire Hazard Classification: 15/0/0, ASTM E84.2. Combustibility: Non-combustible, ASTM E136.

B. Standard: FS HH-I-521F, Type 1, Class A.C. Source: Thermafiber Safing Insulation by U.S. Gypsum Co.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING SEALANTA. Qualities: Single component silicone penetration sealant or intumescent elastomer

sealant capable of bonding to most common construction materials.1. UL Classification: Fill, void or cavity material for use in through-penetration

firestop systems.B. Source:

1. Fire Stop Sealant by Dow Corning.2. Fire Barrier Caulk CP-25 by 3M.3. Biotherm Firestop Sealant by Bio Fireshield, Inc.

2.3 FIRESTOPPING PUTTYA. Qualities: One component ceramic fiber base putty or intumescent elastomer putty.

1. UL Classification: Fill, void, or cavity materials for use in through-penetrationfirestop systems.

B. Source:1. Fiberfrax Fyre Putty by Sohio-Carborundum Co.2. Fire Barrier Putty 303 by 3M.3. Bio RS90P Mastic by Bio Fireshield, Inc.

2.4 FIRESTOPPING FOAMA. Qualities: Two-component foamed silicone elastomer, 14-18 pcf free foam density.

1. UL Classification: Fill, void, or cavity material for use in through-penetrationfirestop systems.

B. Source: Fire Stop Foam, liquid components Part A (black) and Part B (off-white) by DowCorning Corp.


2.5 COMPOSITE SHEETA. Qualities: One-part composite fire barrier sheet comprised of 28 ga. galv. steel face

sheet, intumescent elastomer core, and hexagonal shaped steel wire mesh covered withaluminum foil.1. UL Classification: Fill, void, or cavity material for use in through-penetration

firestop systems.B. Source: Fire Barrier Composite Sheet CS-195 by 3M.

2.6 FIRESTOPPING MORTARA. Qualities: Non-asbestos Portland Cement fly ash through-penetration firestop mortar.

1. UL Classification: Fill, void, or cavity material for use in through-penetrationfirestop systems.

B. Source:1. K10 Firestop Mortar by Bio Fireshield, Inc.2. K2 Firestop Mortar by Bio Fireshield, Inc.

2.7 FIRESTOPPING SLEEVEA. Qualities: Asbestos free, prefabricated device, consisting of steel casings lined on the

inside with intumescent material, used to firestop plastic pipe through-penetrations.1. UL Classification: Through-penetration firestop devices.

B. Source: Bio Firestop Sleeve by Bio Fireshield, Inc.

2.8 RELATED MATERIALSA. Safing Clips: Thermafiber galvanized steel safing impaling clip by USG.B. Damming Materials: Alumina silicate fire board, mineral fiberboard, mineral fiber matting,

mineral fiber putty, or mineral wool.C. Sleeves: Galvanized sheet steel.D. Backer Rod: Open cell urethane foam.

2.9 MIXES - FOAMA. If ambient temperature is not between 65 and 80EF., adjust temperature of Part A and

Part B liquid components to obtain a snap time between 1 and 2 minutes when mixed.B. Stir Part A and Part B in their original containers until settled fillers or pigments are

thoroughly dispersed.C. Combine and mix Part A and Part B in accordance with mixing instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Verify that surfaces of openings are sound, clean, dry, and ready to receive application of

firestopping.B. Verify that penetration elements are securely fixed and properly located to comply with

minimum and maximum annular space allowable between penetration elements andadjacent substrate.

C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Clean contact surfaces free of dirt, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may

affect bond of firestopping.B. Remove incompatible materials which affect bond, by scraping, brushing, scrubbing, or

sand blasting.C. Confirm compatibility of surfaces to receive firestopping materials.

3.3 GENERAL APPLICATIONA. Apply fire safing and firestopping materials in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations to comply with fire rating requirements.


B. Use fire safing insulation and sealant for firestopping periphery of fire-rated partitions andwalls.

C. Use foam, sealant, putty or sleeves for firestopping small, simple penetrations of walls,partitions and floors.

D. Use foam, composite sheet or mortar for fire-stopping large floor openings with multiplepipes or cables passing through floor.

3.4 APPLICATION - FIRE SAFING INSULATIONA. Partition Periphery: Install safing insulation in openings between periphery of fire rated

partitions and structural elements. Friction fit safing insulation, completely fillingopenings, including deck flutes.

3.5 APPLICATION - SEALANT AND PUTTYA. Apply sealant and putty in sufficient thickness to achieve required rating.B. Pack material solidly around penetrations; fill openings to depth required for each fire

rating.

3.6 APPLICATION - FIRESTOPPING FOAMA. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions for damming penetration.B. Seal gaps or cracks left after damming materials are in place.C. Immediately after mixing, dispense liquid foam into penetration opening in accordance

with manufacturer's installation instructions.D. Do not fill penetration opening more than one-third full; foam expands 3 to 4 times its

original volume during cure.E. When dispensing continuously, do not exceed measured snap time or a maximum of 3

minutes, whichever is less.F. If opening is not filled when shot reaches measured snap time or a maximum of 3

minutes, stop application for at least 15 minutes to allow foam to set.G. Repeat injection-and-cure procedure until opening is filled, allowing 15 minutes between

application of each shot.H. Leave dam in place for 24 hours to allow foam to fully cure.

3.7 APPLICATION - COMPOSITE SHEETA. Install composite sheet overlapping opening a minimum of 2 in. on each side and with

steel face sheet exposed. Secure sheet to opening with 1/4 in. diameter expansion boltsat 8 in. o.c.

B. Seal perimeter of cover sheet with firestopping sealant.C. Seal penetrations with firestopping wrap/strips and sealant.

3.8 APPLICATION - FIRESTOPPING MORTARA. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions for damming penetration.B. Pump or hand apply mortar around penetrations; fill openings to depth required for each

fire rating.

3.9 APPLICATION - FIRESTOPPING SLEEVEA. Prior to installing sleeve, apply firestopping sealant to fill voids in the annular space

between the penetration and the substrate.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Perform quality control check at least once daily and upon changing to new lot of material.


B. Inspect cured penetration seals after 24-hour cure by removing damming materials toexamine seal.

C. Cured firestopping shall completely fill penetration. Fill remaining gaps with additionalfirestopping.

D. Reinspect after added material has cured 24 hours.E. Replace damming materials required to achieve a fire rating.F. Correct other unacceptable firestopping work and provide further inspection to verify

compliance with requirements.

3.11 CLEANINGA. Remove excess material, droppings, and debris.B. Remove sealant, putty and foam from materials and surfaces not specifically required to

be sealed.

3.12 PROTECTIONA. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage.B. Protect applied firestopping from damage.

End of Section


SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces.B. Sealant and backing.

1.2 SUBMITTALSA. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01330.B. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria,

limitations, color availability and application instructions.C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01330.D. Submit two samples 1/4 inch diameter x 4 inches in size illustrating color selections

available.E. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01400 that products meet or

exceed specified requirements.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

Section with minimum 3 years documented experience.B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum 3

years documented experience and approved by sealant manufacturer.C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and

installation.

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTSA. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and

after installation.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULINGA. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section.

1.6 WARRANTYA. Provide three year warranty under provisions of Section 01700.B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air

tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGEA. Deliver materials in unopened containers as packaged by manufacturer. Store in a

manner to protect materials from weather.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERSA. Pecora Chemical Corp.B. Tremco Manufacturing Co.C. Sonneborn Division of ContechD. General Electric Silicone Products Division.E. Dow Corning Corp.F. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Joint Sealers 07900-1

2.2 MATERIALSA. Polyurethane (Type 1 Sealant):

1. One-part conforming to FS TT-S-00227E, Class A, Type I (self-leveling) andASTM-920.

2. Color: As selected by Architect.3. Acceptable products

a. Urexpan NR-210, Pecora.b. Sonolastic SL-1, Sonneborn.

B. Silicone, Paintable (Type 2 Sealant):1. One-part silicone rubber sealant for interior use.2. Acceptable product: Silicone Rubber Sealant, Paintable Dow Corning.

C. Acrylic Latex (Type 3 Sealant):1. One-part, non-sag acrylic latex, meeting requirements of ASTM C834.2. Acceptable products

a. AC-20, Pecora.b. Sonolac, Sonneborn-Contech, Inc.c. Acrylic Latex 834 Caulk, Tremco.

2.3 ACCESSORIESA. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant

manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.B. Joint Backing: ANSI/ASTM D1056 and D1565 round. In vertical joints use closed cell

polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. In horizontaljoints, use solid neoprene or butyl rubber, Shore A hardness of 70.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements

are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer.B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrate.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. Clean joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants, C790

for latex base sealants, C919 for acoustical applications, and C962 for elastomericsealants.

E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.

3.3 INSTALLATIONA. Install sealants in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.C. Install joint backing (if required) to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint

width.D. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult

manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.F. Tool joints concave. Sealant shall achieve a firm skin before surface coating is applied.G. On fire retardant putty and foam, install in such a manner as to maintain hourly rating of

element which is being penetrated.

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRINGA. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700.B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.


3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORKA. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500.B. Protect sealants until cured.

3.6 SCHEDULE

SEALANTTYPE APPLICATION

1 Horizontal control and expansion joints in concrete flooring andpedestrian paving and at junctures between these materials and otheradjacent materials.

2 General caulking as part of interior painting in joints subject to movement.

3 General caulking as part of interior painting.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 08110 - STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. Section includes non-rated, fire rated steel doors, and door frames, sidelites, and vision

glass.B. Related Sections:

1. Section 08212 - Flush Wood Doors.2. Section 08710 - Door Hardware.3. Section 08800 - Glazing.4. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting of doors.

1.2 REFERENCESA. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated by the

Hot-Dip Process.B. ASTM C236 - Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies

by Means of a Guarded Hot-Box.C. ASTM E152 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.D. DHI (Door Hardware Institute) - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel

Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.E. HMMA 810 (Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association)- Hollow Metal Doors.F. NFPA 80 (National Fire Protection Association) - Fire Doors and Windows.G. NFPA 252 (National Fire Protection Association) - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.H. SDI-100 (Steel Door Institute) - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.I. SDI-108 (Steel Door Institute) - Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Standard

Steel Doors.J. UL 10B (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate door and frame elevations, internal reinforcement, closure

method, and cut-outs for glazing, louvers, and finishes. Indicate frame reinforcement,anchor types and spacing, location of cut-outs for hardware, and finish.

C. Product Data: Submit door and frame configurations, location of cut-outs for hardwarereinforcement.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special installation instructions.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform Work in accordance with SDI-100.B. Fire Rated Door and Frame Construction: Conform to UL 10B.C. Installed Door and frame Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as

scheduled.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONSA. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section

with minimum three years experience.B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years

experience.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing,

and protecting products.B. Accept door and frames on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.C. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Standard Steel Doors and Frames 08110 - 1

1.7 COORDINATIONA. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.B. Coordinate Work with door opening construction, door frame, and door hardware

installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMESA. Manufacturers:

1. Amweld Building Products, Inc.2. Ceco Door Products3. Kewanee Corp. 4. Pioneer Industries 5. Republic Builders Products 6. Steelcraft 7. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description:1. Exterior Doors (Thermally Insulated): SDI-100, 1-3/4 inch thick. Grade III - Extra

Heavy Duty, Model 1, 16 ga., full flush design.2. Exterior Frames : Grade III for Door Model 1a, nominal 14 gage inch thick

material, base metal thickness.3. Interior Doors (Non-Rated and Fire Rated): SDI-100, 1-3/4 inch thick. Grade II -

Heavy Duty, Model 1, 18 ga. full flush and embossed design.4. Interior Frames: Grade III for Door Model 1, nominal 16 gage thick material, base

metal thickness, fully welded. Provide 2 in. head except where 4" is required formasonry walls.

2.2 COMPONENTSA. Face: Steel sheet in accordance with SDI-100.B. End Closure: Channel, 0.04 inches thick, flush.C. Core: Cardboard honeycomb.D. Thermal Insulated Door: Total insulation R-Value of 4, measured in accordance with

ASTM C236.

2.3 ACCESSORIESA. Removable Stops: Rolled steel, channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for

countersink style screws.B. Bituminous Coating: Non-asbestos fibered asphalt emulsion.C. Primer: Zinc chromate type.D. Silencers: Resilient rubber set in steel channel, fitted into drilled hole.E. Weatherstripping: Specified in Section 08710.

2.4 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate door and frames with hardware reinforcement welded in place. B. Attach astragal to inactive leaf of pairs of fire rated doors.C. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated door and frame.D. Configure exterior doors with edge profile to receive recessed weatherstripping.E. Fabricate frames as welded unit.F. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar

guard boxes.G. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into

frame head, flush with top.H. Prepare frames for silencers. Provide three single silencers for single doors and mullions

of double doors on strike side. Provide two single silencers on frame head at doubledoors without mullions.

I. Configure exterior frames with special profile to receive recessed weatherstripping.


J. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with 4 inch head member, unless notedotherwise.

2.5 FINISHINGA. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A653 G60.B. Primer: Baked.C. Finish: Field finish in accordance with the requirements of Section 09900.D. Coat inside of frame profile with bituminous coating to minimum thickness of 1/16 inch.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before

starting work.B. Verify opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Install door and frames in accordance with SDI-100 and DHI.B. Coordinate with masonry, and gypsum board wall construction for anchor placement.C. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing specified in Section 08800.D. Coordinate installation of frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 08710

and doors.E. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to

structure and floor.F. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing specified in Section 08800.G. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of hardware specified in Section 08710.H. Touch-up damaged shop finishes.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCESA. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.4 ADJUSTINGA. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for adjusting.B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 08212 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. Section includes standard wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non-rated.B. Related Sections:

1. Section 08110 - Standard Steel Frames.2. Section 08710 - Door Hardware.3. Section 08800 - Glazing.4. Section 09900 - Painting: Field finishing doors.

1.2 REFERENCESA. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.B. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation Class.C. AWI (Architectural Woodwork Institute) - Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork

Institute.D. HPMA HP (Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Association formerly HPMA) - Hardwood and

Decorative Plywood.E. NFPA 80 (National Fire Protection Association) - Fire Doors and Windows.F. NFPA 252 (National Fire Protection Association) - Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door

Assemblies.G. UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) - Building Materials Directory.H. UL 10B (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.I. WH (Warnock Hersey) - Directory of Listed Products.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings,

undercuts required, special blocking for hardware, factory finishing criteria, identifycutouts for glazing.

C. Product Data: Submit information on door core materials and construction, and onveneer species, finish, and characteristics.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform Work in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 1300, Custom Grade. B. Finish doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 1500, Custom Grade.C. Fire Door Construction: Conform to UL 10B.D. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as

scheduled.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONSA. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section

with minimum three years experience.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.B. Protect doors with resilient packaging. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas

where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges when stored more thanone week.1. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.7 COORDINATIONA. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.B. Coordinate Work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware

installation.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Flush Wood Doors 08212 - 1

1.8 WARRANTYA. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation

tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.C. Furnish manufacturer’s “Life of Installation” warranty for interior solid core doors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORSA. Manufacturers:

1. Eggers Industries2. VT Industries.3. Marshfield Doors.4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Product Description: 1. Solid core flush wood doors; stain grade white maple veneer material; fire rated

and non-rated types; flush glazed design; factory pre-fit; factory finished. 2. Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 and 1-3/8 inches thick; solid core, five ply

construction, fire rated and non-rated, primed finish.

2.2 COMPONENTSA. Solid Core, Non-Rated: AWI Section 1300, Type PC - Particleboard.B. Solid Core, Fire Rated: AWI Section 1300, Type FD 1-1/2 mineral core.C. Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.

2.3 ACCESSORIESA. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing. Wood with metal clips for rated

doors, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style screws.

2.4 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate non-rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements.B. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards and to Warnock

Hersey requirements. Attach fire rating label to door.C. Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with UL 10C positive pressure standards for

Category “A” doors. Conceal intumescent seals into door edge.D. Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at

face edge, specifically for double doors.E. Furnish lock blocks at lock edge and for hardware reinforcement.F. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Match face material.G. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.H. Bond edge banding to cores.I. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and

dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. J. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.K. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI 1300.

2.5 SHOP FINISHINGA. Factory finish doors.B. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Custom.2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System

5, conversion varnish.3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.4. Sheen: Satin.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.B. Verify opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size

or alignment.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Install fire rated and non-rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standard, NFPA 80,

and to requirements for fire rating label by UL.B. Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges.C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to maximum of 3/4 inch.

1. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire ratingrequirements.

D. Machine cut doors for hardware installation.E. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08110 and

hardware specified in Section 08710.F. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing specified in Section 08800.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCESA. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.B. Conform to AWI requirements for fit and clearance tolerances.C. Conform to AWI Section 1300 requirements for maximum diagonal distortion.

3.4 ADJUSTINGA. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.C. Adjust closer for full closure.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:A. Finish hardware for doors.B. Hardware schedule.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:A. Metal Door Frames - Section 08110.B. Flush Wood Doors - Section 08212.

1.3 REFERENCES:A. NBHA - Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware - 1975.B. NBHA - Basic Builders Hardware - October 1969.C. BHMA Product Standards, latest editions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:A. Schedules: Submit detailed finish hardware schedule in accordance with Section 01330.

Schedule shall be complete, including type, manufacturer's name and number, and finishof each item required. Include complete schedule of keying system.

B. Templates: Furnish templates required for fabrication of hollow metal frames, wooddoors, or other items related to hardware.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Local and State Building Codes.2. Americans with Disabilities Act.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:A. Package and deliver hardware items separately and mark each to correspond with

heading numbers on hardware schedule.

1.7 COORDINATION:A. Review Shop Drawings of related work and verify that scheduled finish hardware is

suitable for each related item of work.B. Deliver templates and finish hardware to pressed fiber wood door supplier for fitting.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:A. Lock Manufacturer:

1. Schlage Hardware.2. Substitutions: Not allowed.

B. Closer Manufacturer: 1. LCN Closers.2. Rixson-Firemark, Inc.

C. Manufacturers of Other Items:1. Butts: Hager Hinge Co., McKinney Mfg. Co., or Stanley Hardware.2. Stops: Trimco or Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS:A. Butts:

1. Full mortise template hinges, 5-knuckle type, plain-bearing except at doors withclosers or doors over 40 in. width furnish ball-bearing type.

2. Furnish quantity of hinges per door as follows:Doors up to 90 in. height - 3 butts.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Door Hardware 08710 - 1

3. Furnish hinge sizes as follows for 1-3/4 in. doors:a. Up to 3'-0" wide - 4-1/2 x 4-1/2.b. Over 3'-0" to 3'-4" wide - 5 x 4-1/2.c. Width of hinges adjusted as required to clear adjacent trim.

B. Latchsets: Schlage “ND” Series cylindrical latchsets, Sparta lever design, function aslisted on schedule (function identification numbers of BHMA-PS).

C. Exit Device: Von Duprin 33A fire rated, concealed vertical rod device, exit only function.D. Door Closer: LCN 4110 Series closers, sized as required.E. Interior Stops: Furnish wall-type dome stop where doors strike masonry walls; furnish a

floor-type dome stop at other locations. F. Silencers: Quality No. 1337-A. Furnish 3 per single door, 2 per pairs of doors.

2.3 FINISHES:A. Butts: BHMA 626. B. Locksets and Related Trim: BHMA 626.C. Closers: Enamel to match.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:A. Examine door frames and related items for conditions that would prevent proper

application of finish hardware.B. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION:A. Securely install finish hardware items in accordance with approved schedule and

templates furnished with hardware.B. Install mortised items flush with adjacent surfaces.C. Install locksets, closers and trim after finish painting.D. Locate items in accordance with NBHA "Recommended Locations for Builder's

Hardware", unless otherwise noted.E. Test and adjust hardware for quiet, smooth operation, free of sticking, binding or rattling.

Adjust closers for proper, smooth operation. Adjust handicapped accessible closers tomeet specified opening force criteria.

3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE:A. Refer to the Drawings for the hardware schedule.

End of Section

Proj. No. 18144.01 Door Hardware 08710 - 2

SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:A. Glass and glazing for:

1. Hollow metal glazing frames.2. Door lights.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:A. Hollow metal frames and doors - Section 08110.B. Wood doors - Section 08212.

1.3 REFERENCES:A. ANSI Z97.1a-1977 - Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings.B. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass.C. ASTM C1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.D. Glazing Manual, 1997 Edition.E. FS TT-S-00230C(2) - Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Single Component (for

caulking, sealing and glazing in buildings and other structures).

1.4 SUBMITTALS:A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature of specified products in

accordance with Section 01330.B. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification confirming that materials meet specification

requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:A. Installer Qualifications: Experienced in glazing specified materials.B. Regulatory Requirements: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials, 16 CFR 1201,

as established by Consumer Product Safety Commission.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:A. Deliver glass with manufacturer's labels intact. Do not remove labels until glass has been

installed.B. Keep glass free from contamination by materials capable of staining glass.C. Deliver compounds in manufacturer's unopened, labeled containers.

1.7 WARRANTYA. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.B. Furnish ten year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure,

interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLAZING MATERIALS:A. Fire Rated Glass (G-1): Clear 3/16 in. thick, fire rated glass; FireLite NT by Technical Glass

Products. Provide 90 minute glass.

2.2 ACCESSORIES:A. Channel Glazing Compound: M-251 by Pecora.B. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70-90 shore "A" durometer hardness.C. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 shore "A" durometer hardness.D. Glazing Sealant: Curing-type gunnable non-sag polysulfide sealant, FS TT-S-00227, Type

II, Class A or B, color as selected.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Glass and Glazing 08800-1

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION:A. Verify that glazing channels and glass are free of imperfections or damage that would prevent

proper installation of glass.B. Carefully measure glass openings and provide minimum required tolerances and clearances.C. Clean metal, wood and glass surfaces free of foreign matter and coatings.

3.2 GLAZING:A. Install in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, requirements of 16 CFR 1201, and

manufacturers recommendations.B. Set and block glass to provide equal margins at perimeter, with glass not in contact with

frames.C. Wet glaze hollow metal frames, hollow metal door lights and wood door lights with channel

glazing compound or sealant.1. Hold glass in place with spacers and back-bed to insure full beds.2. Apply sealant or compound to face with sufficient force to eliminate voids.3. Trim excess to form watershed away from glass.

3.3 CLEANING:A. Remove excess glazing compound from installed glass.B. Remove labels from glass.C. Thoroughly wash and polish both faces of glass. Abrasive cleaners prohibited.D. Remove debris from site.

3.4 PROTECTION:A. Attach crossed streamers away from glass face.B. Replace broken, scratched, chipped or otherwise-damaged glass.

End of Section

Proj. No. 18144.01 Glass and Glazing 08800-2

SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. Section includes metal stud wall framing; gypsum board and joint treatment; and acoustic

insulation.B. Related Sections:

1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking.

1.2 REFERENCESA. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard.B. ASTM C442 - Gypsum Backing Board and Coreboard.C. ASTM C475 - Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.D. ASTM C645 - Non-Load Bearing (Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring

Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.E. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and

Manufactured Housing.F. ASTM C754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum

Board.G. ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.H. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster

Bases.I. ASTM E90 - Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne-Sound Transmission

Loss of Building Partitions.J. ASTM E119 - Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.K. GA-214 (Gypsum Association) - Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum Board

Finish.L. GA-216 (Gypsum Association) - Recommended Specifications for Application and

Finishing of Gypsum Board.M. GA-600 (Gypsum Association) - Fire Resistance Design Manual.N. UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Resistance Directory.O. WH (Warnock Hersey) - Certification Listings.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Installation Design Criteria:

1. Perform gypsum board systems work in accordance with recommendations ofASTM C754 and GA-216 except as otherwise specified in this Section.

2. Install partition systems to withstand a 5 psf load applied perpendicular topartition, with a maximum deflection not exceeding L/240 , of span of partition.

3. Provide for vertical movement of building structure to prevent transfer ofcompressive loads to partition systems.

B. Regulatory Requirements:1. Fire-rated Assemblies: Listed and rated by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. or

generic fire resistance ratings listed in GA-600.2. Fire-Hazard Classification: Listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

C. Fire Endurance Ratings: Per local building code.

1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing, and acoustic seals.C. Product Data: Submit data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape, finish, and

acoustic accessories.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09260 - 1

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C840, ASTM C1280, GA-214, GA-216 and GA-

600.


with minimum three years documented experience.B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three

years documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIESA. Manufacturers:

1. Celotex Building Products2. G-P Gypsum Corp.3. National Gypsum Co.4. United States Gypsum Co.

B. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.2 COMPONENTSA. Framing Materials:

1. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick, C shape.Provide 20 ga. studs where required to meet design criteria.

2. Fasteners: Screws - ASTM C1002. 3. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of

type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.B. Gypsum Board Materials:

1. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; fire resistive type “X”, UL rated; 5/8 inchthick, maximum available length in place; ends square cut, tapered edges.

2.3 RELATED MATERIALSA. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; un-faced preformed mineral fiber, friction fit type;

Source: Thermafiber SAFB (Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets) 3" thickness.B. Acoustic Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum

board.C. Corner Beads: Metal; Dur-A-Bond No. 101, galvanized; by U.S. Gypsum.D. Edge Trim (Casing Bead): GA-216; No. 200-A or 200-B metal trim, galvanized; by U.S.

Gypsum.E. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water.

Fiberglass Tape for Cementboard: 2 in. wide coated fiberglass mesh tape.F. Fasteners: ASTM C1002, Type S12 and GA-216. Durock Type S or Rock-on Type S-12

screws for cementitious backing board.G. Putty Pads: ASTM E84, fire rated, pre-cut putty pads; 7 x 7 x 1/4 inches; flame spread < 5

and smoke index < 15. Source - Metacaulk Fire Rated Putty Pads.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.B. Verify site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated

on shop drawings.


3.2 METAL FRAMING INSTALLATIONA. Metal Stud Installation:

1. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754, GA-216 and GA-600.2. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center, unless noted otherwise.3. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending stud framing through

ceiling to structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building membersto avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners.

4. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install studtracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs andadjacent studs.

5. Blocking: Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. Install blocking for support ofplumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, and hardware.

3.3 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATIONA. Gypsum Board Installation:

1. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA-216 and GA-600.2. Erect single layer gypsum board vertical, with ends and edges occurring over firm

bearing.3. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing.4. Double Layer Applications:

a. Secure second layer to first with fasteners.b. Place second layer perpendicular to first layer. Offset joints of second

layer from joints of first layer.5. Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant.6. Control Joints: Install over face layer gypsum board with 9/16 in. staples spaced

6 in. o.c. in each flange. Install control joints in following locations.a. At detailed or scheduled locations.b. Changes in back-up material or substrate.c. Vertically at each steel door frame jamb.d. In partitions at 30'-0" o.c. maximum without break.e. Horizontally at each floor in stairwell partitions.f. In ceilings at 30'-0" o.c. maximum each way.

7. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edgetrim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.

8. Install putty pads around outlet boxes (electrical, cable, phone, etc.) in all partitionwalls with acoustical insulation.

B. Joint Treatment:1. Treat joints, interior angles, fastener depressions and finishing trim on face-layer

gypsum board, including gypsum board in ceiling plenums.2. Prefill, tape, fill and finish in accordance with GA-216 and GA-214.3. Schedule of Treatment and Finish Levels:

a. Level 1: Ceiling plenums.b. Level 2: W/R gypsum board at tile finishes.c. Level 4: Surfaces scheduled to receive paint or wall covering.

4. Sand finish coat and leave surfaces smooth, uniform, and free of fins,depressions, cracks and other imperfections.

5. Treat joints and corners of cementitious backing board with 2 in. wide fiberglasstape embedded in mortar used to set ceramic tile. Fill gaps with mortar prior totapping.

6. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind ceramic tile. 7. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board.

3.4 RELATED MATERIALSA. Acoustic Accessories Installation:

1. Place acoustic insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings,behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions,and tight to items passing through partitions.


2. Install acoustic sealant at gypsum board perimeter at:a. Metal Framing: One beads.b. Base Layer.c. Seal penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, duct work, rough-in

boxes.

3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCESA. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.B. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from Flat Surface: 1/8 inch in 10

feet.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 09510 - SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. Section includes acoustic panels.B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.2. Division 15 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system.3. Division 16 - Interior Lights: Light fixtures in ceiling system.

1.2 REFERENCESA. ASTM C635 - Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.B. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and

Lay-in Panels.C. ASTM E1264 - Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products.D. CISCA (Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractors Association) - Acoustical Ceilings: Use

and Practice.E. UL (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.) - Fire Resistance Directory.F. WH (Warnock Hersey) - Certification Listings.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit data on acoustic units.C. Samples: Submit two samples, 8 x 10 inch in size, illustrating material and finish of each

acoustic unit.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Conform to CIRCA requirements.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.B. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F and maximum humidity of 40

percent prior to, during, and after acoustic unit installation.

1.6 SEQUENCING A. Sequence Work to ensure acoustic ceilings are not installed until sufficient heat is

provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed,tested, and approved.

B. Install acoustic units after interior wet work is dry.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALSA. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.B. Furnish 40 sq ft of extra panels of each type to Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGSA. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong World Industries.2. Celotex Building Products.3. USG Interiors.

B. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09510 - 1

2.2 COMPONENTSA. Acoustic Panels Type ACB - 1: ASTM E1264, conforming to the following:

1. Size: 24 x 24 and 24 x 48 inches.2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.3. Composition: Wet Formed Mineral Fiber.4. Weight: Minimum 1.0 lbs/ sq. ft.5. Light Reflectance: .83.6. NRC Range: .50.7. Fire Hazard Classification: Class A.8. Edge: Square.9. Surface Color: White.10. Surface Finish: Nondirectional.11. Source: Dune No. 1850 and 1851, by Armstrong World Industries.12. Grid: Existing 15/16 inch grid.

2.3 ACCESSORIESA. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustic and grid units.B. Hold Down Clips: Provide clips to hold down all ceiling tile.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.B. Verify layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Lay-In Grid Suspension System:

1. Repair existing grid as required.B. Acoustic Units:

1. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimentalto appearance and function.

2. Lay directional patterned units one way with pattern parallel to longest room axis. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.

3. Install units after above ceiling work is complete.4. Install units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.5. Cutting Units:

a. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.b. Cut edges to field cut units.c. Double cut and field paint exposed edges of tegular units.

6. Where round obstructions occur, install preformed closures to match perimetermolding.

7. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 20 feet ofexterior doors.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCESA. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.B. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.C. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09510 - 2

SECTION 09900 - PAINTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. Section includes surface preparation and field application of paints, and other coatings to

all interior exposed surfaces unless noted otherwise.B. Related Sections:

1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Shop finished structural wood decking.2. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Taping and bedding of gypsum

board.

1.2 REFERENCESA. ASTM D16 - Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products.B. ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss.C. ASTM D4442 - Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and

Wood-Base Materials.D. NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) - Industrial Maintenance Painting.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.B. Measurement of specular gloss; ASTM D523.

1.4 SUBMITTALSA. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Submit data on finishing products. Include VOC data.

1. Submit product data, including label analysis for each product proposed for use.2. Specifically include percent solids-by-volume, volatile organic compound (VOC)

content (lb/gal), and lead content (percent of weight of dried film).3. Schedule:

a. List each material proposed for use, and cross-reference to specificcoating system and substrate application.

b. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number, product name,and generic classification.

c. Include typewritten list identifying coating systems and colors applied toeach room, space, or item.

C. Samples:1. Prepare one sample of each transparent coating system scheduled on actual

wood substrate proposed for use. Apply in each top coat color scheduled.2. Prepare one sample of each opaque coating system scheduled on actual

substrate materials proposed for use. Apply in each top coat color scheduled.3. Step back each coat and process at least one inch to show bare substrate and

each coat and process in system build-up.4. Minimum sample size of 4 by 8 inches.5. Label each sample to indicate materials, color, sheen, DFT of each coat applied,

and total system DFT.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Single Source Responsibility: Provide products of single manufacturer.B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with

5 years documented experience.C. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with CPSC 16 CFR 1303 and other applicable federal, state, and localregulations limiting lead content of coatings to be applied.

2. Comply with applicable regulations limiting volatile organic compound (VOC)content of coatings to be applied. Conduct and report measurement of volatile

Proj. No. 18144.01 Paints 09900 - 1

organic compounds in coatings in accordance with Ozone Transport Commissionrestrictions for Pennsylvania.

D. Certifications: Submit certification from manufacturer that materials furnished meet orexceed specified requirements and comply with applicable lead and VOC content.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of

painted and coated surfaces.


with minimum three years documented experience.B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum five

years documented experience.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.C. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number,

brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, colordesignation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

D. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and maximumof 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.B. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside temperature

ranges required by paint product manufacturer.C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50

degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and solvent reducable Finishes: 65

degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer'sinstructions.

E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candle measured mid-height at substrate surface.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALSA. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.B. Supply 1 unopened gallon of each color; store where directed.C. Label each container with color, type, texture, and room locations, in addition to

manufacturer's label.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINTS AND COATINGSA. Manufacturers:

1. Sherwin-Williams Inc. products are listed as a minimal standard of quality.Products that are of equal or better quality of the following manufacturer’s areacceptable pending Architects approval.

2. PPG Architectural Finishes.3. Pratt and Lambert, Inc.4. ICI Paints.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Paints 09900 - 2

2.2 COMPONENTSA. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Prepare coatings:

1. To soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed tohomogeneous coating.

2. For good flow and brushing properties.3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.4. Ensure VOC contents of field applied coatings do no exceed limits, after thinning,

per requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials

not specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified; commercial quality.C. Patching Materials: Latex filler.D. Fastener Head Cover Materials: Latex filler.

2.3 MIXINGA. Use factory prepared colors matching approved samples. Site tinting will not be

permitted.B. Apply coatings of consistency recommended by manufacturer. Thin only within

recommended limits using thinners approved by coating manufacturer.

2.4 MATERIALSA. Paint: Refer to Schedule at end of section for specific product selections. Select primary

products of a single manufacturer for each coating or paint system, unless otherwisespecified.

B. Secondary products such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be first line qualityproducts of a reputable manufacturer.

C. Colors: To be selected by Architect.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.B. Verify substrate conditions are ready to receive Work as instructed by product

manufacturer.C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report

conditions capable of affecting proper application.D. Do not proceed with surface preparation or coating applications until conditions are

suitable.E. Application of paint or finish to surfaces shall constitute acceptance of that surface.F. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.G. Measure moisture content of surfaces using electronic moisture meter. Do not apply

finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:1. Gypsum Wallboard and glass fiber reinforced gypsum: 17 percent.

H. Surfaces Not To Be Painted:1. Architectural concrete.2. Clay and glass unit masonry, decorative concrete unit masonry, and stone.3. Aluminum and aluminum based alloys, copper and copper based alloys, lead and

lead based alloys, nickel and nickel based alloys, stainless steel, platedarchitectural metals, and "weathering" metals.

4. Decorative plastic and metal laminates, and synthetic countertops.5. Elastomeric membranes and flashings, roofing materials, and exterior sealants

and calking.6. Acoustic materials.7. Rubber, vinyl, or plastic seals and bumpers.8. Surfaces concealed or inaccessible in finished construction unless specifically

required.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Paints 09900 - 3

9. Other surfaces specifically scheduled or indicated to remain unfinished orunpainted.

I. Materials and Products Not To Be Painted:1. Items with integral or factory-applied final finish unless indicated otherwise.2. Moving parts of operating equipment such as valve and damper operators,

linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts.3. UL, FM or other code-required labels, name plates, identification or performance

rating labels.4. Sprinkler heads.5. Mechanical and electrical items within unfinished spaces unless noted otherwise.

3.2 PREPARATIONA. General:

1. Correct minor defects.2. Remove temporary labels, wrappings, and protective coverings from surfaces to

be coated.3. Seal stains, marks, and other imperfections which may bleed through surface

finishes.B. Gypsum Board:

1. Refer to Sections 09260 and 09275 for general surface preparation.2. Fill remaining cracks, depressions, holes and other irregularities with spackling

compound.3. Sand rough or high spots left by joint cement or spackling compound without

damaging paper face.4. Remove dust by wiping with damp cloths or vacuuming.

C. Steel - Prime Coated:1. Remove loose primer and rust to feather-edge at adjacent sound primer by

cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP2 "Hand Tool Cleaning" and SP3 "PowerTool Cleaning".

2. Apply metal conditioner to abrasions, welds, bolts, and nuts in accordance withmanufacturer's recommendations. Allow to set as recommended bymanufacturer. Rinse with clean water with rust inhibitor mixed with water orapplied immediately following rinse. Allow to dry.

3. Prime coat bare areas immediately.D. Steel - Galvanized:

1. Remove white rust by cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP2 "Hand ToolCleaning" and SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning". Exercise care not to removegalvanizing.

2. Pretreat surfaces to receive solvent reducible coatings immediately.

3.3 APPLICATIONA. General Requirements:

1. Coat all surfaces specified, scheduled, illustrated, and otherwise exposed unlessspecifically noted otherwise.

2. Apply coatings of type, color, and sheen as scheduled.3. Apply products in accordance with Section 01600. Use application materials,

equipment, and techniques as recommended by coating manufacturer and bestsuited for substrate and type of material being applied.

4. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are improperly prepared.5. Number of coats specified are minimum number acceptable.6. Apply coating systems to total dry film thickness scheduled. Apply material at not

less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Do not exceedmaximum single coat thickness recommended by coating manufacturer. Do notdouble-back with spray equipment building up film thickness of two coats in onepass.

7. Ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive dryfilm thickness equivalent of flat surfaces.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Paints 09900 - 4

8. Finish edges of coatings adjoining other materials or colors sharp and clean,without overlapping.

B. Prime Coats:1. Apply initial coat to surfaces as soon as practical after preparation and before

subsequent surface deterioration.2. Backprime exterior woodwork with specified primer.3. Backprime interior woodwork scheduled to receive transparent finish with gloss

varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.4. Apply primer to wood and metal sash before field glazing.

C. Intermediate and Top Coats:1. Allow previously applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.2. Sand and dust lightly between coats as recommended by coating manufacturer.3. Apply each coat to achieve uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage free

of brush and roller marks, runs, misses, visible laps or shadows, hazing, bubbles,pin holes, or other defects.

4. If stains, undercoats, or other conditions show through final topcoat, correctdefects and apply additional topcoats until coating film is of uniform finish, color,and appearance.

D. Finish Matching:1. Finish closets same as adjoining rooms, unless otherwise specified.2. Finish tops, bottoms, and edges of doors same as door faces. Apply sanding

sealer to cut-outs. When faces are different colors, finish edges of doors tomatch space from which they are visible when door is in partly open position.

3. Finish other surfaces not specifically mentioned to match adjoining surfaces.

3.4 CLEANINGA. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.B. If completed construction is damaged beyond normal cleaning or repair by painting

operations, replace damaged items at no additional cost to Owner.C. Promptly remove spilled, splashed, or spattered coatings. Clean spots, oil, and other

soiling from finished surfaces using cleaning agents and methods which will not damagematerials.

D. Maintain premises and storage areas free of unnecessary accumulation of tools,equipment, surplus materials, and debris.

E. Collect waste, cloths, and material which may constitute fire hazards and place in closedmetal containers; remove from site daily along with empty containers.Collect wastematerial which may constitute fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and removedaily from site.

F. Upon completion of work, remove paint and varnish spots from floor, glass, and otherfinished surfaces. Remove from premises rubbish and accumulated materials. Leavework in clean, orderly, and acceptable condition.

G. Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch-up spot will blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing. Otherwise, re-coat entire section to corners or visible stopping point.

3.5 PROTECTIONA. Protect completed finish and painting work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces from

paint splatter, spills and stains.B. Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures during progress of work.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Paints 09900 - 5

3.6 SCHEDULE A. Metal Surfaces:

1. Interior non-ferrous metals and zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.1st Coat: S-W ProCryl Universal Water Based Primer, B66-310 Series (5 milswet, 2 mils dry)2nd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel, B20-200 Series3rd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel, B20-200 Series (4 mils wet, 1.5 milsdry per coat)

2. Interior ferrous metals.1st Coat: S-W All Surface Enamel Latex Primer, A41W210 (4 mils wet, 1.6 milsdry)2nd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2200 Series3rd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2200 Series (4 mils wet, 1.5 milsdry per coat)

B. Gypsum Surfaces:1. Interior gypsum board walls (typical).

1st Coat: S-W PrepRite 200 Latex Primer, B28W101 (6 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry)2nd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2200 Series3rd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2200 Series (4 mils wet, 1.6 milsdry per coat)

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 Paints 09900 - 6

SECTION 10192 - CURTAINS AND HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDESA. Cubicle curtains and hardware.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONSA. Suspended ceiling - Section 09510.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit in accordance with Section 01330.2. Indicate layout, splicing, anchoring and installation details.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature and installation instructions.

1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGEA. Deliver and store materials indoors in manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged

packages.B. Handle in such a manner as to prevent damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CUBICLE TRACKA. Qualities: Extruded aluminum track, surface mounted.B. Track: Aluminum core and ABS shell.

1. Carriers: Capable of supporting 50 lbs per carrier.2. ASTN E 84 Class A rating.

C. Basis of Design: Formatrac Bendable Track by Clickeze.1. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600.

2.2 CURTAINSA. Cubicle Curtains (CC-1):

1. Material: 100% flame retardant polyester fabric.2. Material Width: 72".3. Size: Refer to Drawings.4. Flame Spread/ Smoke Developed: Pass NFPA 701.5. Top: Provide 18" mesh top, and weighted bottom.6. Color: As selected by Architect.

B. Basis of Design: Clickeze Privacy Curtains.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Examine ceiling system for conditions that would prevent proper installation of tracks.B. Do not proceed until defects are complete.

3.2 INSTALLATIONA. Install plumb, level and secure, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.B. Provide above ceiling reinforcement for curved sections of cubicle track.

3.3 ADJUST AND CLEANA. Remove burrs and rough edges.B. Replace damaged pieces.

Proj. No. 18144.01 Curtains and Hardware 10192-1

C. Install carriers and adjust track at splices for smooth operations.D. Clean track system, disassemble if necessary to clean channels.E. Leave in smooth operating order.

End of Section

Proj. No. 18144.01 Curtains and Hardware 10192-2

SECTION 10445 - FIRE WALL SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARYA. Section includes fire wall labeling requirements.B. Related Sections:

1. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Rated partitions.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Fire-rated Assemblies: Listed and rated by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. 2. Fire-Hazard Classification: Listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.

B. Fire Endurance Ratings: Per local building code.

1.3 SUBMITTALSA. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Submit floor plans with each type of sign and location indicated.C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on pre-manufactured signs, or full size copy of

proposed stencils.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform Work in accordance with ratings indicate on Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERA. Fire Wall Signs, Inc.B. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.2 SIGNAGEA. Wall Labels: Label all fire walls, and smoke walls and partitions in accordance with the

International Building Code (IBC) and the following requirements.1. Painted stencil or manufactured sign indicating fire and smoke rating of wall; 2. Size: 8 x 10 inch, with rating in minimum 3" high lettering on top line and “protect

all openings and penetrations” in 2 inch letters. 3. Colors: Contrasting color to wall, latex paint to meet VOC requirements of Section

09900 - Painting.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATIONA. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.B. Verify site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated

on shop drawings.

3.2 SCHEDULEA. Stencil in a contrasting color the rating for the wall in a obvious location, a minimum of

10'-0" o.c., 8" above the ceiling. Each wall to have a minimum of one label.B. Labels shall be one of the following:

1. 0 HR SMOKE PARTITION2. 1 HR FIRE PARTITION3. Each label to included “Protect all openings and penetrations”.

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 Fire Wall Signage 10445 - 1

Proj. No. 18144.01 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-1

SECTION 15050 – BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to all Division 15 Sections in addition to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements.

B. Section Includes:

1. General Requirements:

a) Intent

b) Responsibility of Bidders

c) Quality Assurance

d) Products

e) Submittals

f) Substitutions

g) Guarantees

h) Applicable Publications

i) Regulatory Requirements

j) Project/Site Conditions

k) Delivery, Storage and Handling

l) Sequence and Scheduling

m) Interruption of Services

n) Temporary Heating, Cooling and Humidity Control

o) Cutting and Patching

p) Hazardous Materials

q) Operating and Maintenance Manuals

r) Record Drawings

s) Cleaning

t) Painting

u) Welding

v) Special Equipment Conditions

w) Mechanical Sound Control

x) Final Acceptance

y) Owner Instruction

2. Products:

a) Hangers and Supports

b) Miscellaneous Steel


c) Pipe Sleeves and Seals

d) Thermal Expansion Control

e) Vibration Isolators

f) Firestopping

g) Access Panels

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. General and Supplementary Conditions

B. Administrative Requirements of Division 1

C. All Division 15 sections

D. Division 16 sections referencing electrical requirements for Division 15 equipment as specified herein.

1.3 INTENT

A. To provide complete and fully operational mechanical systems with facilities and services to meet all of the requirements described herein and in complete accordance with all applicable codes and ordinances.

B. The drawings are diagrammatic and approximately to scale unless detailed otherwise. They establish scope, material and quality and are not detailed installation instructions.

C. The Contractor will be held responsible for proper installation of materials and equipment to true intent and meaning of both Drawings and Specifications.

D. In cases of discrepancies between drawings, or between the drawings and the specifications, the Engineer will make the final determination as to which is correct. In cases where items appear in the specifications but not on the drawings, or appear on the drawings but not in the specifications they shall be considered as noted on both. Unless written clarification in the form of an addendum is received, the bid shall be interpreted to include the most complete installation of equipment and work including all associated costs.

E. The Engineer reserves the right of interpretation of the specifications and drawings. The Engineers decisions of interpretations shall be final.

F. To provide connections to all equipment furnished in other sections and by the Owner, including uncrating, installing, starting, and testing equipment.

1.4 RESPONSIBILITY OF BIDDERS

A. The contractor shall examine all contract documents issued. The contractor shall visit the site and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions existing at the site before submitting their proposal. Submission of a proposal shall be considered as evidence that a visit to the site was conducted. No extra compensation will be allowed for any error resulting from failure to visit job site. Bidders must be familiar with codes, rules, and regulations in effect at the site of the work to determine existing conditions that affect their installation.

B. The terms "the contractor", "this contractor", mentioned in these Division 15 specifications refers to the Contractor responsible for all work and equipment included in these Division 15 specifications.


C. In all cases where equipment and materials are specified in the singular or plural number, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such items as are required to complete the installation.

D. All work shall be executed and all equipment constructed and installed in accordance with the current requirements of all applicable articles and sections of the following:

1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

4. National Electric Code (NEC)

5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

7. Owner's Insurance Underwriters

8. Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)

9. Public Utilities which have connection with any systems specified

10. All Federal, State, County and Local ordinances and regulations

E. Nothing contained in these specifications or shown on the drawings shall be construed to conflict with the aforesaid codes, ordinances, or regulations. Contractor shall be held responsible for accident to persons, material or property caused by failure to adhere to the proper code requirements until the Owner has accepted work.

F. The Contractor is responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction and for worker safety.

G. Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits inspections and approvals required by foregoing authorities in connection with all work specified herein. All costs associated with permits, inspec-tions and approvals shall be included in the contract price. Certificates of approval shall be obtained from any department issuing same. Certificates shall be in duplicate, shall be delivered to the Engineer and become property of the Owner.

H. Wherever any installation, product, equipment item, etc., specified herein is not permitted to be handled, installed, or is otherwise restricted by union regulations, etc., the Contractor shall notify the Engineer before submitting a bid in ample time for modifications to be made in the requirements. If such notification is not made, this Contractor shall be responsible to complete the installation to the Engineer’s complete satisfaction at no additional Owner expense.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Equipment Vibration Tolerance:

1. The allowable vibration tolerance as specified in this section. Equipment specifications require factory balancing of equipment to this tolerance.

2. After air balance work is completed and permanent drive sheaves are in place, perform field mechanical balancing and adjustments required to achieve the specified vibration tolerance.

B. Products Criteria:


1. Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least three years. See applicable specification sections for any additional requirements.

2. Equipment Service: Products shall be supported by a service organization that maintains a complete inventory of repair parts and is located reasonably close to the site.

3. Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.

4. Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.

5. Nameplates: Nameplates bearing manufacturer’s name or identifiable trademark shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.

6. Asbestos products, equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.

C. Welding: Before any welding is performed, the Contractor shall submit a certificate certifying that welders comply with the following requirements:

1. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

2. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 series Code for Pressure Piping.

3. Certify that each welder has passed American Welding Society (AWS) qualification tests for the welding processes involved, and that certification is current.

D. Grooved Joint Piping Systems:

1. All grooved couplings, and fittings, valves and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.

2. All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date stamped for quality assurance and traceability.

3. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer, and shall be verified as suitable for the intended service.

4. Grooved joint products shall be shown on product submittals and shall be specifically identified with the applicable manufacturer style numbers.

E. Manufacturer’s Recommendations: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

1. Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s published installation instructions. If the manufacturer requires specific bolt torque ratings for proper installation, the Contractor shall verify the couplings are installed at the required torque ratings and maintain an installation log noting the couplings and final installed torque ratings. The manufacturer’s representative shall be present during the review.

2. A factory-trained field representative (direct employee) of the mechanical joint manufacture shall provide on-site training for contractor's field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools and installation of grooved piping products. The factory-trained representative shall periodically review the product installation and ensure best practices are being followed. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products. A distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training.


F. Install all ceiling mounted apparatus centered in ceiling tiles where necessary.

1.6 PRODUCTS

A. Products named on the Contract Drawings or documents, if any, and products of manufacturers named first throughout the Project Manual or documents, constitutes the Engineer’s Basis of Design.

B. Products of named manufacturers, other than the first named manufacturer, appearing throughout the Project Manual or documents or on the Contract Drawings or documents are accepted as equal; however, the requirements of General Conditions regarding equipment shall apply.

C. If products of manufacturers other than those named first, differ from those named first in the Project Manual or documents or on the Contract Drawings or documents to the extent that their proper incorporation into the work requires changes to the structural, piping, mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, or any other change whatsoever in nature, then the Contractor shall be responsible for such change and all costs associated with such change.

D. Thus, if the contractor provides equipment other than the Engineers Basis of Design, then the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs, by all trades, as required to accommodate the equipment they provide.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. General requirements applicable to all Division 15 Sections:

1. Submit under provisions of Division 1 and in accordance with the following:

a) Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal. Produce shop drawings to indicate fabrication details and proposed layouts for shop or field fabrications as named herein.

b) Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. Include contract drawing identification, type, quantities, capacities, accessories, rough-in dimensions, manufacturer’s name, model number, connection sizes, wiring diagrams, installation instructions, motor horsepower, voltage, phase and amperage, colors, finishes, and other pertinent data.

c) The supplier, by submitting, certifies that materials or equipment proposed are satisfactory for application intended, and that materials and equipment are in current production with no known plans to cease production.

d) Contractor agrees that submittals processed by the Architect and/or Engineer are not change orders. The purpose of submittals by the Contractor is to demonstrate that the Contractor understands the design concept; that he demonstrates this understanding by indicating which equipment and materials he intends to furnish and install and the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use.

e) Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and contract documents in the form of design drawings and specifications are discovered either prior to or after shop drawing submittals are processed by the Engineer, the design drawings and specifications shall control and shall be followed.

f) All shop drawings submitted shall bear the approval stamp of the Contractor as evidence that they have checked the drawings. Any drawings submitted without


this stamp of approval will not be evaluated and will be returned to the Contractor for proper resubmission.

g) Material and equipment reviews by Architect and/or Engineer are only for conformance with the design concept of the project and compliance with information given in the Contract Documents. Specifically excluded from the Engineer’s shop drawing review are material quantities, connection details, mounting trim, air distribution patterns, etc. Contractor is solely responsible for providing materials in conformance with the Contractor Documents. Dimensions shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site by the installing Contractor and installation shall be coordinated with other trades. Shop drawing approval does not modify the Contractors duty to comply with the Contract Documents.

h) The basis of this contract is for a maximum of two reviews of any shop drawing by the Engineer. If additional reviews of a shop drawing are required for approval, the Contractor shall be responsible to compensate the Engineer for the additional process charges.

i) Within 30 days after signing the contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a complete list of materials and equipment he proposes to use, giving the name and address of manufacturer and when required for proper identification, trade name or catalog number. The list shall itemize each type of material and each piece of equipment (omitting duplicates), including motors and motor control apparatus. The Contractor shall submit samples of materials for approval at the site as requested by the Engineer. Such materials may be incorporated into the structures after serving their purpose as samples.

j) Electronic versions of the mechanical drawings may be obtained from the Engineer for a nominal fee.

B. The submissions are the contractor's documents; the Architect's and Engineer's approval constitutes an acknowledgment that the documents have been submitted and nothing more. It is the contrac-tor's responsibility to check his own submissions for compliance with the Contract Documents and job conditions.

C. Material and equipment reviews by Architect and/or Engineer are only for conformance with the design concept of the project and compliance with information given in the Contract Documents. Specifically excluded from the Engineer’s shop drawing review are material quantities, connection details, mounting trim, etc. Contractor is solely responsible for providing materials in conformance with the Contract Documents. Dimensions shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site by the installing Contractor and installation shall be coordinated with other trades. Shop drawing approval does not modify the Contractors duty to comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Submittal Requirements for Products Specified in this Section:

1. Pipe Seals: Include product description and list of materials for each service.

2. Expansion Compensators and Joints: Include product description and list of materials for each service.

3. Grooved joint couplings and fitting shall be referred to on drawings and product submittals, and be identified by the manufacturer’s listed model or series designation.

4. Vibration Isolators:

a) Schedule of isolated equipment, referencing equipment schedule number, indicating type and capacity of isolators.


b) Include product description and list of materials for each service.

1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 and in accordance with the following:

B. Where the Contractor elects to substitute materials or equipment for materials or equipment specified, he shall request in writing, review of the substitution by the Engineer in accordance with all Supplementary Conditions and/or Division 1 requirements. All such requests shall include manufacturer's literature, specifications, drawings, cuts, performance data or other references or information necessary to completely describe the item. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all structural, mechanical, and electrical changes required for their installation at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Substitutions will be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor.

D. A substitution request constitutes a representation that the Contractor:

1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the originally specified product.

2. Will provide the same or greater warranty than the originally specified product.

3. Will coordinate the installation and make changes to all other work including coordination and compensation to other trades that may be required for the substituted product to be installed with no additional cost to the Owner.

4. Waive claims for additional costs or time extensions, which may subsequently become apparent.

5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities.

E. When this contractor desires to furnish equipment of a manufacturer other than that specified or intended, he shall include a complete specification of the substituted item, along with each submission copy of shop drawings, indicating the necessary modifications to the substituted product to satisfy the requirements of the contract specifications. Manufacturer's specifications shall be written as close as possible over the contract specifications so that an accurate comparison can be made.

F. The verification specification shall include the exact wording of the contract specification and the revised wording, identified properly, indicating all the deviations proposed. If no deviations are noted, the contractor shall furnish the material or equipment in accordance with the contract specifications.

G. In cases where specific manufacturers are listed the Engineer reserves the right to consider alternate manufacturers. In all cases where equipment and materials are specified as “Basis of Design” alternate manufacturers who meet the referenced Standards, these specifications and the standard of quality of the basis of design manufacturer shall be acceptable. It is not the intent of these specifications to be biased or proprietary unless a specific list of “Approved Manufacturers” is given or an item is specified as “NO SUBSTITUTIONS”. The Engineer reserves the right of final determination of the equality of an alternate manufacturer.

H. The Architect and Engineer reserve final acceptance of substitutions.


1.9 GUARANTEES

A. Guarantee all equipment, materials, and workmanship for a period of one year, beginning with date of acceptance of the project. Special warranties will be called for under some sections of equipment. Warranty shall be in writing and shall include written copies of factory warranties with expiration dates on items of equipment where warranty date might differ from the acceptance date, such as five year warranty on sealed refrigeration systems. No warranty shall start before date of acceptance in writing by the Architect. The Contractor without cost to Owner shall replace any defective work developing during this period. Where such defective work results in damage to work of other contractors, all such work shall be restored to its original condition without cost to Owner.

B. The equipment and materials manufacturers are expected to recognize that they are responsible for the failure of their products to perform in accordance with data furnished by them or their authorized representatives, as well as misrepresentations of such data. When the products have been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's published or written instructions and recommendations, and such products fail, then the Contractor and the manufacturers are responsible for replacement of the products and all associated work and materials without additional cost to the Owner.

C. Contractor shall maintain the system and equipment, including servicing, adjusting, and replacement of refrigerant and oil, for one complete year after date of final acceptance.

D. Maintenance work required includes following major items:

1. Greasing and/or oiling of machinery bearings. This shall include periodic checks of operating parts of all machines, motors and drives, at which time packing glands of pumps shall be tightened if excessive leaks are found. Equipment shall be checked at least every three (3) months during maintenance period.

2. Periodic servicing of the refrigeration system by an authorized representative of the manufacturer. It is contemplated that equipment will be in service on a year round basis. Maintenance work shall include a check in Spring and in Fall.

3. Periodic inspection of temperature control system, including adjustment of controlling devices.

4. Emergency service, if required during maintenance period.

5. Cleaning of strainers in the piping system including strainers of drains provided under Division 15. This shall be done twice during the maintenance period.

6. Insure presence of maintenance manuals, parts lists, and all data required by the Owner's maintenance group to properly care for equipment.

1.10 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. When a standard is specified by reference, comply with requirements of that standard, except when requirements are modified by the Contract Documents or applicable codes establish stricter standards.

C. The Publication or Standard is the publication in effect as of the bid date, except when a specific date is listed.

D. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA): 410-91; Recommended Safety Practices for Air Moving Devices.


E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A36/A36M-94; Carbon Structural Steel

2. A575-89; Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades

3. E84-95; Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

4. E119-95; Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials

F. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.:

1. SP-58-93; Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and Manufacture

2. SP-69-91; Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Mechanical: Conform to Pennsylvania Uniform Construction Code.

B. Fire Protection: Refer to Division 15300 - Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems.

C. Plumbing: Refer to Division 15400 - Plumbing Systems.

D. Obtain permits, pay fees associated with utility connections and request inspections from Authority Having Jurisdiction.

E. Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) listings and National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association’s (NEMA) stamps or seals shall be evidenced where applicable to electrical apparatus forming parts of the mechanical equipment.

F. Conform to applicable regulations of Department of Environmental Protection, Department of Labor and Industry, and OSHA.

G. Updated Standards: At the request of the Architect and/or Engineer, Contractor or governing authority, submit a change order proposal where an applicable industry code or standard has been revised and reissued after the date of contract documents and before performance of the work affected. The Architect and/or Engineer will decide whether to issue a change order to proceed with the updated standard.

1.12 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Refer to Division 1 - General Requirements.

B. Install work in locations shown on the drawings, unless prevented by project conditions

C. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of work to meet project conditions, including changes to work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of the Architect and/or Engineer before proceeding.

D. The Contractor shall do all minor cutting and patching and shall make all changes, relocations and installations with a minimum of noise. All present and new equipment, floors, walls, etc., shall be adequately protected from dust and dirt caused by the work. Protection shall include suitable temporary barriers or coverings. The exterior and interior premises of the building shall be kept as


clean as possible during construction. At no time shall the Contractor interfere with the normal operation of the building by allowing debris, excess earth, etc., to remain on the premises.

1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


B. Deliver materials and equipment to the project site in a clean condition with openings plugged, capped or otherwise sealed by packaging both during shipping and during temporary storage. Deliveries shall be scheduled to minimize the amount of time in temporary storage.

C. Delivered equipment crating and/or packaging shall clearly identify pick points or lifting points. In the absence of crating or packaging, pick points or lifting points must be identified on the equipment.

D. When unloading materials and equipment provide special lifting harness or apparatus as may be required by manufacturers. Handle materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

E. The Contractor shall determine the required equipment needed for unloading operations and have such equipment on site to perform unloading work on the date of equipment delivery.

F. Store materials and equipment, both on site and off site, in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

G. The Contractor shall protect at his own expense, his work, materials, and equipment during construction. Units and devices both before and after being set in place, shall be securely protected from carelessly or maliciously dropped tools, materials, grit, dirt or any foreign matter. Contractor shall be held responsible for damage so done until work is fully and finally accepted.

H. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all apparatus, equipment and appurtenances furnished by him or his subcontractors in connection with the work and special care shall be taken to protect all parts thereof in such manner as may be necessary or as may be directed. Protection shall include covers, crating, sheds or other means to prevent dirt, grit, plaster, or other foreign substances from entering the working parts of machinery or equipment. Where equipment must be stored outside the building, it shall be totally covered and secured with heavy, waterproof tarps and kept dry at all times. Where equipment has been subjected to moisture, it shall be suitably dried out before placed in service. Materials and equipment shall be stored in areas designated by the Owner and/or the General Contractor.

I. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products and equipment to assure that they are being maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration.

1.14 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING


B. Interference:

1. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work. The Contractor is responsible for modifying the work with offsets, bends, or other fittings to avoid minor interference's and structural obstructions. Perform such modifications at no increase in cost to the Owner.


2. Construct mechanical systems in a manner not to delay or interfere with other operations of work in the project.

3. Prior to making mechanical installations, coordinate mechanical work locations with other operations of work, especially in congested areas, such as mechanical rooms and above hung ceilings (if applicable).

4. In the event that interference’s develop, the Engineer’s decision will be final and no additional compensation will be allowed for relocation of mechanical products.

C. Contract Interface:

1. Work performed in cooperation with other contracts: The responsibility for performing work of this contract in cooperation with work of other contracts rests solely with this Contractor.

a) Make connections of piping systems and duct systems specified in the various sections of this contract to those systems or installations of other contracts requiring such connections.

b) These connections are generally indicated as contract breaks on the drawings.

2. Electrical Interface:

a) Electrical components or apparatus as provided by the product manufacturers specified under this contract shall be installed as work of this contract.

b) Power wiring, including final connections of such to primary electrical service devices of products specified shall not be performed as work of this contract, but as work of Division 16.

1.15 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES


B. At beginning of the project the Contractor shall review the Owners procedures relating to utility interruptions and plan their work accordingly. A preliminary utility interruption schedule shall be developed by the Contractor and submitted to the Owner for approval before final project schedules are developed.

C. Schedule work to avoid major interruptions of any utility services. Interruption of services shall be done during overtime if necessary at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Notify Owner’s representative a minimum of five working days prior to any interruption of services.

1.16 TEMPORARY HEATING, COOLING AND HUMIDITY


B. Contractor shall maintain temperature and humidity setpoints for areas that will remain occupied and being served by equipment being removed until new equipment is installed and fully operational.

C. Do not use the permanent system for temporary heating, cooling and humidity purposes without written permission from the Owner.

D. Use of permanent systems for temporary heating, cooling and humidity shall not modify the terms of warranty.


1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING


B. Perform all cutting and patching required for the installation of work under Division 15, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Perform finishing and roof flashing, in areas of existing building or roof not being disturbed under general construction, for installation of work under Division 15.

C. Obtain approval from Owner’s representative before cutting existing work.

D. Where openings are to be made in existing roof, obtain bonding company approval, if roof bond is still in effect, before such openings are made.

E. All existing surfaces shall be repaired and finished to match existing adjacent surfaces. Disturbed areas, drives, roads, streets, and grass areas shall be repaired where these surfaces have been disturbed by installation of work under Division 15 unless these areas are also being disturbed by work under general portions of the specifications.

F. All openings must be neatly drilled, bored or cut in a workmanlike manner, with materials and equipment suitable for the purpose. Punching or chipping of concrete will not be permitted. All openings shall be drilled, bored or cut in a manner satisfactory to and at locations approved by the Architect. Materials damaged under this contract shall be patched or replaced as directed by the Architect.

1.18 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Should hazardous or toxic materials be encountered in any existing work, the Contractor shall notify the Owner.

1.19 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS


B. Provide heavy-duty catalogue binders with appropriate labeling.

C. Binder shall be indexed by material and/or system type and at a minimum shall include:

1. Title page with clear plastic protection cover.

2. List of Mechanical Drawings.

3. Description of Systems: Provide complete and detailed description of systems.

4. Operating Division: Provide complete and detailed operation of major components.

5. Maintenance and Lubrication Division: Provide preventative maintenance and lubrication schedule for major components.

6. List of Equipment Suppliers and Contractors: Provide list of equipment suppliers and contractors, including address and telephone number.

7. Certification: Include copy of test data on heating system, tests performed on piping systems, balancing data for air and water systems, valve tag identification and pipe color code, inspection approval certificates for plumbing, heating, and ventilation systems and operational tests on gas-fired equipment.

8. Shop Drawings and Maintenance Bulletins: Provide materials received in compliance with clause 'Shop Drawings', arrange alphabetically.


D. Divider Tabs: Laminated Mylar plastic and colored according to Section.

E. Submit documents for approval prior to being turned over to the Owner.

1.20 RECORD DRAWINGS


B. Keep on site at all times an extra set of drawings and specifications recording changes and deviations from contract documents including all addendum, bulletin and request for information data. Documents shall be updated on a daily basis. This set of documents shall be used specifically for this purpose.

C. The record drawings shall accurately reflect the as-built conditions at the time of the project completion.

D. Record drawings shall be presented with maintenance manuals to the Architect at the time of final acceptance of the project.

1.21 CLEANING


B. At the completion of the work, all parts of the new and revised installations shall be thoroughly cleaned. All strainers, pumps, traps, etc., shall be cleaned of all dirt. All permanent cleanable air filters shall be removed, cleaned and reinstalled after the General Contractor has cleaned the areas for occupancy. All temporary air filters shall be removed and new air filters as specified shall be installed after cleanup of the areas. The system shall be operated for a sufficient period to remove all grease, metal cuttings, and other foreign matter from the system.

C. Any stoppage in piping or discoloration or other damage to any part of the building, its finish or furnishings, due to failure to properly clean piping or equipment and/or duct system, shall be repaired by the Contractor with no additional cost to the Owner.

1.22 PAINTING


B. Prepare for painting of exterior surfaces of unfinished materials, equipment, ironwork, and piping exposed in finished areas by cleaning surface of foreign matter, grease, dirt, and dust.

C. Paint exposed items or equipment, and all structural steel or miscellaneous metal, installed under this portion of the specifications.

D. Surfaces shall be primed and finish painted. Refer to Division 1 Painting Section. Each coat shall be a different shade, with final coat of the color as selected by the Architect.

E. Paint on factory finished equipment chipped or scrapped during installation shall be touched up. Touch up paint to be supplied by equipment manufacturer.

1.23 WELDING

A. Joints in welded piping shall be assembled by fusion welding using factory made welded fittings. Pipe shall be reamed and cleaned before erection.


B. The abutting ends of all pipes and welding fittings shall be accurately beveled at an angle of 45 degrees to within 1/16” plus or minus 1/32” of inside pipe wall. Surfaces beveled by the cutting torch shall be properly cleaned of oxide and unnecessary roughness by grinding, filing, or other suitable means.

C. Low carbon steel welding rods shall develop a tensile strength of not less than 45,000 psi cross section of the metal deposited in the weld. Special and eutectic steel welding rods of good quality and having a tensile strength greater than 45,000 psi may be used.

D. Circumferential welds shall have a width to 2-1/2 times pipe wall thickness and shall be reinforced approximately 1/16” above outside of pipe wall. Fusion on inside of pipe must be avoided. There shall be no valley, either at edge or at center of joint, and weld shall be built up with multiple passes so that weld metal will present a gradual increase in thickness from outside surface of pipe to the center of the weld.

1.24 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT CONDITIONS

A. Furnish all piping, sheet metal connections and miscellaneous accessories necessary for the complete installation and final connections to equipment not furnished under Division 15 of the work but shown on the drawings as provided by others or Not In Contract (N.I.C.). Each trade shall make all final connections to such equipment, including installation of all special traps, supplies, control valves, etc., furnished with such equipment, and furnished all materials necessary that are not supplied with the special equipment. All such work shall be installed in accordance with Division 15 specification requirements.

B. Unless otherwise detailed on the drawings, rough-in of proper size and capacity of mechanical equipment indicated on the drawings as “Future” or “N.I.C.” shall be provided and installed in such a manner and location that future final connections can be made with a minimum of work and without cutting or patching permanent walls, partitions, ceiling or floors.

C. Engineering drawings are, of necessity schematics for special equipment as exact roughing-in and requirements may vary with different manufacturers. Each trade shall connect its respective services to all special equipment indicated on the drawings at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.25 MECHANICAL SOUND CONTROL

A. All equipment shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration within Noise Criteria Curves listed in Sound Control Fundamentals of the latest edition of the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. Sound and vibration measurements shall conform to the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. If such objectionable noise or vibration shall be produced and transmitted to occupied portions of the building by apparatus, piping, ducts, or other parts of this work, any necessary changes, as approved shall be made without additional cost to the Owner. Noise levels shall conform to the requirements of OSHA.

B. Any and all other insulation or isolation required to accomplish results specified above shall be furnished and installed without additional cost to the Owner.

C. Isolation systems shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions and submittal data. Locations of all vibration isolation products shall be selected for ease of inspection and adjustment, as well as for proper operation.

D. No rigid connections between equipment and building structure shall be made that degrades the noise and vibration isolation system herein specified. Electrical conduit connections to isolated equipment shall be looped to allow free motion of isolated equipment. All mechanical connections


to isolated equipment including ducts, piping, and plumbing services shall be made with flexible connections.

1.26 FINAL ACCEPTANCE


B. When the installation is reported in writing by the contractor to be complete and ready for acceptance, an inspection shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer to ascertain whether it complies with the contract documents. If in the opinion of the Engineer it fails to do so, the Contractor shall at once remedy all defects and shortcomings. Any additional tests that may be required shall be entirely at the Contractor's expense. All of the testing work shall be done when and as directed by the Engineer.

1.27 OWNER INSTRUCTION


B. The Contractor shall furnish the services of qualified personnel, approved by the Engineer and thoroughly familiar with the completed installation, to instruct the Owners permanent operating personnel in the proper operation of all systems included under this contract, and the proper care of all equipment and apparatus. These services shall be furnished for a period of one 8-hour day, after the operation of the systems has been taken over by the Owner. This time (8 hours) shall be divided between the HVAC Contractor, Plumbing Contractor and Fire Protection Contractor (if separate contracts were awarded) relative to the extent of each trades’ scope of work. The division of time shall be approved by the Engineer and Owner.

C. When instructions are provided under this contract, the Contractor shall have in his possession three copies of an identifying letter which shall list the names of the Contractor's qualified instruction personnel, including manufacturers' representatives and subcontractors that will be giving the instructions. Likewise, on this same letter, spaces shall be provided for the Owner's personnel who will receive the instructions. After instructions have been given and received for each system, the Contractor's representatives and subcontractors shall sign and date the letter, and the Owner's personnel shall sign and date the letter acknowledging that they have received adequate instructions for operating and maintaining the systems and equipment. One signed copy shall be delivered to the Owner, one copy to the Engineer and one copy shall be retained by the Contractor.

D. In addition to the verbal instructions outlined above, the Contractor and his manufacturers' representatives and subcontractors shall furnish written basic instructions indicating the proper operation of each system and associated equipment. Each manufacturer shall also submit a brochure on his equipment, including instructions on operation, lubrication, recommended spare parts, and instructions on preventative, routine and breakdown maintenance.

E. The Contractor shall combine the written instructions and the manufacturers' equipment brochures in complete volumes with hardback binders which shall be turned over to the Owner before final acceptance of the contract work. The Contractor shall obtain two copies of a signed receipt from the Owner for the written instructions and equipment brochures. One copy of the receipt shall be delivered to the Engineer and one copy retained by the Contractor.

F. The Owner instruction shall consist of a walk through of the entire project with the Contractor identifying to the Owner all major system components, routings and locations of concealed components. The valve chart shall be reviewed (if applicable) and all valves located and identified. All components requiring regular maintenance shall be identified and maintenance procedures reviewed including filter change and lubrication.


2 PRODUCTS

2.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. For Attachment to Concrete Construction:

1. Concrete insert: Type 18, MSS SP-58.

2. Self-drilling expansion shields and machine bolt expansion anchors: Fed. Spec. FF-S-325, permitted in concrete not less than four inches thick. Applied load shall not exceed one-fourth the proof test load listed in Fed. Spec. FF-S-325.

3. Power-driven fasteners: Permitted in existing concrete or masonry not less than four inches thick when approved by the Engineer for each job condition. Applied load shall not exceed one-fourth the proof test load listed in Fed. Spec. FF-S-325.

B. For Attachment to Steel Construction: MSS SP-58.

1. Welded attachment: Type 22.

2. Beam clamps: Types 20, 21, 28 or 29. Type 23 C-clamp may be used for individual copper tubing up to 7/8-inch outside diameter.

C. Attachment to Metal Pan or Deck: As required for materials specified in Division 1.

D. For Attachment to Wood Construction: Wood screws or lag bolts.

E. Hanger Rods: Hot-rolled steel, ASTM A36 or A575 for allowable load listed in MSS SP-58. For piping, provide adjustment means for controlling level or slope. Types 13 or 15 turnbuckles shall provide 1-1/2 inches minimum of adjustment and incorporate locknuts. All-thread rods are acceptable.

F. Multiple (Trapeze) Hangers: Galvanized, cold formed, lipped steel channel horizontal member, not less than 1-5/8 inches by 1-5/8 inches, No. 12 gage, designed to accept special spring held, hardened steel nuts. Not permitted for steam supply and condensate piping.

1. Allowable hanger load: Manufacturers rating 200 pounds.

2. Guide individual pipes on the horizontal member of every other trapeze hanger with 1/4-inch U-bolt fabricated from steel rod. Provide Type 40 insulation shield, secured by two 1/2-inch galvanized steel bands, or pre-insulated calcium silicate shield for insulated piping at each hanger.

G. Pipe Hangers and Supports: MSS SP-58, use hangers sized to encircle insulation on insulated piping. Refer to Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation for insulation thickness and protection devices. To protect insulation, provide Type 39 saddles for roller type supports or pre-insulated calcium silicate shields. Provide Type 40 insulation shield or pre-insulated calcium silicate shield at all other types of supports and hangers including those for pre-insulated piping.

1. General Types (MSS SP-58):

a) Standard clevis hanger: Type 1; provide locknut.

b) Riser clamps: Type 8.

c) Wall brackets: Types 31, 32 or 33.

d) Roller supports: Type 41, 43, 44 and 46.

e) Saddle support: Type 36, 37 or 38.


f) Turnbuckle: Types 13 or 15.

g) U-bolt clamp: Type 24.

h) Copper Tube:

1) Hangers, clamps and other support material in contact with tubing shall be painted with copper colored epoxy paint, plastic coated or taped with non adhesive isolation tape to prevent electrolysis.

2) For vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps.

3) For supporting tube to strut: Provide epoxy painted pipe straps for copper tube or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps.

i) Supports for plastic or glass piping: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer with black rubber tape extending one inch beyond steel support or clamp.

2. HVAC Piping (other than general types):

a) Spring Supports (expansion and contraction of vertical piping):

1) Movement up to 3/4-inch: Type 51 or 52 variable spring unit with integral turn buckle and load indicator.

2) Movement more than 3/4-inch: Type 54 or 55 constant support unit with integral adjusting nut, turn buckle and travel position indicator.

3. Plumbing Piping (other than general types):

a) Horizontal piping: Type 1, 5, 7, 9, and 10.

b) Chrome plated piping: Chrome plated supports.

c) Hangers and supports in pipe chase: Prefabricated system ABS self-extinguishing material, not subject to electrolytic action, to hold piping, prevent vibration and compensate for all static and operational conditions.

d) Blocking, stays and bracing: Angle iron or preformed metal channel shapes, 18-gage minimum.

H. Pipe Anchors: Field or shop fabricated.

I. Pipe Guide: Carbon steel, welded construction sized to accommodate the required insulation.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL

A. Furnish and install all miscellaneous ironwork as required to secure and support all equipment specified in Division 15.

B. Equipment shall be supported without placing excessive stress or strain on the building construction.

C. Structural steel members required for the support of equipment installed under this contract shall conform to latest relevant ASTM specifications, and shall comply with the latest requirements of the American Institute of Steel Construction. Structural steel shall be of standard sections, as given in the structural steel manufacturer's handbooks. Other materials shall be as specified hereinafter.

D. All steel and ironwork shall be primer coated as approved by the Engineer. Before priming, all metal shall be thoroughly cleaned free from scale, rust, and dirt.

E. The Contractor shall provide all anchors, bolts, screws, dowels, and connecting members, and perform all cutting and fitting necessary to secure the work to adjoining construction.


F. Supports shall be neatly constructed of structural shapes to adequately support the equipment intended. All supports must be approved prior to installation. Field conditions will regulate the type of support required.

2.3 PIPE SLEEVES AND SEALS

A. Pipe Sleeves:

1. Interior walls and above grade floors: Schedule 40 carbon steel pipe sized to accommodate pipe, insulation and firestopping (if applicable).

2. Exterior walls above grade: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sized to accommodate pipe, insulation and firestopping (if applicable). If sleeves are field cut coat edges with cold galvanizing spray, ZRC or equivalent.

3. Exterior walls below grade and slab on grade floors: Schedule 40 steel pipe with anchor/water stop, hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Sized to accommodate pipe, pipe seal, insulation, waterproofing and firestopping (if applicable). Sleeve length to allow a minimum of ½” extension beyond exterior side walls and floors and a 1-1/2” extension above interior side of floors and ½” extension on interior side of walls.

4. Roof: All penetrations of roof to be in accordance with requirements of Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection.

B. Pipe Seals:

1. Modular, mechanical type consisting of inter-locking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and sleeve opening, zinc coated bolts, nuts and metal parts. The elastomeric element shall be sized and selected per manufacturer’s recommendations and shall have the following properties as designated by ASTM:

a) Standard Service Applications (-40°F to 250°F): ASTM D2000 M3 BA510

b) Hydrocarbon Applications (-40°F to 210°F): ASTM D2000 M1 BF510

c) High Temperature Applications (-67°F to 400°F): ASTM D2000 M1 GE505

2.4 THERMAL EXPANSION CONTROL

A. Expansion Compensators: Corrugated stainless steel bellows, stainless steel or brass shroud designed to control torsion and over compression, pipe material and connections to match service. Compensators shall have a maximum working pressure of 200 psig and be capable of absorbing a minimum of 2” of expansion (1-1/2” compression, ½” extension).

B. Expansion Joints: Stainless steel internal liner, multi-ply corrugated bellows, tie rods designed to control torsion and over compression/extension, pipe material, connections, working pressures, and travel to match service.

C. Expansion Loops: Prefabricated flexible expansion loops consisting of two flexible sections of hose and braid, two 90 degree elbows and a 180 degree return bend. Materials, connections, working pressure, and travel to match service.

D. For water systems, Victaulic Style 177/177N/77 flexible couplings may be used to accommodate thermal growth, contraction, and for the elimination of expansion loops. (In accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations.) Where loops are required, use of Victaulic Style 177/177N/77 flexible couplings on the loop.


E. Pipe Alignment Guides: Carbon steel two piece body for attachment to structure and guide spider for attachment to pipe, factory primed. Sized to allow for pipe insulation.

2.5 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

2. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

3. Mason Industries, Inc.

4. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.

5. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

B. Basis of Design: Mason Industries, Inc.

C. Intent: All vibration isolators described in this section shall be the products of a single manufacturer.

D. Vibration Isolators:

1. Precompressed Spring Hangers:

a) Basis of Design: Mason Industries type PC30N.

b) Hangers shall be as described in Spring Hanger section, but they shall be precompressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic upstop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall include a drawing of the hanger showing the 30o degree capability.

2. Spring Duct Hangers:

a) Basis of Design: Mason Industries type W30N.

b) Hangers shall be as described under Spring Hangers above. Hangers shall be provided with weldless eyebolts top and bottom to facilitate attachment to flat duct straps.

2.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Refer to Division 7 for additional requirements.

B. Compliance

1. In accordance with BOCA requirements, and Authority Having Jurisdiction

2. ASTM: E84-96 and E814-94

3. Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM)

4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1479

5. Warnock Hersey (WH)

C. Materials


1. Use either factory built (Firestop Devices) or field erected (through-Penetration Firestop Systems) to form a specific building system maintaining required integrity of the fire barrier and stop the passage of gases or smoke.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems and firestop devices tested in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479 using the "F" or "T" rating to maintain the same rating and integrity as the fire barrier being sealed. "T" ratings are not required for penetrations smaller than or equal to 4 in nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall cross sectional area.

3. Products requiring heat activation to seal an opening by its intumescence shall exhibit a demonstrated ability to function as designed to maintain the fire barrier.

4. Firestop sealants used for firestopping or smoke sealing shall have following properties:

a) Contain no flammable or toxic solvents.

b) Have no dangerous or flammable outgassing during the drying or curing of products.

c) Water-resistant after drying or curing and unaffected by high humidity, condensation or transient water exposure.

d) When used in exposed areas, shall be capable of being sanded and finished with similar surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface.

5. Firestopping system or devices used for penetrations by glass pipe, plastic pipe or conduits, unenclosed cables, or other non-metallic materials shall have following properties:

a) Classified for use with the particular type of penetrating material used.

b) Penetrations containing loose electrical cables, computer data cables, and communications cables protected using firestopping systems that allow unrestricted cable changes without damage to the seal.

c) Intumescent products which would expand to seal the opening and act as fire, smoke, toxic fumes, and, water sealant.

6. Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke development of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

7. FM, UL, or WH rated or tested by an approved laboratory in accordance with ASTM E814.

8. Materials shall be asbestos free.

2.7 ACCESS PANELS

A. Furnish factory-fabricated access panels, in ceilings and walls, for access to all concealed dampers, valves and other mechanical equipment where no other means of access is available. Access panels for mechanical work, along with all required auxiliary or supporting steel, hardware, etc, shall be furnished by the mechanical contractor to the general contractor, who shall install them. Access panels are not required at lift-out removable tile ceilings.

B. Access panels shall be of appropriate size but not less than 18" x 18". Panels shall be flush type, hinged to drop down and out, screwdriver operated, stainless steel in masonry and tile work and prime-coated sheet steel in plaster or acoustical tile of all types.

C. At locations where access panels are installed in fire-rated ceilings or walls, access panels shall contain the 1-1/2" hour fire-rated "B" label, and, in addition, shall also be provided with layers of gypsum wallboard in a thickness which will supply an additional one-hour fire rating. Coordinate rated ceiling and wall requirements with the Architectural drawings.


D. Determine the exact locations and sizes of required access panels and coordinate same with the Architect. Access panels shall not be installed without prior approval of the Architect. All panels shall be installed and located to present a neat and symmetrical appearance.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. All work shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner by mechanics experienced in the trade involved and shall be acceptable to the Engineer. All details of installation shall be mechanically and electrically correct. All materials and equipment shall be new, and without imperfections or blemishes. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the site and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No compensation will be allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and measurements and those indicated on the drawings. Any difference, which may be found, shall be submitted to the Engineer for consideration before proceeding with the work.

B. This specification includes under each item all labor, material and equipment necessary to properly install complete, adjust, and place in operating condition, satisfactory to the Engineer, the several branches of work described herein. This shall include all necessary interconnections between the several branches of work described herein, and connections to work under other sections of specifications and other contractors.

C. All items of labor, material or equipment not described in detail by specifications or drawings, but which are incidental to or necessary for complete installation and proper operation of several branches of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection therewith, shall be furnished and/or installed as if called for in detail by drawings or specifications.

D. The drawings are generally indicative of the work required and shall be followed as closely as circumstances will permit, however they do not indicate all offsets, bends, and fittings which may be required. Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions affecting work and arrange work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, bends, valves, and other accessories required to meet such conditions. Contractor for this work will be held responsible for proper installation of materials and equipment to the true intent and meaning of contract documents.

E. The Contractor shall carefully examine all contract documents including those of all other trades, and carry on his work so as not to delay or interfere with the work of other trades. He shall obtain in writing from the other contractors such data as is necessary to coordinate his work with other trades.

F. The Contractor shall lay out his work from dimensions of architectural and structural drawings and actual dimensions taken at the site and from the approved dimensions of equipment being installed. Layouts in congested areas should not be scaled from the mechanical and electrical drawings. No extra compensation will be allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and measurements and those indicated on the drawings. Any difference, which may be found, shall be submitted to the Engineer for consideration before proceeding with the work.

G. Coordinate location of piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, ductwork, and equipment to be clear of windows, doors, openings, light outlets, and other services and utilities. This Contractor shall be held responsible to coordinate his work with that of the other trades so that all work may proceed in an orderly manner and conflicts and delays may be avoided. Where drawings indicate special space allocation for different contracts, contractors shall rigidly adhere to sequence of installation designated by the Engineer or as required to allow all the trades to work equipment or materials into place in respective order. Special attention shall be paid to work under the floor slabs, above ceilings and in locations otherwise concealed. All work shall be tested before they are closed in.


H. Contractor shall determine in advance, location and size of chases and openings necessary for proper installation of his work, and have same provided during erection of work in which chases and openings occur. He shall furnish and set sleeves, hangers, and anchors, and be responsible for their proper and permanent location.

I. In cases where cutting of new building construction is necessary due to failure to set proper sleeves or inserts, or due to the failure to provide proper openings and chases such cutting shall be done and repaired to match the original condition of the work by the contractor under this specification.

J. Points of connection and termination of work under this specification are shown on drawings or stated within the specification, but in case of doubt as to such points, the Engineer decision will be final.

K. Equipment, ducts, and other work shall be installed as to preserve access to valves, accessories, etc., both those furnished under this specification, and those furnished under other specifications. Clearances shall be provided on all sides of equipment as required for proper maintenance purposes as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

L. Follow manufacturer’s published recommendations for installation methods not otherwise specified. The Contractor shall furnish the services of manufacturer's representatives for each piece of major equipment furnished under these contract documents. The amount of factory service provided by the contractor shall be as normally recommended and furnished by the various equipment manufacturers unless specified otherwise. Testing of equipment shall be made under the direct supervision of competent authorized service representatives. Any and all expenses incurred by the equipment manufacturers' representatives shall be borne by the contractor.

M. Contractor shall seal all openings left in building construction by the installation of work specified under this section. Sealing shall be in accordance with “Cutting and Patching” section specified herein.

N. Where the vapor barrier of any insulation is broken due to the installation of piping and equipment, the Contractor shall properly repair all insulation and seal all openings with vapor barrier covering and vapor barrier adhesive of type installed with the insulation.

O. Upon completion of the work, all remaining waste materials and rubbish resulting from the contract work shall be removed from the building and premises.

P. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer for clarification. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.

Q. The Contractor and his subcontractors shall satisfactorily complete the systems so that they are functional and operating to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All systems, their controls and their sequencing must be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. This specification shall apply for the design and fabrication of all hangers, supports, anchors, and guides. Where piping design is such that exceptions to this specification are necessary, the particular system will be identified, and the exceptions clearly listed on the drawings.

B. All supports and parts shall conform to the latest requirements of the ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.1.0, and MSS Standard Practice SP-58, SP-69, SP-89 and SP-90 except as supplemented or modified by the requirements of this specification.


C. Designs generally accepted, as exemplifying good engineering practice, using stock or production parts, shall be utilized wherever possible.

D. Where applicable install in accordance with the manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

E. Where dissimilar metals are in contact provide dielectric isolation as required to prevent galvanic corrosion.

F. Where supports are in contact with glass, aluminum or brass pipe provide plastic coating on supports, or wrap pipe with sheet plastic.

G. Hangers, supports and fabricated steel supports, including attachments, exposed to weather or located in utility tunnels or accessible utility trenches or subject to spillage shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Cut, welded, drilled, or otherwise damaged surfaces of galvanized coating shall be repaired with zinc chromate paint.

H. Accurate weight balance calculations shall be made to determine the required supporting force at each hanger location and the pipe weight load at each equipment connection.

I. Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation. They shall allow free expansion and contraction of the piping, and prevent excessive stress resulting from transferred weight being introduced into the connected equipment.

J. Wherever possible, pipe attachments for horizontal piping shall be pipe clamps.

K. All rigid rod hangers shall provide a means of vertical adjustment after erection.

L. Selection of vibration control devices shall not be part of the standard hanger contract. If vibration is encountered after the piping system is in operation, appropriate vibration control equipment shall be installed.

M. Where horizontal piping movements are greater than ½ inch and where the hanger rod angularity from the vertical is less than or equal to 4 degrees from the cold to hot position of the pipe, the hanger pipe and structural attachments shall be offset in such manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position. When the hanger rod angularity is greater than 4 degrees from vertical, then structural attachment will be offset so that at no point will the rod angularity exceed 4 degrees from vertical.

N. Where practical, riser piping shall be supported independently of the connected horizontal piping. Pipe support attachments to the riser piping shall be riser clamp lugs. Welded attachments shall be of material comparable to that of the pipe, and designed in accordance with governing codes.

O. Supports, guides and anchors shall be so designed that excessive heat will not be transmitted to the building steel. The temperature of supporting parts shall be based on a temperature gradient of 100 degrees F per inch distance from the outside surface of the pipe.

P. Hanger components shall not be used for purposes other than for which they were designed. They shall not be used for rigging and erection purposes.

Q. Inserts, Shells and Upper Attachments:

1. Inserts:

a) Contractor shall have inserts at site and dimensioned location drawings ready at the beginning of the involved concrete work.


b) Install inserts by securing to concrete forms and inserting reinforcing rod through the opening provided in the insert in accordance with shop drawings.

c) Provide necessary supervision while concrete is being poured to correct any misalignment caused by the concrete.

2. Shells:

a) Size shell length to assure a minimum of 1” solid concrete remaining from shell end to concrete face.

R. Pipe Hanger, Rods, Supports and Accessories:

1. Select proper hanger for piping systems.

2. The location of hangers and supports shall be coordinated with the structural work to ensure that the structural members will support the intended load.

3. Provide hex head nut on rod at top and bottom of clevis hanger yoke, and at each road connection to intermediate and upper attachment. Rod nuts shall be securely locked in place.

4. Supports for vertical piping shall be located at each floor or at intervals of not more than 15 feet and at intervals of not more than 8 feet from end of risers. Where supports are provided on intermediate floors spaced 15 feet or less between floors, no additional supports are required other than those specified for end of risers.

5. Hangers shall be spaced in accordance with the following table or in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and local code requirements, if more stringent.

PIPING MATERIAL PIPE SIZE RANGE MAX. HORIZONTAL

SPACING (FEET) MAX. VERTICAL SPACING (FEET)

Cast Iron All 5 15 Copper Up to 1-1/4” 6 10 Copper 1-1/2” and larger 10 10 CPVC Up to 1” 3 5 CPVC 1-1/4” and larger 4 6 Steel Up to 2” 10 15 Steel 2-1/2” and larger 12 15 PVC All 4 4

6. Minimum hanger rod sizes (diameter) for the supports listed in the table above shall be

based on nominal pipe size as follows:

a) Up to 2”: 3/8”

b) 2-1/2” to 3”: ½”

c) 4” to 5”: 5/8”

d) 6” and larger: ¾”

7. Maximum hanger rod loading shall not exceed following values:

NOMINAL HANGER ROD DIAMETER MAXIMUM LOAD (POUNDS) 3/8” 610 ½” 1130

5/8” 1810 ¾” 2710


7/8” 3770 1” 4960

8. Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. At hanger locations where lateral or

axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit swing.

9. Hanger centerline spacing shall be reduced by 50% in areas of concentrated valves and/or fittings, also no more than a maximum distance of 12” from valves, fittings and/or couplings, or 24” from a change in direction.

10. Parallel piping may be supported by trapeze hangers consisting of steel angle, channel, or beam suspended by steel rods attached to upper structure. Piping may be supported above, or suspended below, the angle, channel, or beam.

11. Provide protective shields on all cold and dual temperature piping required to be insulated (see specification Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation for extent of insulation).

12. Provide protective saddles sized to match insulation thickness on all hot piping required to be insulated (see specification Section 15080: Mechanical Insulation for extent of insulation). Fill void between saddle and pipe with insulation as specified.

13. Provide turnbuckles on all hangers that require leveling or aligning.

14. Provide weldless eye nuts on hanger terminations where disassembly or swing may be required. Use in combination with steel clevis.

3.3 PIPE SLEEVES AND SEALS

A. Pipe Sleeves:

1. Secure sleeves to forms for concrete construction. Ensure sleeves are not disengaged or misaligned by concrete placement operations.

2. Provide temporary cap for open end of sleeves to prevent entrance of concrete.

3. Provide temporary internal bracing where required to prevent distortion of sheet metal sleeves by concrete placement operations.

4. Sleeves shall not be installed in structural members, except where indicated or approved.

5. Furnish sleeves to masonry contractor in advance of masonry work. Furnish dimensioned drawings indicating exact location of sleeves.

6. Each sleeve shall extend through its respective wall, floor, or roof, and shall be cut flush with each surface, except as indicated otherwise.

7. Sleeves passing through floors in wet areas, such as areas containing plumbing fixtures or floor drains shall extend a minimum of 4” above the finished floor. Duct sleeves in wet areas shall be enclosed with 4” concrete curb.

8. Unless otherwise indicated, sleeves shall be of a size to provide a minimum of ¼” clearance all around between the pipe and inside of sleeve, or between jacket over insulation and sleeve.

9. Provide membrane clamping devices on sleeves for waterproof floors.

10. Sleeves are not required in existing structures where openings through existing concrete floors, walls, or roof are core drilled.

B. Pipe Seals:

1. Provide pipe seals for all pipe sleeves used in:


a) External walls

b) Floor slabs on grade

c) Upper floors where spillage of liquid may occur

2. Install in accordance with manufacture’s instructions to fill entire annular space between pipe and sleeve and provide watertight seal.

3.4 THERMAL EXPANSION CONTROL

A. The basis of design for the contract documents is the use of grooved end piping with Victaulic Style 177/177N/77 flexible couplings to control thermal expansion in piping systems over 2-inches. The couplings shall be installed as accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions to accommodate the required expansion. Expansion in piping systems up to and including 2-inch shall be via 90-deree elbows and “Z” joints. If alternate piping materials or systems are used it shall be the Contractors responsibility to provide the required methods of thermal expansion control utilizing the methods and materials specified herein or otherwise approved.

B. Install pipe expansion loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to absorb total compression or tension that will be produced during anticipated change in temperature.

C. Pipe alignment guide installation:

1. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins pipe expansion loops.

2. Install pipe alignment guides on piping elsewhere as indicated.

3. Secure pipe alignment guides to building substrate.

D. Pipe anchor installation:

1. Install pipe anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connect equipment

2. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS D1.1.

3. Construct concrete pipe anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated.

4. Where pipe expansion joints are indicated, install pipe anchors according to expansion unit manufacturer’s written instructions to control movement to compensators.

5. Pipe Anchor Spacing: Where not otherwise indicated, install pipe anchors at ends of principal pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Preset anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.

E. Use grout to form flat bearing surface for pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe anchors that are installed on or in concrete

3.5 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. All vibration isolators must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers written instructions and all certified submittal data.

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.


C. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified.

D. The contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, duct or conduit that makes rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. "Building" includes, but is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls.

E. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building.

F. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact with equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be brought to the architects/engineers attention prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible Contractors expense.

G. Bring to the architects/engineers attention any discrepancies between the specifications and the field conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior to installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the responsible Contractors expense.

H. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible.

I. Fans and other moving machinery shall be isolated from foundations as recommended in Chapter 42 in the 1995 ASHRAE-HVAC Applications handbook. If necessary to secure proper loading, fans or machinery shall be mounted on concrete slabs above supports. Driving motor and driven unit shall be mounted on one rigid base, which may be concrete slab referred to.

J. All vibration isolators shall be leveled and aligned squarely below the mounting points of the supported equipment. Isolators for equipment with bases shall be located on the sides of the bases that are parallel to the equipment shaft (generally, the long axis) unless this is not possible because of physical restraints.

K. Unless otherwise indicated, there shall be a minimum operating clearance of 1 inch between inertia bases or structural steel frames and the concrete housekeeping pad or floor beneath the equipment. The clearance space shall be checked by the Contractor to ensure that no construction debris has been left to short circuit or restrict the proper operation of the vibration isolation system.

L. Vibration isolation hangers shall be positioned as high as possible in the hanger rod assembly, and so that the hanger housings may rotate a full 360 degrees without touching any object. Hanger rods shall not contact any object, which would short out the vibration isolation systems. Parallel running pipes may be hung together on a trapeze, which is isolated from the building. Do not mix vibration isolated and non-vibration isolated pipes on the same trapeze.

M. Attention must be paid to movements of piping caused by expansion and contraction.

N. On completion of installation of all isolation materials and before start up of isolated equipment all debris shall be cleared from areas surrounding and from beneath all isolated equipment, leaving equipment free to move on the isolation supports.

O. Inspection:

1. The Contractor shall notify the local representative of the vibration isolation materials manufacturer prior to installing any vibration isolation devices. The Contractor shall seek the representatives’ guidance in any installation procedures he is unfamiliar with.


2. The local representative of the vibration isolation materials manufacturer shall conduct periodic inspections of the installation of materials herein specified, and shall report in writing to the Contractor any deviations from good installation practice observed.

3. On completion of installation of all noise and vibration isolation devices herein specified, the local representative of the isolation materials manufacturer shall inspect the complete system and report in writing any installation errors, improperly selected isolation devices, or other fault in the system that could affect the performance of the system.

4. The installing Contractor shall submit a report to the Engineer including the manufacturer representative’s final report indicating all isolation reported as properly installed or requiring correction, and include a report by the Contractor on steps taken to properly complete the isolation work.

P. The vibration isolator manufacturer shall make final selections of all vibration isolator types and deflections. The following schedule shall be considered as a minimum requirement:

1. Piping (where noted on drawings):

a) Pre-compressed Spring Hangers

2. Ductwork (where noted on drawings):

a) Spring Duct Hangers

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Refer to Division 7 for additional requirements.

B. Contractor shall install sleeves and firestopping at all openings in fire and smoke rated barriers around equipment installed under this contract to maintain the rating of the barrier.

C. Firestopping materials shall maintain the fire rating of the barrier in accordance with the requirements of NFPA, the local governing bodies and other applicable codes.

D. Refer to the Architectural drawings for locations and ratings of all fire and smoke rated barriers.

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15080-1

SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Ductwork Insulation, Jackets, and Lining

2. Piping Insulation, Jackets, and Accessories

B. Related Sections:

1. All Division 15 Sections


A. Applicator: Company specializing in mechanical insulation application with minimum five years experience on similar type projects.

B. Materials: UL listed; flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with latest editions of ASTM E84, NFPA 255, UL 181, and UL 723.

C. Energy Efficiency: Conform to thickness specified herein and to meet minimum requirements of North American Insulation Manufacturer’s Association (NAIMA), ASHRAE Standard 90.1 and applicable addendums and Local Codes.

D. Installation: All insulation shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions and recommendations, National Insulation Contractors Association (NICA) National Standards, NFPA 90A and 90B.

E. All adhesives, cements, finishes, jackets, etc., shall be UL listed or labeled for use as applied to insulation and designed specifically for use in the insulation.


A. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):

1. Standard 90.1

2. Standard 62

B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C1071

2. ASTM C916

3. ASTM G21

4. ASTM G22

5. ASTM C423

6. ASTM C518

7. ASTM E119, Standard Method of Fire Test of Building Construction and Materials; 2 hour External Total Engulfment Test


8. ASTM E814, Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 90A

2. NFPA 90B

3. NFPA 259

4. NFPA 96

D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA):

1. HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible (HVAC DCS)

E. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA):

1. Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard (FGDLS)

F. International Nonwovens & Disposables Association (INDA):

1. IST 80.6

G. Underwriters laboratories Inc., (UL):

1. UL 723, Surface Burning Characteristics per ASTM E 84

2. UL 1978, First Edition of the Standard for Grease Ducts

3. UL 1479, Through-Penetration Firestop Test

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. For the purposes of this specification section the following definitions shall be referenced:

1. Low Pressure Supply Air Ductwork: All supply air ductwork associated with constant volume systems and all ductwork downstream of variable air volume (VAV) boxes.

2. Medium Pressure Supply Air Ductwork: All supply air ductwork from the outlet of VAV air handling units to the inlet connection of VAV boxes.

3. Return Air Ductwork: All return air ductwork associated with both constant volume and VAV systems.

4. Transfer and Relief Air Ductwork: All ductwork that is not directly connected to an air moving device (air handling unit, fan coil unit, fan, etc.) and meant to allow air transfer between spaces or out of the building by gravity or space pressure differential.

5. Outside Air Ductwork: All intake ductwork from the wall louver or roof hood to the connection to the air handling device or mixed air ductwork connection. Shall include plenums behind louvers and hoods.

6. Concealed Location: Not visible from a normally occupied space, i.e. above a solid ceiling or in a chase. Dedicated mechanical/electrical rooms shall not be considered normally occupied spaces.

7. Exposed Location: Visible from a normally occupied space, i.e. in areas without a solid ceiling or in areas with no ceiling.

8. Interior: Inside the building envelope. Not necessarily inside the building insulation envelope – refer to Non-Conditioned Space definition.

9. Exterior: Outside the building envelope, whether directly exposed to the elements or not.


10. Non-Conditioned Space: Inside the building envelope but outside the building insulation envelope, i.e. attics and crawlspaces.

11. Hygienic Areas: Areas listed in the AIA Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities that are prohibited from having duct liner. These areas include but are not necessarily limited to: operating rooms, delivery rooms, LDR rooms, nurseries, protective environment rooms and critical care units.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1 and Section 15050.

B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Armacell LLC

B. CertainTeed Corporation

C. Johns Manville Insulations

D. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH

E. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation

F. RBX Industries, Inc

2.2 DUCT INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Wrap:

1. Basis of Design: Johns Manville Microlite Type 75

2. ASTM C1290 Type III, commercial grade, noncombustible.

3. Maximum installed k value of 0.27 (R 3.7) per inch at 75 degrees F mean temperature.

4. Minimum density of 0.75 pounds per cubic foot.

5. Vapor barrier jacket: Foil-Scrim-Kraft (FSK); ASTM C1136, type II; maximum vapor transmission rate of .02 perms.

6. Maximum operating temperature 250 degrees F.

B. Rigid Glass Fiber Board:

1. Basis of Design: Johns Manville 814 Spin-Glas

2. ASTM C612 Type 1A & 1B; commercial grade; noncombustible.

3. Maximum k value of 0.23 (R 4.3) per inch at 75 degrees F mean temperature.

4. Minimum density of 3.0 pounds per cubic foot (concealed locations), 6.0 pounds per cubic foot density (exposed locations).

5. Vapor barrier jacket: All Service Jacket (ASJ) or Foil-Scrim-Kraft (FSK); ASTM C 1136, type II; maximum vapor transmission rate of .02 perms.


6. Maximum operating temperature 450 degrees F.

C. Closed Cell Elastomeric Sheet:

1. Basis of Design: Armacell LLC

2. ASTM C534 grade 1 type II; flexible, smooth outer surface, water resistant, non-absorbent, resistant to microbial growth, ozone resistant.


4. Maximum vapor transmission rate of .08 perms.

5. Maximum operating temperature of 220 degrees F.

2.3 PIPE INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Molded Glass Fiber:

1. Basis of Design: Johns Manville Micro-Lok AP-T

2. ASTM C547 Type I; commercial grade; noncombustible.



5. Adhesive self-sealing lap closure.

6. Vapor barrier jacket: All Service Jacket (ASJ); ASTM C 1136, type I; maximum vapor transmission rate of .02 perms.

7. Fitting Covers: One piece, pre-molded high impact PVC type with fiberglass insulation inserts; 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed; UV resistant for outdoor applications; maximum k value of 0.26 at 75 degrees F mean temperature; maximum operating limits of –20 to 150 degrees F.

B. Closed Cell Elastomeric Molded Type:

1. Basis of Design: Armacell LLC

2. ASTM C534, grade 1, type I; flexible, smooth outer surface, water-resistant, non-absorbent, ozone resistant.


4. Maximum vapor transmission rate of .08 perms.


3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work in compliance with manufacturer recommendations.

B. Commencement of installation indicates acceptance of site conditions by the installer.

C. Ensure that testing of piping and fittings, equipment and ductwork has been successfully completed prior to installing insulation.


D. Ensure that piping and fittings surfaces, equipment and ductwork are clean and dry and that insulation is clean and dry, and in good mechanical condition with all factory applied vapor or weather barriers intact and undamaged.

E. Install materials and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

F. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics and insulation cements during and after installation for a minimum period of 24 hours.

G. Replace existing pipe equipment and/or duct insulation disturbed in making new connections with new insulation and covering to match existing.

H. On cold surfaces where a vapor barrier must be maintained, insulation shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken moisture and vapor seal. All hangers, supports, anchors, or other projections that are secured to cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation.

I. Where insulated pipes or ducts pass through sleeves or openings, the full specified thickness of the insulation shall pass through the sleeve or opening. Where fire-stopping material is used in fire rated walls, butt insulation tight to fire and smoke stopping material or to collar at wall and floor penetrations. Where fire and smoke-stopping material does not extend full depth of sleeve insulation shall extend inside sleeve to butt against fire and smoke stopping material.

J. The finished installation shall present a neat and acceptable appearance which includes but is not limited to: all jackets smooth, all vapor barriers sealed properly, no evidence of “ballooning” of the jackets, or sagging insulation, all valves, damper, gauges, unions, etc. accessible. The Owner’s representative shall be the final judge of acceptance of workmanship.

K. Insulation shall be protected from moisture and weather during storage and installation.

3.2 DUCT INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Butt joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

B. Maintain the integrity of factory applied vapor barrier jacketing on all insulation, protecting it against puncture, tear or other damage. Coat staples with suitable sealant to maintain vapor barrier integrity. Seal all cut ends of insulation to maintain vapor barrier.

C. Duct insulation at fire dampers shall be extended over supporting angle iron and sealed to wall.

D. The tops of all diffusers shall be insulated similar to the connecting ductwork to prevent condensation.

E. Penetrations: Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and similar ductwork penetrations. Continue insulation vapor barrier through penetrations.

F. Install flexible glass fiber blanket insulation to obtain specified R-value. Insulation shall not be compressed more than 25% of its nominal thickness.

G. Duct insulation in all healthcare facilities shall be in full compliance with the AIA Guidelines for Design and Construction of Health Care Facilities.


3.3 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Low-pressure supply air ductwork, square & rectangular:

1. Flexible glass fiber blanket: 1” thick (minimum installed R 4.2).

B. Low-pressure supply air ductwork, round, 14 inch diameter and smaller in concealed locations:


2. Closed cell elastomeric sheet: 1” thick (minimum R 3.7).

C. Return air ductwork:


D. Hygienic Areas, all supply, return and transfer air ductwork:


2. Rigid glass fiber board: 1” thick (minimum R 4.3).


E. Medium-pressure supply air ductwork, concealed locations:




F. Medium-pressure supply air ductwork exposed locations:



G. Outdoor air intake ductwork, concealed locations:

1. Flexible glass fiber blanket: 1-1/2” thick (minimum installed R 6.3).

2. Rigid glass fiber board: 1-1/2” thick (minimum R 6.4).

3. Closed cell elastomeric sheet: 1-1/2” thick (minimum R 5.5).

H. Outdoor air intake ductwork, exposed locations:

1. Rigid glass fiber board: 1-1/2” thick (minimum R 6.4).


I. Non-conditioned spaces (all services up to 200 degrees F):




J. Exterior (all services up to 200 degrees F including lined ductwork):


a) Aluminum jacket: .016” thick, smooth finish.


b) Stainless steel jacket: Type 304; .010” thick; smooth finish.


a) Coated with suitable weather barrier mastic reinforced with fabric or mesh as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.


a) Coated with two coats of suitable weather barrier mastic reinforced with fabric or mesh as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.

b) Armatuff 25 elastomeric with TPR laminated onto surface.

K. Excluded locations (insulation not required):

1. Relief air ductwork

2. Exhaust air ductwork

a) Exception: Exhaust air ductwork upstream of an energy recovery device shall be insulated if the ductwork is located in a non-conditioned space or exterior.

3. Acoustically insulated ductwork

3.4 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation subsequent to installation of heat tracing, testing, and acceptance tests.

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. Butt insulation joints firmly to ensure complete, tight fit over all piping surfaces.

C. All piping below ambient temperatures must have a continuous vapor barrier. All joints, seams and fittings must be sealed. Maintain in the integrity of factory applied vapor barrier jacketing on insulation, protecting it against puncture, tears or other damage. Coat staples with suitable sealant to maintain vapor barrier integrity. Seal all cut ends of insulation to maintain vapor barrier.

D. In exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

E. On insulated piping with vapor barrier, insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, expansion joints and roof drain bodies.

F. On insulated piping without vapor barrier and piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such locations.

G. Fittings: Cover valves, fittings, and similar items in each piping system using one of the following:

1. Mitered section of insulation equivalent in thickness and composition to that installed on straight pipe runs.

2. Insulation cement equal in thickness to the adjoining insulation.

3. PVC fitting covers with insulating material equal in thickness and composition to adjoining insulation.

H. Penetrations: Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and similar penetrations. Continue insulation vapor barrier through penetrations.


I. Joints: Butt pipe insulation against hanger inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3” wide vapor barrier tape or band over butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints, and seal joints with 3” wide vapor barrier tape or bank. Taper and seal all pipe insulation ends regardless of service.

J. Supports:

1. Support piping systems 3” in diameter or less using saddles of the proper length and spacing under the insulation, per the insulating manufacturer’s requirements.

2. Support piping systems larger than 3” in diameter using high density inserts such as wood or foam with sufficient compressive strength. At temperatures exceeding 200 degrees F, use calcium silicate pipe insulation for high density inserts.

3. Where pipe shoes and roller supports are required, insert insulation in the pipe shoe to minimize pipe heat loss. Where possible, size the pipe shoe to be flush with the outer pipe insulation diameter.

4. Install Armafix IPH pipe hangers at all pipe supports when using closed cell elastomeric rubber pipe covering.

K. For piping exposed in mechanical rooms, insulation shall be protected for a height of 6' above the floor by the use of appropriate thickness of PVC jacketing or metal jacketing.

L. For piping exposed to the elements, jacketing for glass fiber insulation shall be outdoor weatherable PVC; minimum .020" thick or .016" thick aluminum or stainless steel with a factory applied moisture barrier. Fitting covers shall be of similar materials. The insulation and jacketing shall be held firmly in place with a friction type Z lock or a minimum 2" overlap joint. All joints shall be sealed completely along the longitudinal seam and installed so as to shed water. All circumferential joints shall be sealed by use of preformed butt strips; minimum 2" wide or a minimum 2" overlap. Butt strips shall overlap the adjacent jacketing a minimum 1/2" and be completely weather sealed. PVC Jacketing shall be limited to a maximum 20" OD of the insulation when exposed to direct sunlight. PVC jacketing shall be coated with a water based paint to enhance UV protection. A 6" to 10" unsealed slide joint shall be installed every 25 to 30 lineal feet for the thermal expansion of the pipe and jacketing. Where distance between fittings exceeds 8 lineal feet, an unsealed slide joint shall be installed. Insulation thickness for piping covered by PVC Jacketing shall be such that the surface temperature of the PVC does not exceed 125°F. Finish cellular foam with weather resistant coating in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.5 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Heating systems conveying up to 200°F:

1. Up to and including 1-1/2” nominal pipe size:

a) Molded glass fiber: 1” thick (minimum R 4.3).

b) Closed cell elastomeric 1” thick (minimum R 3.7).

2. 2” and larger nominal pipe size:


b) Closed cell elastomeric 2” thick (minimum R 7.4).

B. Cooling systems conveying up to 39°F (refrigerant and brine piping):



a) Closed cell elastomeric: 1” thick (minimum R 3.7).


a) Closed cell elastomeric: 1-1/2” thick (minimum R 5.5).

C. Cooling systems conveying from 40°F to 55°F (chilled water):


a) Closed cell elastomeric: 1” thick (minimum R 3.7).


a) Closed cell elastomeric: 1-1/2” thick (minimum R 5.5).

D. Plumbing systems conveying up to 55°F (cold water, storm sewer, chilled water, cooling condensate drain):

1. Up to 1” nominal pipe size:

a) Molded glass fiber: 1/2” thick (minimum R 2.1).

b) Closed cell elastomeric: 1/2” thick (minimum R 1.8).

2. 1-1/4” to 2” nominal pipe size:


b) Closed cell elastomeric: 3/4” thick (minimum R 2.7).

3. 2-1/2” and larger nominal pipe size:


b) Closed cell elastomeric: 1” thick (minimum R 3.7).

E. Plumbing systems conveying 80°F and above (hot water, hot water recirculating):

1. Up to 2” nominal pipe size:


b) Closed cell elastomeric: 1” thick (minimum R 3.7).

2. 2-1/2” and larger nominal pipe size:

a) Molded glass fiber: 1-1/2” thick (minimum R 6.4).

b) Closed cell elastomeric: 1-1/2” thick (minimum R 5.5).

F. Exterior and non-conditioned spaces including attics and crawlspaces (all services):

1. Molded glass fiber:

a) Up to 2” nominal pipe size: Additional 1” thickness over service listed above.

b) 2-1/2” and larger nominal pipe size: Additional 2” thickness over service listed above.

2. Closed cell elastomeric:

a) Up to 2” nominal pipe size: Additional 1” thickness over service listed above.

b) 2-1/2” and larger nominal pipe size: Additional 2” thickness over service listed above.

G. Excluded locations (insulation not required):


1. Condenser water piping

2. Refrigerant hot gas piping

3. PVC condensate drainage piping

4. Plumbing waste piping

5. Plumbing vent piping

6. Vertical storm water piping (excepting runouts to individual roof drains)

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15300-1

SECTION 15300 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. General Requirements

2. Submittals

3. Products:

a) Aboveground Piping Materials

b) Escutcheons

c) Hangers

d) Flexible Ceiling Sprinkler Piping System

e) Valves – General

f) Sprinklers


1. General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specifications

2. Section 15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Sprinkler System:

1. Modification of existing system

2. Systems shall comply with the following National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13 occupancy requirements:

a) Light hazard

b) Ordinary hazard, group 1


A. All materials utilized shall be UL Listed and Factory Mutual Approved.

B. All materials installed shall adhere to the manufacturer’s installation guidelines.

C. Design and installation of this project shall be accomplished by a qualified Fire Protection Contractor who meets the following qualifications:

1. Engages on a regular and full time basis in the design and installation of automatic sprinkler systems and other fire protection equipment.

2. Employ or contract on a regular basis for system design, a professional engineer or at least one person having passed the elements for a NICET Level III rating in automatic sprinkler design.

3. Be certified in the state to do fire protection work.


4. Can provide on-site emergency service within six hours notification.


A. Sprinkler systems shall be designed and installed in full compliance with:

1. Pennsylvania Uniform Construction Code

2. International Fire Code

3. NFPA 13

B. Obtain permits, pay fees associated with utility connections and request inspections from Authority Having Jurisdiction.

C. Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) listings and National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association’s (NEMA) stamps or seals shall be evidenced where applicable to electrical apparatus forming parts of the Fire Protection equipment.

D. Updated Standards: At the request of the Architect and/or Engineer, Contractor or governing authority, submit a change order proposal where an applicable industry code or standard has been revised and reissued after the date of contract documents and before performance of the work affected. The Architect and/or Engineer will decide whether to issue a change order to proceed with the updated standard.

1.5 SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. The system design shall be the sole responsibility of the Fire Protection Contractor. These specifications and associated drawings are provided for the purposes conveying the design intent for the project to the Fire Protection Contractor and shall not be considered all-inclusive nor limiting the possible system configurations.

B. The Fire Protection Contractor shall verify requirements with jurisdictional authorities, i.e.: Insurance authority or Underwriter, Fire Department or Marshal, or Building Department. The Fire Protection Contractor shall be responsible for providing a system complete, functional and acceptable to Jurisdictions without penalty of any type to the insurance premium rate. The Fire Protection Contractor shall be completely responsible for all aspects of coordination with other sections of these specifications and drawings. No change will be issued for lack of coordination or lack of verification of requirements of Jurisdictional Authorities.

C. A statement from the Owners insurance authority or services office stating “no penalty” or listing “penalties” must be provided by the Contractor prior to final payment. Penalties listed and attributable to the fire protection system shall be corrected without additional cost to the Owner of his agents.

D. System shall be hydraulically calculated per NFPA 13.

E. All calculations shall include flow tests results. Flow tests shall be performed by this Contractor and verified by the Fire Department, Water Co., Architect, and Engineer. Prior flow tests on file with jurisdictional agencies may be used in lieu of new flow tests only when previous test has been made within six months of project start date.

F. Contractor shall use 95% of flow test pressure data as the base in performance of the hydraulic calculations unless most restrictive values are required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction.


G. Hydraulic calculations and drawings shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review. Drawings shall show hydraulic reference points, hydraulically most remote area, and proof by example that area shown is in fact the hydraulically most remote.

1. Area and densities shall conform to NFPA 13 or jurisdictional authority requirements.

2. System static shall be calculated from the flow test elevation to the highest sprinkler.

3. Standpipe systems shall be designed to provide the waterflow rate required at a minimum residual pressure of 100 PSI at the outlet of the hydraulically most remote hose connection.

H. Provide all trim and accessories, inlet, alarms, switches, valves, manifolds, and cabinets required.

I. The Fire Protection Contractor shall be responsible for accurate measurements, coordination with other trades, required offsets, scheduling, timely submittals, materials delivery and job manning, and construction schedules.

J. Sprinklers shall be located in a uniform manner and aligned with lights and diffusers. Sprinklers shall be placed center of tile with a 3 inch tolerance. Architect shall approve sprinkler head locations and shall be allowed to add a reasonable number of additional sprinklers.

K. Each floor shall be zoned separately as indicated on drawings.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit shop drawings, product data and hydraulic calculations to Authority Having Jurisdiction, Fire Marshall, Owners’ Insurance Underwriter or other regulatory agency and obtain approvals prior to submission to Engineer for review. Include approval documentation with submission to Engineer. Engineer will not review submittals without written documentation of approval by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

B. Flow Test: The contractor shall perform a flow test to verify the capacity of the available water supply. The flow test shall be performed in accordance with all applicable codes and procedures. The Engineer and all other parties as required by local codes shall witness the flow test.

C. Submit shop drawings under the provisions of Section 15050.

D. Shop Drawings: Indicate detailed pipe layout, supports, components, accessories, sizes, and hydraulic calculations.

E. Product Data:

1. Aboveground Piping Materials

2. Valves – General

3. Sprinklers

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit operation and maintenance data to requirements of Section 15050.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. This contractor shall warrant the materials and workmanship used in the erection of this installation and as herein specified, and he is to make good defects in same which become apparent


within one year from the date of substantial completion of work, providing such defects are due to faulty materials or workmanship, and not to misuse of apparatus by the Owner, his employees, or tenants.

B. The equipment and materials manufacturers are expected to recognize that they are responsible for the failure of their products to perform in accordance with data furnished by them or their authorized representatives, as well as misrepresentation of such data. When the products have been installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s published or written instructions and recommendations, and such products fail, then the contractor and the manufacturers are responsible for replacement of the products and all associated work and materials without additional cost to the Owner.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Fire-protection system materials and equipment provided under this section shall conform to the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or the Factory Mutual (FM P7825) Approval Guide.

B. Products with UL label or seal or listing in UL 6, and products with FM label or listed in the FM P7825 Approval Guide are acceptable fire-protection system materials and equipment.

C. Materials and equipment furnished shall be compatible with existing system.

2.2 ABOVEGROUND PIPING MATERIALS

A. Black Carbon Steel:

1. Pipe 1/8 through 1-1/2 inches: Schedule 40 furnace butt weld black-carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, or ASTM A 135/A 135M, Type F furnace butt welded; Schedule 10 conforming to ASTM A 135/A 135M, Grade B.

2. Pipe through 8 inches, where indicated: Schedule 40 seamless or electric-resistance welded black carbon steel, conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 135/A 135M, Type E (electric-resistance welded), Grade B, or Type S (seamless), Grade B; Schedule 10 conforming to ASTM A 135/A 135M, Grade B.

3. Pipe 10 inches and over: Schedule 30 black carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E (electric-resistance welded) or Type S (seamless).

4. Unions: 300-pound per square inch gage (psig) working steam pressure (wsp) female, screwed, black malleable iron, with ground joint and brass-to-iron seat conforming to ASME B16.39.

5. Standard pipe couplings: Extra-heavy screwed black steel.

6. Grooved pipe couplings (all sizes): 175-psig minimum working pressure with a housing fabricated in two or more parts of black malleable-iron castings. Coupling gasket shall be molded of synthetic rubber, conforming to requirements of ASTM D 2000. Coupling bolts shall be oval-neck, track-head type with heavy hexagonal nuts, conforming to ASTM A 183.

7. Fittings 4 inches and under: 175-psig working pressure, cast iron, screwed, conforming to ASTM A 126, Class A, and ASME B16.4.


8. Fittings 6 inches and larger: 175-psig working pressure, cast iron, conforming to ASTM A 126, Class A, screwed, conforming to ASME B16.4, or flanged, conforming to ASME B16.1.

9. Fittings 8 inches and under: Couplings shall be rolled-groove type or mechanical locking (push-on) type. Grooves for rolled-groove type shall be rolled only; cut grooving will not be allowed. Rolled grooves shall be dimensionally compatible with the couplings.

10. Grooved fittings (all sizes): 175-psig working pressure fittings used with grooved couplings shall be fabricated of black malleable-iron castings. If a manufacturer's standard-size malleable-iron fitting pattern is not available, fabricated fittings shall be used; fittings shall be fabricated from Grade B seamless-steel pipe and long-radius seamless welding fittings, with wall thickness to match pipe, conforming to ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

B. Galvanized Carbon Steel:

1. Pipe 1/2 through 10 inches and where indicated: Schedule 40 seamless or electric resistant welded galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E (electric-resistance welded) or Type S (seamless). Type F (furnace butt welded continuous welded) is acceptable for sizes less than 2 inches.

2. Fittings (all sizes): 150-psig working pressure banded, galvanized, malleable, screwed, conforming to ASTM A 197/A 197M and ASME B16.3.

3. Fittings 2-1/2 inches and over: 125-psig working pressure cast-iron flanges and flanged fittings conforming to ASTM A 126, Class A and to ASME B16.1

4. Grooved pipe couplings (all sizes): 175-psig minimum working pressure with a housing fabricated in two or more parts of galvanized malleable-iron castings. Coupling gasket shall be molded of synthetic rubber, conforming to requirements of ASTM D 2000. Coupling bolts shall be oval-neck, track-head type with heavy hexagonal nuts, conforming to ASTM A 183.

5. Grooved fittings (all sizes): 175-psig working pressure fittings used with grooved couplings shall be fabricated of galvanized malleable-iron castings. If a manufacturer's standard-size malleable-iron fitting pattern is not available, fabricated fittings shall be used; fittings shall be fabricated from Grade B seamless steel pipe and long-radius seamless welding fittings, with wall thickness to match pipe, conforming to ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

6. Unions 2 inches and under: 300-psig working pressure female, screwed, galvanized malleable iron, with brass-to-seat and ground joint.

C. Copper Tubing: Copper tube shall conform to ASTM B 88M ASTM B 88, Types L and M.

1. Copper Fittings and Joints: Cast copper alloy solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform to ASME B16.18 and wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings shall conform to ASME B16.22 and ASTM B 75M ASTM B 75. Cast copper alloy fittings for flared copper tube shall conform to ASME B16.26and ASTM B 62. Brass or bronze adapters for brazed tubing may be used for connecting tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment. Extracted brazed tee joints produced with an acceptable tool and installed as recommended by the manufacturer may be used. Grooved mechanical joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 125 psig service and shall be the product of the same manufacturer. Grooved fitting and mechanical coupling housing shall be ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536. Gaskets for use in grooved joints shall be molded synthetic polymer of pressure responsive design and shall conform to ASTM D 2000 for circulating medium up to 110 degrees C 230 degrees F. Grooved


joints shall conform to AWWA C606. Coupling nuts and bolts for use in grooved joints shall be steel and shall conform to ASTM A 183.

2. Joints in copper pipe shall be brazed except wet pipe light hazard with ordinary temperature sprinklers or wet pipe ordinary hazard, group 1, where piping is concealed may be soldered joints.

D. CPVC Pipe: ASTM F 442, SDR 13.5 (light hazard occupancies as defined in NFPA 13, and ordinary hazard rooms of light hazard occupancies not to exceed 400 sq. ft.).

1. Fittings: ASTM F 438 schedule 40, or ASTM F 439, schedule 80, CPVC.

2. Joints: ASTM F 493, solvent weld specially formulated for use in fire protection systems.

2.3 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Escutcheons shall be manufactured from nonferrous metals and shall be chrome-plated, except when AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel is provided. Metals and finish shall conform to ASME A112.18.1.

B. Escutcheons shall be one-piece type where mounted on chrome-plated pipe or tubing and one-piece or split-pattern type elsewhere. Escutcheons shall have provisions consisting of internal spring tension devices or setscrews to maintain a fixed position against a surface.

2.4 HANGERS

A. System piping shall be substantially supported to the building structure. The installation of hangers and supports shall adhere to the requirements set forth in NFPA 13. Materials used in the installation or construction of hangers and supports shall be listed and approved for such application. Hangers or supports not specifically listed for service shall be designed and bear the seal of a professional engineer.

B. Piping system components and miscellaneous supporting elements shall be provided, including, but not limited to, building-structure attachments; supplementary steel; hanger rods, stanchions, and fixtures; vertical-pipe attachments; horizontal-pipe attachments; restraining anchors; and guides. Supporting elements shall be suitable for stresses imposed by systems pressures and temperatures, natural, and other external forces.

C. Supporting elements shall be FM approved or UL listed and shall conform to ASME B31.1, MSS SP-58, and ASME B16.34.

D. Building-Structure Attachments:

1. Anchor Devices, Concrete and Masonry:

a) Anchor devices shall conform to FS FF-S-325:

1) Group I: Shield, expansion (lead, bolt, and stud anchors)

2) Group II: Shield, expansion (bolt anchors), Type 2, Class 2, Style 1 or 2

3) Group III: Shield, expansion (self drilling tubular expansion shell bolt anchors

4) Cast-in floor-mounted equipment-anchor devices shall provide adjustable positions.

5) Powder-actuated anchoring devices shall not be used to support mechanical-systems components.


2. Beam Clamps:

a) Beam clamps shall be center-loading Types 21, 28, 29, and 30, UL listed, cataloged, and load-rated commercially manufactured products.

b) Type 20 beam clamps shall be used for pipe 2 inches and under.

c) Two Type 25 beam clamps shall be used per point of pipe support.

3. Inserts, Concrete:

a) Concrete inserts shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of MSS SP-58 for Type 18 and ASME B16.34. When applied to piping in sizes 2-inch iron pipe size (ips) and larger, and where otherwise required by imposed loads, a 1-foot length of 1/2-inch reinforcing rod shall be inserted and wired through wing slots.

E. Horizontal-Pipe Attachments:

1. Single Pipes:

a) Piping in sizes up to and including 2-inch ips shall be supported by Type 1, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, or 12 solid, split-ring, or band type attachments.

b) Piping in sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be supported by Type 1, 2, 3, or 4 attachments or with Type 41 or Type 49 pipe rolls.

2. Parallel Fire-Protection Pipes:

a) Trapeze hangers fabricated from approved structural steel shapes, with U-bolts, shall be used when so specified. Structural-steel shapes shall conform to supplementary steel requirements or the support shall be of commercially available, approved proprietary-design rolled steel.

F. Vertical-Pipe Attachments:

1. Single vertical-pipe attachments shall be Type 8.

G. Hanger Rods and Fixtures:

1. Only circular solid cross section rod hangers shall be used to connect building structure attachments to pipe-support devices. Pipe, straps, or bars of equivalent strength shall be used for hangers.

2. Turnbuckles, swing eyes, and clevises shall be provided as required by support system to accommodate temperature changes, pipe accessibility, and adjustment for load and pitch.

H. Supplementary Steel:

1. Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing members or where structural members are used in lieu of commercially rated supports, such supplementary steel shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with AISC/AISI 121.

2.5 FLEXIBLE CEILING SPRINKLER PIPING SYSTEM

A. In areas requiring seismic design, or at the Contractor’s option, a flexible piping connection system shall be provided for both suspended and sheetrock ceilings.

B. System shall be FlexHead System series 2000 as manufactured by Flexhead Industries or equal.

C. All flexible piping connections shall include a fully welded (non-mechanical fittings), braided, leak tested sprinkler drop with a minimum internal corrugated hose diameter of 1inch; and a one-


piece multi-port ceiling bracket with removable attachment hub and integrated snap-on clip-ends positively attached to the ceiling using tamper resistant screws.

D. System shall be available in lengths of 2 feet to 6 feet and shall include multi-port ceiling mounting bracket with hardware and welded, leak tested 1” braided flexible sprinkler drop. The Fire Protection Contractor shall be responsible for the furnishing and installation of sprinklers and the final connections, filling and testing of the ceiling system to sprinkler branches, sub-mains, mains, etc., all in accordance to NFPA guidelines.

E. All flexible piping systems shall be UL Listed and FM Approved and suitable for their intended use.

2.6 VALVES - GENERAL

A. Gate Valves

1. UL listed, 175 psi working pressure.

2. Sizes up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, outside screw and yoke wedge, solder or threaded ends.

3. Sizes over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, solid wedge, flanged or grooved ends.

B. Ball valves, 2 inches and under, shall be FM approved, rated 300 psi, with provisions to wire or lock handle in place where critical alarm function may be isolated.

C. Butterfly Valves


2. Bronze body, stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive, and integral indicating device.

3. Cast or ductile iron body, chrome plated ductile iron or bronze disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer or lug ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive, and integral indicating device.

4. Butterfly valves, 6-, 8-, and 10-inch shall be FM approved, rated 175 psi, cast-iron bodied wafer type, with elastomer liners and seals. Liners shall act as gasket between standard piping-system flanges. Operator shall be worm-gear type, with permanently lubricated gears, and oiltight and watertight case, complete with handle and automatic position indication.

D. Check Valves


2. Sizes up to and including 2 inches: Bronze swing disc, solder or screwed ends.

3. Sizes over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged or wafer ends.

E. Drain Valves


2. Bronze compression stop with nipple and cap or hose.

3. Brass ball valve with cap and chain, ¾” hose thread.


2.7 SPRINKLERS

A. UL listed, FM approved, with fusible link or glycerin filled bulb. Fire sprinklers shall be of one manufacturer throughout the building. No mixing of sprinkler brands shall be permitted.

B. Sprinkler temperature ratings, K-factors, types and styles shall be as indicated on the drawings and/or as required for the specific service. All sprinklers shall be quick response type unless specifically noted otherwise or specifically prohibited by Code.

C. In general the sprinkler type and finish shall comply with the following unless the drawings specifically indicate otherwise:

1. Finished Ceiling Areas (suspended and hard type): MATCH EXISTING

a) Pendant Sprinkler:

1) Standard

2) Recessed

3) Concealed

b) Finish:

1) Rough Brass

2) Polished Brass

3) Chrome Plated

4) Enameled

5) Sprinklers shall have matching escutcheons.

2. Exposed Areas: MATCH EXISTING

a) Upright Sprinkler.

b) Sprinkler Finish:

1) Rough Brass

2) Polished Brass

3) Chrome Plated

4) Enameled

D. Guards: Provide as indicated on the drawings and/or as required for the specific service. Finish shall match sprinkler.

3 EXECUTION


A. All fire protections systems shall be designed and installed in complete compliance with all applicable NFPA requirements. Nothing contained in these specifications or on the associated drawings shall be construed to conflict with the NFPA requirements. The NFPA requirements shall take precedence over theses contract documents in all cases of discrepancy.

B. Install all material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.


3.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Piping shall run parallel with the lines of the building. Piping and components shall be spaced and installed so that a threaded pipe fitting may be removed between adjacent pipes and so that there will be not less than 1/2 inch of clear space between the finished surface and other work and between the finished surface of parallel adjacent piping.

B. Ream pipe and tube ends to full inside diameter. Remove burrs and bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

C. Remove scale and foreign material, inside and outside, before assembly.

D. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetration to maintain fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required.

E. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. Offset around ductwork. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.

F. Elbows used in welded pipe lines shall be factory made radius fittings. Long radius bends shall be used where indicated or required. Saddle tees or weld-o-lets may be used in branches in welded pipe lines where the branch is a maximum of one-half the size of the main. Where the branch is larger than one-half the size of the main, factory made tee fittings shall be used. All fittings used for welding shall have beveled ends and shall be standard weight.

G. Reductions in pipe sizes shall be made with one-piece tapered reducing fittings. Bushings are prohibited.

H. Hangers on different adjacent service lines running parallel shall be arranged to be in line with each other and parallel to the lines of the building.

I. Load rating for pipe-hanger supports shall be based on all lines filled with water. Deflection per span shall not exceed slope gradient of pipe. Schedule 40 and heavier ferrous pipe supports shall be in accordance with the following minimum rod size and maximum allowable hanger spacing. For concentrated loads such as valves, allowable span shall be reduced proportionately:

PIPE SIZE (INCHES) ROD SIZE (INCHES) HANGER SPACING FOR STEEL PIPE (FEET)

Up to 1” 3/8” 8 1-1/4” 3/8” 12 1-1/2” 3/8” 15 2” to 4” 3/8” 15 5” 1/2” 15 6” 1/2” 15 8” 1/2” 15

J. Vertical risers shall be supported at the base where possible and at intervals specified. Piping shall be guided for lateral stability as necessary. Clamps shall be placed under fittings wherever possible. Carbon-steel pipe shall be supported at each floor at not more than 15-foot intervals for pipe 2 inches and smaller, and at not more than 20-foot intervals for pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger.

K. Piping shall be securely supported with allowance for thrust forces and thermal expansion and contraction and shall not be subject to mechanical, chemical, vibrational, or other damage, in conformance with ASME B31.1.


3.3 SOUND STOPPING

A. Effective sound stopping and adequate operating clearance shall be provided to prevent structure contact where piping penetrates walls, floors, or ceilings; into occupied spaces adjacent to equipment rooms; where similar penetrations occur between occupied spaces; and where penetrations occur from pipe chases into occupied spaces. Occupied spaces include space above ceiling where no special acoustic treatment of ceiling is provided. Penetrations shall be finished to be compatible with surface being penetrated.

B. Sound stopping and vapor-barrier sealing of pipe shafts, and large floor and wall openings may be accomplished by packing with properly supported mineral fiber insulation or by foaming-in-place with self-extinguishing, 2-pound density polyurethane foam to a depth not less than 6 inches. Foam shall be finished with a rasp. Vapor barrier shall be not less than 1/8-inch thickness of vinyl mastic applied to visible and accessible surfaces. Where fire stopping is a consideration, only mineral fiber shall be used, and, in addition, openings shall be covered with 16-gage sheet metal.

3.4 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves shall be provided where piping passes through roofs, masonry or concrete walls, or floors.

B. Sleeves passing through steel decks shall be continuously welded or brazed to the deck.

C. Sleeves extending through floors, roofs, or load-bearing walls, and sleeves through fire barriers shall be continuous and fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded anchor lugs. Other sleeves shall be formed by molded linear polyethylene liners or similar materials that are removable. Diameter of sleeves shall be large enough to accommodate pipe and jacketing without touching the sleeve, and additionally shall provide a minimum 3/8-inch clearance. Sleeve shall accommodate mechanical and thermal motion of pipe to preclude transmission of vibration to walls and generation of noise.

D. Space between a pipe and the inside of a pipe sleeve or a construction surface penetration shall be packed solid with mineral fiber conforming to ASTM C 592 wherever the piping passes through firewalls, equipment-room walls, floors, and ceilings connected to occupied spaces, and other locations where sleeves or construction-surface penetrations occur between occupied spaces. Where sleeves or construction-surface penetrations occur between conditioned and unconditioned spaces, the space between a pipe, bare or insulated, and the inside of a pipe sleeve or construction-surface penetration shall be filled with an elastomer calk to a depth of 1/2 inch. Surfaces to be calked shall be oil and grease-free.

E. Exterior wall sleeves shall be calked watertight with lead and oakum or mechanically expandable chloroprene inserts with mastic-sealed components.

3.5 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Escutcheons shall be provided at penetrations of piping into finished areas. Where finished areas are separated by partitions through which piping passes, escutcheons shall be provided on both sides of the partition. Where suspended ceilings are installed, plates shall be provided at the underside only of such ceilings. Escutcheons shall be chrome plated in occupied spaces and shall conceal openings in building construction. Escutcheons shall be firmly attached.

3.6 VALVES

A. Provide gate valves for shut off or isolating service. Where approved, butterfly valves may be used in lieu of gate valves.


B. Provide drain valves at main shut off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.

C. Pipe drain valves to nearest floor drain or to discharge point as indicated on drawings.

D. Properly lettered metal signs shall be attached to each control valve.

3.7 SPRINKLERS

A. Protection:

1. Apply temporary tape or paper cover to ensure sprinkler heads do not receive paint finish.

2. Ensure concealed sprinkler head cover plates do not receive field paint finish.

B. Provide sample for approval to the Architect prior to installation.

C. Furnish twenty (20) spare sprinkler heads. The heads shall be packed in a suitable container and shall be representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and temperature rating heads installed. In addition to the spare heads, the Contractor shall furnish not less than two special sprinkler head wrenches.

3.8 SYSTEM TESTING

A. Prior to acceptance of the work, completed systems shall be tested in the presence of the Authority Having Jurisdiction, Owner’s insurance underwriter and Architect/Engineer. Upon approval, certificates of testing shall be provided.

B. Hydrostatically test entire system in accordance with NFPA requirements. Only potable water shall be used for testing.

C. Air Tests, Valve-Operating Tests, and Drainage Tests shall be performed for dry-pipe systems.

D. Full-flow System Operating Tests shall be performed for standpipe systems.

E. Contractor shall prepare and maintain test records of piping-system tests. Records shall show personnel responsibilities, dates, test-gage identification numbers, ambient and test-water temperatures, pressure ranges, rates of pressure drops, and leakage rates. Each test acceptance shall require the signature of the Owner.

3.9 INSTRUCTION TO OPERATING PERSONAL

A. The sprinkler contractor and his subcontractor shall satisfactorily complete the systems so that they are functional and operating to the satisfaction of the Architect. All systems, and their controls must be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Architect.

B. The contractor shall furnish the services of qualified personnel, approved by the Architect and thoroughly familiar with the completed installation, to instruct the permanent operating personnel in the proper operation of all systems included under this contract, and the proper care of all equipment and apparatus. These services shall be furnished after the operation of the building has been taken over by the Owner.

C. When instructions are provided under this contract, the contractor shall have in his possession three copies of an identifying letter which shall list the names of the contractor's qualified instruction personnel, including manufacturer's representatives and subcontractors that will be giving the instructions. Likewise on this same letter, spaces shall be provided for the Owner's


personnel who will receive the instructions. After instructions have been given and received for each system, the contractor's representatives and subcontractors shall sign and date the letter, and the Owner's personnel shall sign and date the letter acknowledging that they have received adequate instructions for operating and maintaining the systems and equipment. One signed copy shall be delivered to the Owner, one copy to the Architect, and one copy shall be retained by the contractor.

D. In addition to the verbal instructions outlined above, the contractor and his manufacturers' repre-sentatives and subcontractors shall furnish written basic instructions indicating the proper operation of each system and associated equipment. Each manufacturer shall also submit a brochure on his equipment, including instructions on operation of each system and associated equipment. Each manufacturer shall also submit a brochure on his equipment, including instructions on operation, lubrication, recommended spare parts, and instructions on preventative, routine, and breakdown maintenance.

E. The contractor shall combine the written instructions and the manufacturer's equipment brochures in complete volumes with hard back binders which shall be turned over to the Owner before final acceptance of the contract work. The contractor shall obtain two copies of a singed receipt from the Owner for the written instructions and equipment brochures. One copy of the receipt shall be delivered to the Architect and one copy retained by the contractor.

F. It is the intent that this entire system, with its complement of equipment and auxiliary equipment operate properly in accordance with the design concept and functional intent. It is also the intent that the Owner be given complete instructions for the proper operation and maintenance of the entire system.

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15400-1

SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING SYSTEMS

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe and Fittings for:

a) Domestic Water Systems

b) Sanitary Sewer Systems

c) Storm Sewer Systems

2. Flanges, Unions and Couplings

3. Valves - General

a) Angle

b) Ball

c) Butterfly

d) Check

e) Drain

f) Gate

g) Globe



2. Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation


A. Materials: All materials shall comply with the requirements and referenced standards listed in the Pennsylvania Uniform Construction Code and all applicable Local codes.

B. Installation: All materials shall be installed in compliance with the Pennsylvania Uniform Construction Code and all applicable Local codes.

C. All materials specified in this section that are in contact with the potable water system shall be certified as being "lead free".

D. Qualify soldering processes, procedures, and solderers for copper and copper alloy pipe and tube in accordance with ASTM B 828.

E. Qualify brazing processes for copper and copper alloy pipe and tube according to ANSI/AWS C3.4.

1. Qualify brazing procedures and brazer performance in accordance with either Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, or AWS B2.2.

F. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 American Standard Tapered Pipe Threads for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with requirements of Division 1 and Section 15050.

B. Pipe and Fittings: Include product description, service usage and size range.



B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, cleaning procedures, replacement parts list, and maintenance and repair data.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Up to and including 6 inch diameter: ASTM B88, type L, hard drawn temper, seamless copper tube.

1. Fittings:

a) Cast copper alloy, solder-joint pressure fittings: ASME B16.18.

b) Wrought copper, solder-joint pressure fittings: ASME B16.22.

c) Wrought copper, grooved-end fittings: ASTM B75 or ASTM B152.

d) Bronze sand-cast copper alloy, grooved-end fittings: ASTM B584-87. Grooved copper products copper tubing sized only. Flaring of pipe ends to IPS dimensions is not allowed.

e) Mechanically formed outlets:

1) Manufacturer’s standard written procedure for forming tee/branch outlet from pipe and tube shall be followed. Mechanically formed outlets shall have a collar with a height not less than three times the thickness of the branch tube wall. The branch shall be notched to conform to the inner curve of the run and shall be dimpled or otherwise impeded from penetrating the run pipe/tube. The branch tube shall also be dimpled or otherwise marked to indicate the location of the notches with respect to the run. Such marking shall be at a sufficient distance from the face of the joint to allow for a visual point of inspection after the joint is brazed. All joints constructed using this method shall be brazed.

2) Mechanically formed outlets shall be prohibited for one-to-one joints and on pipe sizes over 3 inch.

2. Joints:

a) Soldered joints: ASTM B32 and NSF 61, ASTM B813 flux.

b) Brazed joints: ANSI/AWS A5.8 and NSF 61, ANSI/AWS A5.31 flux.

c) Mechanical couplings: ASTM A395, ASTM A536 or ASTM A47.

B. 3 inch diameter and larger: Ductile iron pipe, AWWA C115, threaded flanges or AWWA C606 grooved end, cement mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C104.


1. Fittings and joints:

a) Ductile iron fittings, flanged, rubber gasketed, AWWA C110, cement mortar lined.

b) Ductile iron or cast iron, AWWA C606 grooved end, AWWA C110, cement mortar lined, for use with AWWA couplings, complete with gasket, grade “M”, UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 potable water service.

C. 3 inch diameter and larger: stainless, steel, ASTM A312, schedule 10, type 304L.


a) Butt-welded stainless, steel fittings, Type 316, schedule 10, conforming to ANSI B16.9.

b) Mechanical joints, stainless steel housing type 316, EDPM gasket, UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF 61 potable water service, roll grooved stainless steel fittings, ASTM A403, schedule 10, type 316,

2.2 SANITARY SEWER AND VENT PIPING, BURIED AND ABOVE GRADE

A. Cast iron pipe and fittings, service weight: Hub and Spigot Cast Iron pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from gray cast iron and shall conform to ASTM A-74. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. Joints can be made using a compression gasket manufactured from an elastomer meeting the requirements of ASTM C-564 and ASTM C-1563 or lead and oakum. All pipe and fittings to be produced by a single manufacturer and are to be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and local code requirements. The system shall be hydrostatically tested after installation to 10 ft. of head (4.3 psi maximum).

B. Cast iron pipe and fittings, hubless (above grade only): Hubless Cast Iron pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from gray cast iron and shall conform to ASTM A-888 and CISPI Standard 301. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. Hubless Couplings shall conform to CISPI Standard 310 for standard couplings or ASTM C-1540 for heavy duty couplings where indicated. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM C-564. All pipe and fittings to be produced by a single manufacturer and are to be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and local code requirements. Couplings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s band tightening sequence and torque. Tighten bands with a properly calibrated torque limiting device. Test the system hydrostatically after installation to 10 ft. of head (4.3 psi maximum).

C. Copper tubing: Type DWV, ASTM B306, drawn temper, seamless.

1. Fittings:

a) Cast copper alloy, solder-joint, DWV drainage fittings: ASME B16.23.

b) Wrought copper, solder-joint, DWV drainage fittings: ASME B16.29.

2. Joints:

a) Soldered joints: ASTM B32, ASTM B813 flux.

b) Brazed joints: ANSI/AWS A5.8, ANSI/AWS A5.31 flux.

D. Steel Pipe and Fittings (vent piping, above grade, only): galvanized pipe, ASTM A53, standard weight, malleable iron fittings, ANSI B16.3, threaded joints conforming to ASME B1.20.1.


E. PVC Schedule 40 Solid Wall Pipe and DWV Fitting System (PVC Schedule 40 Cellular / Foam Core Pipe is not acceptable): Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from PVC compound with a cell class of 12454 per ASTM D-1784 and conform with National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standard 14. Pipe shall be iron pipe size (IPS) conforming to ASTM D-1785 and ASTM D-2665. Fittings shall conform to ASTM D-2665. All pipe and fittings to be produced by a single manufacturer and to be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and local code requirements. Solvent cements shall conform to ASTM D-2564, primer shall conform to ASTM F-656. The system shall be intended for non-pressure drainage applications where the temperature will not exceed 140°F. All thermoplastic pipe underground shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D 2321.

2.3 STORM SEWER PIPING, BURIED AND ABOVE GRADE

A. Cast iron pipe and fittings, service weight: Hub and Spigot Cast Iron pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from gray cast iron and shall conform to ASTM A-74. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. Joints can be made using a compression gasket manufactured from an elastomer meeting the requirements of ASTM C-564 and ASTM C-1563 or lead and oakum. All pipe and fittings to be produced by a single manufacturer and are to be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and local code requirements. The system shall be hydrostatically tested after installation to 10 ft. of head (4.3 psi maximum).

B. Cast iron pipe and fittings, hubless (above grade only): Hubless Cast Iron pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from gray cast iron and shall conform to ASTM A-888 and CISPI Standard 301. All pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. Hubless Couplings shall conform to CISPI Standard 310 for standard couplings or ASTM C-1540 for heavy duty couplings where indicated. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM C-564. All pipe and fittings to be produced by a single manufacturer and are to be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and local code requirements. Couplings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s band tightening sequence and torque. Tighten bands with a properly calibrated torque limiting device. Test the system hydrostatically after installation to 10 ft. of head (4.3 psi maximum).

C. Copper tubing: Type DWV, ASTM B306, drawn temper, seamless.

1. Fittings:

a) Cast copper alloy, solder-joint, DWV drainage fittings: ASME B16.23.

b) Wrought copper, solder-joint, DWV drainage fittings: ASME B16.29.



2. Joints:

a) Soldered joints: ASTM B32, ASTM B813 flux.

b) Brazed joints: ANSI/AWS A5.8, ANSI/AWS A5.31 flux.

c) Mechanical couplings: ASTM A395 and ASTM A536.

D. Steel Pipe and Fittings (above grade, only): galvanized pipe, ASTM A53, standard weight, malleable iron fittings, ANSI B16.3, threaded joints conforming to ASME B1.20.1, or galvanized ductile iron fittings, grooved joints..


E. PVC Schedule 40 Solid Wall Pipe and DWV Fitting System (PVC Schedule 40 Cellular / Foam Core Pipe is not acceptable): Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from PVC compound with a cell class of 12454 per ASTM D-1784 and conform with National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standard 14. Pipe shall be iron pipe size (IPS) conforming to ASTM D-1785 and ASTM D-2665. Fittings shall conform to ASTM D-2665. All pipe and fittings to be produced by a single manufacturer and to be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and local code requirements. Solvent cements shall conform to ASTM D-2564, primer shall conform to ASTM F-656. All thermoplastic pipe underground shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D 2321.

2.4 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

A. Pipe Size 2 Inch and Under: Malleable iron unions for ferrous piping; soldered bronze unions for copper pipe; stainless steel threaded unions with press-on gasketed ends for stainless steel piping.

B. Pipe Size over 2 Inch: Forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping. If grooved piping is used, grooved end flange adapters may be used. Flange adapters shall be ASTM A395 and A536 ductile iron, with pressure responsive gasket.

C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Ductile iron housing, composition pressure responsive sealing gasket, zinc electroplated steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

D. Dielectric Connections:

1. 2 inches and smaller:

a) Dielectric union, ANSI B16.39, galvanized or plated steel with threaded or copper solder connections, water impervious isolation barrier, 250 psi.

b) Dielectric waterway fitting, galvanized, plated steel or ductile iron with threaded or grooved connections, NSF/FDA listed water impervious liner, 250 psi.

2. 2 1/2 inches and larger:

a) Dielectric flange union, gray iron ANSI B16.42, or bronze ANSI B16.24 with threaded or copper solder connections, water impervious isolation barrier and bolt sleeves, 175 psi.


2.5 VALVES - GENERAL

A. Asbestos packing is not acceptable.

B. All valves of the same type shall be products of a single manufacturer.

C. Provide gate and globe valves with packing that can be replaced with the valve under full working pressure.

D. Provide chain operators for valves 4 inches and larger when the centerline is located 8 feet or more above the floor or operating platform.

E. Valves with optional features such as union ends, drain ports or special configurations shall be acceptable provided they meet or exceed the specifications for the basic components.

F. Angle Valves


1. Valves Up to 3 Inch:

a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model S&T-311

b) Bronze body, screw-in bonnet, rising stem and hand wheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with back seating capacity, MSS-SP-80, 125 psi.

2. Valves 4 inch and larger:

a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model F-838-31

b) Ductile iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends, MSS-SP-85, 125 psi.

G. Ball Valves


a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model S&T-585-70

b) Bronze body, two-piece, full port, blowout proof stem, chrome plated brass ball, reinforced TFE seats, lever handle, solder or threaded ends, 600 psi, Federal Specification MSS-SP-110.

c) Valves used for chilled water service shall have insulated handles equal to NIBCO “NIB-SEAL”

H. Butterfly Valves

1. Valves 2-1/2 inch and larger:

a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model WD 2000

b) Ductile iron body, aluminum bronze disc, 416 stainless steel stem, EPDM seat, wafer design, lever operator to 6 inch size, gear operated and crank for 8 inches and above, 200 psi, Federal Specification MSS-SP-67.

c) Grooved Piping:

1) For IPS Steel Pipe: Grooved end butterfly valves with ductile iron body and disc core ASTM A395 and A536. Disc synthetic rubber coated with compatible material for intended service, maximum working pressure 300 pounds psi grooved ends for connection with mechanical grooved couplings.

2) For Copper Tubing: Grooved end butterfly valves with bronze body per CDA 836 and ductile iron disc core ASTM A395 and A536. Disc synthetic rubber coated with compatible material for intended service, maximum working pressure 300 pounds psi grooved ends for connection with mechanical grooved couplings.

I. Check Valves



b) Bronze body and trim, regrinding type, Y-pattern swing type, vertical or horizontal installation, solder or threaded ends, MSS-SP-80, 125 psi.


a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model F-918


b) Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, horizontal swing type, renewable seat and disc, vertical or horizontal installation, flange connections, MSS-SP-71, 200 psi.

c) Grooved Piping:

1) Ductile iron, ASTM A395 and A536 body, stainless steel shaft and pin, aluminum bronze single disc with PPS coated seat or synthetic rubber coated ductile iron single disc with weld-in nickel seat,, spring assisted, grooved ends for connection with mechanical grooved couplings, 300 psi. Consult manufacturer for appropriate elastomeric seal for intended service.

J. Drain Valves

1. Ball Style:

a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model S&T-585-70-HC

b) Bronze body, two-piece, full port, blowout proof stem, chrome plated brass ball, reinforced TFE seats, lever handle, solder or threaded inlet, ¾” hose thread outlet with brass cap and chain, 600 psi, Federal Specification MSS-SP-110.

K. Gate Valves

1. Valves Up to 3 Inch: Use prohibited.


a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model F-617-O

b) Iron body, bolted bonnet, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel operator, OS&Y, solid wedge, flanged or grooved ends MSS-SP-70, 125 psi.

L. Globe Valves



b) Bronze body, union bonnet, rising stem and hand wheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, integral seat, solder or screwed ends, MSS-SP-80, 125 psi.


a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model F-718-B

b) Iron body, bolted bonnet, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel operator, OS&Y, renewable seat and plug-type disc, flanged ends, MSS-SP-85, 125 psi.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Install all piping and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.

2. The Plumbing Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, fees, charges and inspections required by any authority having jurisdiction and pay all other costs in connection with the work unless specifically specified otherwise in Division 1.

B. Piping - General


1. All piping shall be located as shown on the drawings, connecting to all plumbing fixtures and other equipment requiring water, and with outlets adjacent to the equipment furnished under other contracts requiring connections.

2. All piping shall be concealed in walls, partitions or above ceilings, except in Mechanical Equipment Rooms and elsewhere as noted.

3. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

4. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

C. Piping – Domestic Water

1. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.

2. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

3. Install piping free of sags, bends and kinks.

4. Install fittings for all changes of direction and branch connections in hard drawn copper tube. Mechanically formed outlets shall be prohibited for one-to-one joints and on pipe sizes over 3 inches.

a) Manufacturer certified technicians only shall fabricate mechanically formed outlets. Proof of certification shall be made available upon request.

5. All copper tubing shall be cut with square ends, and all burrs and fins removed. Tubing shall be carefully handled and protected to avoid damage. Any pipe cut, dented or otherwise damaged must be replaced with new pipe by the contractor.

6. Threaded-to-soldered end adapters or fittings shall be installed for making connections to threaded piping and equipment.

7. All water piping shall be installed so as to insure circulation and so that all air will be vented from the lines through the various faucets.

8. The sizes given in fixture schedule refer to the sizes of the concealed piping serving the individual fixtures. Where the fixture connections or supply pipes are specified to be of a smaller size, proper reducing fittings shall be installed at wall or floor line, and where larger size connections are shown or specified the piping shall be at least the same size.

D. Piping – Sanitary Sewer, Vent and Storm Sewer

1. All changes in pipe size in cast iron soil, waste and drain lines shall be made with reducing fittings or recessed reducers. "Y" fittings and 1/8 and 1/16 bends or combination "Y" and 1/8 bends shall be used where possible. Sanitary longsweep bends and tees may be used for connection of branch lines to fixtures.

2. All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe.

3. Installation of all cast iron piping and fittings shall be in complete compliance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook and applicable Codes.

4. Provide restraints for hubless piping in complete compliance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook, manufacturers’ installation instructions and applicable Codes.


5. All copper tubing shall be cut with square ends, and all burrs and fins removed. Tubing shall be carefully handled and protected to avoid damage. Any pipe cut, dented or otherwise damaged must be replaced with new pipe by the contractor.

6. All buried sanitary, vent and storm water piping located under the building shall be minimum 2” in size.

7. Minimum slope of all soil, waste and drain lines shall be in accordance with applicable Code but no less than the following:

Pipe Size in Inches Minimum Slope in Inches per Foot 2-1/2 or less 1/4

3 to 6 1/8 8 or larger 1/16

8. All trenches for hub and spigot type pipe shall be excavated to proper grade and recessed at

bell ends, so that pipes will have a solid bearing and shall be backfilled in a manner to secure a stable surface, and be approved by the Engineer.

9. All thermoplastic pipe underground shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D 2321.

10. Plastic piping shall not be located in return air plenums.

11. Plastic piping shall not be located in areas that regularly receive high temperature discharge water (in excess of 140 degrees). All piping located in boiler rooms, commercial kitchens and commercial laundries shall be cast iron or copper.

12. All parts of the drainage system shall be vented as shown or required by the Plumbing Inspection Department. Vent stacks and the ends of all soil and waste stacks shall be extended through roof as noted.

13. All vent piping shall be sloped to drain to the drainage piping.

14. Flashing sleeves with copper roof flashing shall be provided by the Plumbing Contractor.

15. All exterior, underground, nonmetallic piping shall include pipe identification measures as follows:

a) Copper Tracer Wire: Copper tracer wires consisting of number 14 AWG solid, single conductor, insulated copper wire shall be installed in the trench with all piping to permit location of the pipe with electronic detectors. The wire shall not be spiraled around the pipe nor taped to the pipe. Wire connections are to be made by stripping the insulation from the wire and soldering with rosin core solder. Solder joints shall be wrapped with rubber tape and electrical tape. At least every 1000 feet, provide a 5 pound magnesium anode attached to the main tracer wire by solder joint shall be wrapped with rubber tape and with electrical tape. An anode shall be attached at the end of each line.

b) Magnetic markers may be used in lieu of copper tracer wire to aid in future pipe locating. Generally, install markers on 20-foot centers. If pipe is in a congested piping area, install on 10-foot centers. Prepare as-built drawing indicating exact location of magnetic markers.

E. Flanges, Unions and Couplings

1. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

2. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever joining dissimilar metals. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe.

3. Special casting with flanged ends shall be provided for connections to valves.


F. Valves - General

1. Install ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

2. Install globe, ball, or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

3. Provide adequate space for actuator handle in the open and closed position and for packing replacement.

4. Provide extended operator shafts as required to clear piping insulation.

5. Valves shall be provided at all branches from the hot and cold water mains and risers.

3.2 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. New or repaired potable water systems shall be purged of deleterious matter and disinfected prior to utilization. The method to be followed shall be that prescribed by the health authority or water purveyor having jurisdiction or, in the absence of a prescribed method, the procedure described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652, or as described in this section. This requirement shall apply to “on-site” or “in-plant” fabrication of a system or to a modular portion of a system.

1. The pipe system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at the points of outlet.

2. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million (50 mg/L) of chlorine, and the system or part thereof shall be valved off and allowed to stand for 24 hours; or the system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million (200 mg/L) of chlorine and allowed to stand for 3 hours.

3. Following the required standing time, the system shall be flushed with clean potable water until the chlorine is purged from the system.

4. The procedure shall be repeated where shown by a bacteriological examination that contamination remains present in the system.

3.3 TESTS

A. General: All new, altered, extended or replaced plumbing shall be left uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Where such work has been covered or concealed before it is tested and approved, it shall be exposed for testing

B. Equipment, Material and Labor for Tests: All equipment, material and labor required for testing a plumbing system or part thereof shall be furnished by the installing contractor.

C. Methods of Testing Drainage and Vent Systems:

1. Rough Plumbing: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open jointed drain tile, the piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems shall be tested upon completion of the rough piping installation by water or air and proved watertight. The Governing Authority may require the removal of any cleanout plugs to ascertain if the pressure has reached all parts of the system. Either of the following test methods shall be used:

a) Water Test: The water test shall be applied to the drainage system either in its entirety or in sections after rough piping has been installed. If applied to the entire system, all openings in the piping shall be tightly closed, except the highest opening, and the system filled with water to point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly plugged except the


highest opening of the section under test, and each section shall be filled with water, but no section shall be tested with less than 10-foot head of water. In testing successive sections, at least the upper 10-feet of the next preceding section shall be tested, so that no joint or pipe in the building (except the uppermost 10-feet of the system) shall have been submitted to a test of less than a 10-foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system or in the portion under test for at least 15 minutes before inspection starts; the system shall then be tight at all points.

b) Air Test: The air test shall be made by attaching an air compressor testing apparatus to any suitable opening and after closing all other inlets and outlets to the system, forcing air into the system until there is a uniform gauge pressure of 5 pounds per square inch or sufficient to balance a column of mercury 10 inches in height. This pressure shall be held without introduction of additional air for a period of at least 15 minutes.

c) DO NOT TEST PVC OR CPVC SYSTEMS WITH COMPRESSED AIR.

2. Finished Plumbing: After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, their connections shall be tested and proved gas and watertight. The following test method shall be employed:

a) Final Test for Gas and Water Tightness: The final test for gas and water tightness of the completed drainage and vent system shall be made by a smoke test. It shall be made by filling all traps with water and then introducing into the entire system a pungent, thick smoke produced by one or more smoke machines. When the smoke appears at stack openings on the roof, they shall be closed and a pressure equivalent to a one-inch water column shall be built and maintained for the period of the inspection. Where the Administrative Authority, due to practical difficulties or hardships, finds that a smoke test shall not be performed, a peppermint test shall be substituted in lieu thereof. Such peppermint test shall be conducted by the introduction of two ounces of oil of peppermint into the roof terminal of every line or stack to be tested. The oil of peppermint shall be followed at once by ten quarts of hot (160 degree F or higher) water whereupon all roof vent terminals shall be sealed. A positive test, which reveals leakage, shall be the detection of the odor of peppermint at any trap or other point on the system. Oil of peppermint or persons whose person or clothes have come in contact with oil of peppermint shall be excluded from the test area.

D. Methods of Testing Building Sewers: The building sewer shall be tested by insertion of a test plug at the point of connection with the public sewer. It shall then be fitted with water under a head of not less than 10 feet. The water level at the top of the test head of water shall not drop for at least 15 minutes.

E. Methods of Testing Water Supply Systems: Upon completion of a section or of the entire water supply system, it shall be tested and proved tight under a water pressure not less than the working pressure under which it is to be used. The water used for tests shall be obtained from a potable source of supply.

F. Defective Plumbing: Where there is reason to believe that the plumbing system of the building has become defective, it shall be subjected to test or inspection, and any defects found shall be corrected.

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 15510-1

SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING AND SPECIALTIES

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe and fittings for:

a) Chilled Water Systems

b) Condenser Water Systems

c) Heating Hot Water Systems

d) Equipment Drains

e) Glycol Systems

2. Flanges, Unions and Couplings

3. Valves - General

a) Angle

b) Ball

c) Butterfly

d) Check

e) Drain

f) Gate

g) Globe



2. Section 15080 - Mechanical Insulation


A. Materials: All materials shall comply with the requirements and referenced standards listed in the International Mechanical Code and all applicable Local codes.

B. Installation: All materials shall be installed in compliance with the International Mechanical Code and all applicable Local codes.

C. Conform to ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with requirements of Division 1 and Section 15050.

B. Include product description, model, dimensions, component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, finishes, connections to other equipment and piping, performance data, and power requirements.


2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CHILLED WATER, CONDENSER WATER, EQUIPMENT DRAIN, GLYCOL, HOT WATER HEATING PIPING

A. Steel: ASTM A53 Grade B, seamless or ERW, Schedule 40.


a) Up to and including 2 inch diameter:

1) Butt welding: ANSI B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping.

2) Forged steel, socket welding or threaded: ANSI B16.11.

3) Screwed: 150 pound malleable iron, ANSI B16.3. 125 pound cast iron, ANSI B16.4, may be used in lieu of malleable iron. Bushing reduction of a single pipe size, or use of close nipples, is not acceptable.

4) Grooved mechanical couplings: Ductile iron, ASTM A395 and A536, cast in two or more parts, securely held together by two or more zinc electroplated track-head, square, or oval-neck bolts, ASTM A183. Gaskets: Synthetic rubber product recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the intended service.

5) Grooved end fittings: Ductile iron, ASTM A395 andA536; forged steel ASTM A234; or fabricated from ASTM A53 or A106 carbon steel, designed to accept grooved mechanical couplings of the same manufacturer. Tap-in type branch connections are acceptable.

b) 2-1/2 inch diameter and larger:

1) Butt welding fittings: ANSI B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping. Elbows shall be long radius type, unless otherwise noted.

2) Welding flanges and bolting: ANSI B16.5: Weld neck or slip-on, plain face, with 1/8 inch thick full face neoprene gasket suitable for 220 °F. Contractor's option: Convoluted, cold formed 150 pound steel flanges, with teflon gaskets; class 150 ductile iron flange adapters for grooved end piping may be used on grooved or shouldered end pipe and fittings.

3) Flange bolting: Carbon steel machine bolts or studs and nuts, ASTM A307, Grade B.

4) Grooved mechanical couplings: Ductile iron, ASTM A395 and A536, cast in two or more parts, securely held together by two or more zinc electroplated track-head, square, or oval-neck bolts, ASTM A183. Gaskets: Synthetic rubber product recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the intended service.

5) Grooved end fittings: Ductile iron, ASTM A395 andA536; forged steel ASTM A234; or fabricated from ASTM A53 or A106 carbon steel, designed to accept grooved mechanical couplings of the same manufacturer. Tap-in type branch connections are acceptable.

2. Welded Branch and Tap Connections: Forged steel weldolets, or branchlets and thredolets may be used for branch connections up to one pipe size smaller than the main.


Forged steel half-couplings, ANSI B16.11 may be used for drain, vent and gage connections.

B. Copper water tube: ASTM B88, type L, drawn temper, seamless.

1. Fittings:

a) Cast copper alloy, solder-joint pressure fittings: ASME B16.18.

b) Wrought copper, solder-joint pressure fittings: ASME B16.22.



2. Joints:

a) Soldered joints: ASTM B32 and NSF 61, ASTM B813 flux.

b) Brazed joints: ANSI/AWS A5.8 and NSF 61, ANSI/AWS A5.31 flux.

c) Mechanical couplings: ASTM A395 and A536.

2.2 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

A. Pipe Size 2 Inch and Under: Malleable iron unions for ferrous piping; soldered bronze unions for copper pipe. ANSI B16.39; stainless steel threaded unions with press-on gasketed ends for stainless steel piping.

B. Pipe Size over 2 Inch: Forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flanges for copper piping. If grooved piping is used, grooved end flange adapters may be used. Flange adapters shall be ASTM A395 and A536 ductile iron, with pressure responsive gasket.

C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Ductile iron housing, composition pressure responsive sealing gasket, zinc electroplated steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

D. Water hose connection adapter: Brass, pipe thread to 20 mm (3/4 inch) garden hose thread, with hose cap nut.

E. Dielectric Connections:

1. 2 inches and smaller:

a) Dielectric union, ANSI B16.39, galvanized or plated steel with threaded or copper solder connections, water impervious isolation barrier, 250 psi.


2. 2 1/2 inches and larger:

a) Dielectric flange union, gray iron ANSI B16.42, or bronze ANSI B16.24 with threaded or copper solder connections, water impervious isolation barrier and bolt sleeves, 175 psi.

b) Dielectric waterway fitting, galvanized or plated steel or ductile iron with threaded or grooved connections, NSF/FDA listed water impervious liner, 250 psi. Screwed or grooved joints.

F. Pipe Thread: ANSI B1.20.


G. Lubricant or Sealant: Oil and graphite or other compound approved for the intended service.

2.3 VALVES

A. General:

1. All valves of the same type shall be products of a single manufacturer.

2. Asbestos packing is not acceptable.

3. Provide gate and globe valves with packing that can be replaced with the valve under full working pressure.

4. Valves with optional features such as union ends, drain ports or special configurations shall be acceptable provided they meet or exceed the specifications for the basic components.

5. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

6. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

7. Bronze Valves: 2 inch and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.

8. Ferrous Valves: 2-1/2 inch and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.

9. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

10. Valve Actuator Types:

a) Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves 8 inch and larger.

b) Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

c) Handlever: For quarter-turn valves 6 inch and smaller except plug valves.

d) Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.

e) Chainwheel: Provide chain operators for valves 4 inches and larger when the centerline is located 8 feet or more above the floor or operating platform.

11. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

a) Gate Valves: With rising stem.

b) Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation and memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

c) Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

B. Angle Valves

1. Valves up to 3 inch:


b) Bronze body, screw-in bonnet, rising stem and hand wheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with back seating capacity, MSS-SP-80, 125 psi.



a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model F-838-31

b) Ductile iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends, MSS-SP-85, 125 psi.

C. Ball Valves


a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model S&T-585-70

b) Bronze body, two-piece, full port, blowout proof stem, chrome plated brass ball, reinforced TFE seats, lever handle, solder or threaded ends, 600 psi, Federal Specification MSS-SP-110.

c) Valves used for chilled water service shall have insulated handles equal to NIBCO “NIB-SEAL”

D. Butterfly Valves


a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model WD 2000

b) Ductile iron body, aluminum bronze disc, 416 stainless steel stem, EPDM seat, wafer design, lever operator to 6 inch size, gear operated and crank for 8 inches and above, 200 psi, Federal Specification MSS-SP-67.

c) Grooved Piping:

1) For IPS Steel Pipe: Grooved end butterfly valves with ductile iron body and disc core ASTM A395 and A536. Disc synthetic rubber coated with compatible material for intended service, maximum working pressure 300 pounds psi grooved ends for connection with mechanical grooved couplings.

2) For Copper Tubing: Grooved end butterfly valves with bronze body per CDA 836 and ductile iron disc core ASTM A395 and A536. Disc synthetic rubber coated with compatible material for intended service, maximum working pressure 300 pounds psi grooved ends for connection with mechanical grooved couplings.

E. Check Valves



b) Bronze body and trim, regrinding type, Y-pattern swing type, vertical or horizontal installation, solder or threaded ends, MSS-SP-80, 125 psi.


a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model F-918

b) Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, horizontal swing type, renewable seat and disc, vertical or horizontal installation, flange connections, MSS-SP-71, 200 psi.

c) Grooved Piping:

1) Ductile iron, ASTM A395 and A536 body, stainless steel shaft and pin, aluminum bronze single disc with PPS coated seat or synthetic rubber coated ductile iron single disc with weld-in nickel seat, spring assisted, grooved ends for connection with mechanical grooved couplings, 300


psi. Consult manufacturer for appropriate elastomeric seal for intended service.

F. Drain Valves

1. Boiler Drain Style:

a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model 74

b) Rough bronze body, rising stem and hand wheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, ½ or ¾ inch solder or screwed end inlet, hose thread outlet with screwed brass cap, 125 psi.

2. Ball Style:

a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model S&T-585-70-HC

b) Bronze body, two-piece, full port, blowout proof stem, chrome plated brass ball, reinforced TFE seats, lever handle, solder or threaded inlet, ¾” hose thread outlet with brass cap and chain, 600 psi, Federal Specification MSS-SP-110.

G. Gate Valves

1. Valves up to 2 inch (steam systems only):

a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model T-174-SS

b) Bronze body, ASTM B 61 with bronze union-ring bonnet with stainless steel seat, copper-silicon bronze stem, stainless steel solid wedge disc, malleable iron hand wheel, threaded ends MSS SP-80, 300 psi.


a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model F-617-O

b) Iron body, bolted bonnet, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel operator, OS&Y, solid wedge, flanged or grooved ends MSS-SP-70, 125 psi.

H. Globe Valves



b) Bronze body, union bonnet, rising stem and hand wheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, integral seat, solder or screwed ends, MSS-SP-80, 125 psi.


a) Basis of Design: NIBCO model F-718-B

b) Iron body, bolted bonnet, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel operator, OS&Y, renewable seat and plug-type disc, flanged ends, MSS-SP-85, 125 psi.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. The drawings show the general arrangement of pipe and equipment but do not show all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect pipes to equipment and to coordinate with other trades. Provide all necessary fittings, offsets and pipe runs based on field measurements and at no additional cost to the owner. Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location of HVAC equipment and accessories to be connected on ceiling grid. Contractor shall


alter pipe locations, as shown on the drawings, where necessary to avoid interference’s and clearance difficulties.

B. All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing all building openings. Excess cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping installation will not be permitted. Threaded pipe shall have full, clean-cut threads. All pipes shall have burrs removed by reaming. All pipes shall be so installed as to provide proper drainage and to permit free expansion and contraction without causing damage.

C. Install fittings for all changes of direction and branch connections in piping.

D. All piping run within the building shall be run concealed in the finished portions of the building and be exposed only in unfinished areas, Mechanical Rooms, and specifically where shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall locate all necessary chases or openings that are to be provided by the General Contractor.

E. Store materials to avoid excessive exposure to weather or foreign materials. Keep inside of piping relatively clean during installation and protect open ends when work is not in progress. All piping and system accessories shall be stored with ends closed tight.

F. Before installation, each length of pipe, each fitting and each accessory (such as a valve) shall be "bore sighted", inspected and cleaned if debris or dirt is found.

G. After installation of piping, but before valves and accessories are installed, a heavy wad of swabbing cloth shall be pulled through the piping and fittings. All loose scale or debris shall be blown or worked free and removed.

H. Support piping securely. Refer to Section 15050, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.

I. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

J. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space and other work. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Group whenever practical at common elevations.

K. Install piping generally parallel to walls and column centerlines, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Space piping, including insulation, to provide one-inch minimum clearance between adjacent piping or other surface. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

L. Unless shown otherwise, slope condensate and drain piping down in the direction of flow not less than one inch in 40 feet. Provide eccentric reducers to keep bottom of sloped piping flat.

M. Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level.

N. Contractor shall provide drain and overflow connections to and from all equipment requiring same and extend such connections to outlets and floor drains, all as indicated. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.

O. Shut-off valves, strainers, pressure gauges, thermometers, air vents, drains and fittings, and other accessories shall be furnished and installed on piping as indicated on the drawings, herein specified


and required for complete operating systems. Automatic temperature control valves shall be installed in piping systems as indicated.

P. Offset equipment connections to allow valving off for maintenance and repair with minimal removal of piping. Provide flexibility in equipment connections and branch line take-offs with 3-elbow swing joints, with grooved flexible type couplings or where noted on the drawings.

Q. Tee water piping runouts or branches into the side of mains or other branches. Avoid bull-head tees, which is two return lines entering opposite ends of a tee and exiting out the common side.

R. Connect piping to equipment as shown on the drawings. Install components furnished by others such as:

1. Water treatment pot feeders and condenser water treatment systems.

2. Flow elements (orifice unions), control valve bodies, flow switches, pressure taps with valve, and wells for sensors.

S. For automatic air vents in ceiling spaces or other concealed locations, provide vent tubing to nearest drain.

T. Thermometer Wells: In pipes 2-1/2 inches and smaller increase the pipe size to provide free area equal to the upstream pipe area.

U. Firestopping: Fill openings around piping penetrating floors or fire walls, with firestop material.

3.2 ELECTROLYSIS CONTROL

A. The installation of copper tubing shall be accomplished in such a way as to not touch or come in contact with ferrous metals. Where copper tubing, piping or fittings are anchored, supported or may come in contact with metal construction, an insulating non-conductor spacer, similar to rubber or fiber shall be installed to assure prevention of electrolysis.

B. Hangers supporting copper tubing shall be copper, copperized or be large enough to accommodate the insulating pipe covering. Copper tubing lines shall not be (even temporarily), supported or secured to ferrous metals.

C. When copper piping or tubing is connected to ferrous piping or equipment, it shall be done with the use of a dielectric union or fitting.

3.3 FLANGES, UNIONS AND COUPLINGS

A. Pipe Joints

1. Welded: Beveling, spacing and other details shall conform to ANSI B31.1.

2. Screwed: Threads shall conform to ANSI B2.1; joint compound shall be applied to male threads only and joints made up so no more than three threads show. Coat exposed threads on steel pipe with joint compound, or red lead paint for corrosion protection.

3. Mechanical Joint: Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with joint manufacturer's specifications. Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. Lubricate gasket exterior including lips, pipe ends and housing interiors to prevent pinching the gasket during installation. Lubricant shall be as recommended by coupling manufacturer. All grooved couplings, fittings,


valves and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified.

4. 125 Pound Cast Iron Flange (Plain Face): Mating flange shall have raised face, if any, removed to avoid overstressing the cast iron flange.

B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections unless provided with flanged or mechanical grooved joint connections.

C. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

3.4 VALVES

A. Examination:

1. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

2. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

3. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

4. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

5. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

B. Installation:

1. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

2. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

3. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. Butterfly valves may be installed with stem horizontal to allow support for the disc and the cleaning action of the disc.

4. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

5. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

a) Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

b) Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

C. Install ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

D. Install globe, ball, or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

E. Provide adequate space for actuator handle in the open and closed position and for packing replacement.

F. Provide extended operator shafts as required to clear piping insulation.

G. Valves shall be provided at all branches from the mains and risers.


H. Locate and orient valves to permit proper operation and access for maintenance of packing, seat and disc. Generally locate valve stems in overhead piping in horizontal position. Provide a union adjacent to one end of all threaded end valves. Control valves usually require reducers to connect to pipe sizes shown on the drawing.

I. Install butterfly valves with the valve open as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent binding of the disc in the seat.

J. Provide 3/4-inch drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment.

K. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.5 LEAK TESTING

A. Inspect all joints and connections for leaks and workmanship and make corrections as necessary, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Tests may be either of those below, or a combination, as approved by the Engineer.

1. An operating test at design pressure, and for hot systems, design maximum temperature.

2. A hydrostatic test at 1.5 times design pressure. For water systems the design maximum pressure would usually be the static head, or expansion tank maximum pressure, plus pump head. Factory tested equipment (convertors, exchangers, coils, etc.) need not be field tested. Avoid excessive pressure on mechanical seals and safety devices.

3.6 FLUSHING AND CLEANING PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Initial flushing: Remove loose dirt, mill scale, metal chips, weld beads, rust, and like deleterious substances without damage to any system component. Provide temporary piping or hose to bypass coils, control valves, exchangers and other factory cleaned equipment unless acceptable means of protection are provided and subsequent inspection of hide-out areas takes place. Isolate or protect clean system components, including pumps and pressure vessels, and remove any component which may be damaged. Open all valves, drains, vents and strainers at all system levels. Remove plugs, caps, spool pieces, and components to facilitate early debris discharge from system. Sectionalize system to obtain debris carrying velocity of 6 feet per second, if possible. Connect dead-end supply and return headers as necessary. Flush bottoms of risers. Install temporary strainers where necessary to protect down-stream equipment. Supply and remove flushing water and drainage by various type hose, temporary and permanent piping and Contractor's booster pumps. Flush until clean as approved by the Engineer.

B. Cleaning: circulate systems at normal temperature to remove adherent organic soil, hydrocarbons, flux, pipe mill varnish, pipe joint compounds, iron oxide, and like deleterious substances not removed by flushing, without chemical or mechanical damage to any system component. Removal of tightly adherent mill scale is not required. Keep isolated equipment which is "clean" and where dead-end debris accumulation cannot occur. Sectionalize system if possible, to circulate at velocities not less than 6 feet per second. Circulate each section for not less than four hours. Blow-down all strainers, or remove and clean as frequently as necessary. Drain and prepare for final flushing.

C. Final Flushing: Return systems to conditions required by initial flushing after all cleaning solution has been displaced by clean make-up. Flush all dead ends and isolated clean equipment. Gently operate all valves to dislodge any debris in valve body by throttling velocity. Flush for not less than one hour.


END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15855-1

SECTION 15855 - AIR DISTRIBUTION

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Duct Materials and Sealant

2. Flexible Air Duct

3. Air Turning Devices

4. Manual Volume Control Dampers

5. Fire Dampers

6. Smoke Dampers

7. Fire/Smoke Dampers

8. Duct Access Doors

9. Diffusers, Boots, Registers and Grilles


1. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods

2. Section 15080 Mechanical Insulation


A. General: All materials specified in this section shall conform to the appropriate sections of NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, NFPA 91, NFPA 96 and other specific requirements as specified herein.

B. The fabrication of all ductwork and ductwork accessories shall conform to the appropriate SMACNA standards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1 and Section 15050.

B. Ductwork:

1. Coordination Drawings: Refer to article, SUBMITTALS, in Section 15050, BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.

2. Indicate duct material, pressure classifications, joint construction and seal method.

C. Fire Dampers: Indicate manufacturer, performance ratings, and style. Include manufacturer’s installation instructions.

D. Smoke Dampers: Indicate manufacturer, performance ratings, and style. Include manufacturer’s installation instructions.

E. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers: Indicate manufacturer, performance ratings, and style. Include manufacturer’s installation instructions.


F. Diffusers, Boots, Registers and Grilles: Submit schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating outlet or inlet type, size, location, application, throw, pressure drop and noise level. Review requirements, check locations and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.



B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and maintenance and repair data, and parts lists.

C. Include instructions for operating, changing, and periodic cleaning of filters.

D. Include in operating instructions, directions for resetting constant volume regulators.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCT MATERIALS AND SEALANT

A. General: Except for systems specified otherwise, construct ducts, casings, and accessories of galvanized sheet steel, ASTM A924 and A653, coating G90; or, aluminum sheet, ASTM B209, alloy 3003.

B. Hangers and Supports: Provide and install duct hangers and supports in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section IV. All hangers and supports shall match the material type of the associated ductwork.

C. Joint Sealing: Refer to SMACNA Standards.

1. Sealant: Elastomeric compound, gun or brush grade, maximum 25 flame spread and 50 smoke developed (dry state) compounded specifically for sealing ductwork as recommended by the manufacturer. Generally provide liquid sealant, with or without compatible tape, for low clearance slip joints and heavy, permanently elastic, mastic type where clearances are larger. Oil base caulking and glazing compounds are not acceptable because they do not retain elasticity and bond. Sealer shall be UL723 listed.

2. Tape: Use only tape specifically designated by the sealant manufacturer and apply only over wet sealant. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used on bare metal or on dry sealant.

3. Gaskets in Flanged Joints: Soft neoprene or butyl rubber material which complies with UL 181 and UL 723.

4. Approved factory made joints such as DUCTMATE SYSTEM may be used.

D. Duct Sealing, Air Leakage Criteria, and Air Leakage Tests:

1. All ducts shall comply with the 1 inch w.g. pressure class regardless of velocity in the duct, except when the duct is variable volume: all variable volume duct upstream of VAV boxes shall comply with the 3 inch w.g. pressure class. All 3 inch w.g. pressure class round ductwork shall be spiral type.

2. All ducts shall be sealed as per SMACNA duct sealing requirements in section 1 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual for actual duct pressure classes installed. All ducts less than 2 inches w.g. pressure classification shall meet requirements of class C seal.


3. At the beginning of the work, leak test representative samples of the duct construction for each pressure class greater than 3 inches w.g.. The sample specimen shall be minimum 25% of the ductwork of the selected system representing each pressure class, and shall include at least five transverse joints, typical seams, an access door, and at least two typical branch connections and an elbow. The sample specimen shall be part of the actual ductwork to be installed for the project.

4. The leakage amount shall not exceed the permissible leakage rate in CFM per 100 square feet of duct surface for the pressure and leakage classes shown in table below. The permissible leakage rate shall be calculated as per section 4 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

DUCT CONSTRUCTION CLASS

(Representing Pressure Class) LEAKAGE CLASS

10 inches w.g. and above 3

6 inches w.g. 6

4 inches w.g. 6

3 inches w.g. 12

5. Leakage testing procedures, test apparatus, and test reports to be submitted to the Engineer as per SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. The Test and Balance agency shall measure and record duct leakage as specified herein, and shall report any unusual conditions to the Engineer and identify leakage source.

6. If a specimen fails to meet the permissible leakage level, the contractor shall modify all ductwork installed represented by this specimen to bring it into compliance and shall retest it until acceptable leakage is demonstrated to the Resident Engineer.

7. Tests and re-tests and necessary repairs shall be completed prior to insulation and concealment of ducts.

E. Duct accessories exposed to the air stream, such as dampers of all types (except smoke dampers) and access openings, shall be of the same material as the duct or provide at least the same level of corrosion resistance.

F. Duct System Construction and Installation: Referenced SMACNA Standards are the minimum acceptable quality.

2.2 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT

A. General: Factory fabricated, complying with NFPA 90A for connectors not passing through floors of buildings. Provide insulated flexible air duct connectors in supply air duct systems and elsewhere as shown. Flexible ducts shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., complying with UL 181. Ducts larger than 8 inches in diameter shall be Class 1. Ducts 8 inch in diameter and smaller may be Class 1 or Class 2.

B. Insulated Flexible Air Duct: Factory made including mineral fiber insulation with maximum C factor of 0.25 at 24 °C (75 °F) mean temperature, encased with a low permeability moisture barrier outer jacket, having a puncture resistance of not less than 50 Beach Units. Acoustic insertion loss shall not be less than 3 dB per foot of straight duct, at 500 Hz, based on 6-inch duct, of 2500 fpm.

C. Application Criteria:


1. Temperature range: 0 to 200 °F internal.

2. Maximum working velocity: 4000 feet per minute.

3. Minimum working pressure, inches of water gage: 10 inches positive, 2 inches negative.

D. Duct Clamps: 100 percent nylon strap, 175 pounds minimum loop tensile strength manufactured for this purpose or stainless steel strap with cadmium plated worm gear tightening device. Apply clamps with sealant and as approved for UL 181, Class 1 installation.

2.3 AIR TURNING DEVICES

A. Multi-blade device with double wall blades, fabricated from the same material as the duct, with individually adjusted blades and mounting straps. Tab spacing shall be per SMACNA standards.

2.4 MANUAL VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Manufactured or fabricated in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Testing and ratings of manufactured units shall be in accordance with AMCA Standard 500.

B. Rectangular ducts up to 30" wide x 12" high, maximum velocity under 2000 feet per minute and 1" WC:

1. Basis of Design: Greenheck model MBD-10M

2. Dampers shall consist of an 18 ga. galvanized steel frame with 3.5 in. depth; blades fabricated from 20 ga. galvanized steel; 0.375 in. square plated steel axles, synthetic (acetal) flanged sleeve bearings to minimize axle leakage and allow for vertical blade mounting. Damper manufacturer's printed application and performance data including pressure, velocity and temperature limitations shall be submitted for approval showing damper suitable for pressures to 1 in. WC, velocities to 2,000.0 ft./min and temperatures to 180 °F.

C. Rectangular ducts up over 30" wide x 12" high, maximum velocity under 2000 feet per minute and 4" WC:

1. Basis of Design: Greenheck model MBD-15

2. Dampers shall consist of a 20 ga. galvanized steel hat channel frame with 5 in. depth; triple V type blades fabricated from 16 ga. galvanized steel; 0.5 in.dia. plated steel axles; external (out of the airstream) blade-to-blade linkage. Damper manufacturer's printed application and performance data including pressure, velocity and temperature limitations shall be submitted for approval showing damper suitable for pressures to 4 in. WC, velocities to 2,000.0 ft./min and temperatures to 180 °F.

D. Round ducts up to 24" diameter, maximum velocity under 2000 feet per minute and 1" WC:

1. Basis of Design: Greenheck model MBDR-50

2. Dampers shall consist of a 20 ga. galvanized steel frame with 6 in.depth; blades fabricated from 20 ga. galvanized steel; 0.375 in. square plated steel axles turning in acetal bearings. Damper manufacturer's printed application and performance data including pressure, velocity and temperature limitations shall be submitted for approval showing damper suitable for pressures to 1 in. WC, velocities to 2,000.0 ft./min and temperatures to 180 °F.

E. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on all dampers. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.


F. Remote Damper Controller: Where dampers must be installed in an inaccessible location, such as above a hard ceiling, provide remote damper controllers. Controllers shall consist of a stainless steel cable control wire encapsulated in a flexible galvanized spiral wire sheath and a remote adjustment mechanism. The exact style of controller and remote adjustment mechanism shall be coordinated with the installed style of damper and building finishes. The remote damper controller shall be as manufactured by Bowden Cable Controls (Young Regulator Co.) or equal.

2.5 FIRE DAMPERS

A. All fire dampers shall meet the requirements of NFPA90A and further shall be tested, rated, and labeled in accordance with the sixth edition of UL Standard 555. All fire dampers shall be Dynamic Rated for closure against airflow in the following six installation configurations:

1. Vertical mount (horizontal airflow)-Ducted and unducted.

2. Horizontal mount (airflow up)-Ducted and unducted.

3. Horizontal mount (airflow down)-Ducted and unducted.

B. Each fire damper shall be rated to close against maximum design airflow and static pressure at its installed location with a 10 percent safety factor or against 8-in. w.g. maximum pressure across the closed damper.

C. If wall, floor, or partition has a fire resistance rating of 3 hours or more, the fire damper shall have a UL 555 fire rating of 3 hours. All other fire dampers shall have UL 555 fire ratings of 1-1/2 hours.

D. Each fire damper shall be equipped with a fusible link having a temperature rating approximately 50°F above the maximum temperature normally encountered at its location during system operation or shutdown, but not less than 165°F. Fire dampers shall be of the nominal 100 percent free area type with blade package and all frame components out of the air-stream (expect when damper size requires multisection damper assembly). These fire dampers shall include the required oversized enclosures which shall be sealed by the damper manufacturer for high pressure and appropriate rectangular, round, or oval duct collars to facilitate the connection of mating ductwork. The contractor shall be responsible for any additional sealing of duct collars and duct connections required to maintain the specified SMACNA Duct Seal Class requirements.

E. Fire dampers in fume hood exhaust or wet air exhaust shall be stainless steel construction.

F. The damper frame may be of design and length as to function as the mounting sleeve, thus eliminating the need for a separate sleeve, as allowed by UL 555. Otherwise provide sleeves and mounting angles, minimum 1.9 mm (14 gage), required to provide installation equivalent to the damper manufacturer's UL test installation.

G. Ceiling Fire Dampers: UL classified for protection of duct penetrations in rated ceilings, 165 degree fusible link galvanized steel frame and blades, blades covered with ½” UL insulation. Fire Dampers smaller than 70 square inches or 10” diameter do not require blade insulation.

2.6 SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Smoke Dampers meeting the following specifications shall be furnished and installed where shown on plans and/or as described in schedules. Dampers shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A, 92A, and 92B and further shall be tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest edition of UL Standard 555S. Smoke dampers shall be of low leakage design qualified to UL 555S Leakage Class I.


B. Each damper /actuator combination shall have a UL555S elevated temperature rating of 350 °F minimum and shall be rated to operate at maximum design air flow at its installed location. Each damper shall be supplied with an appropriate actuator installed by the damper manufacturer at the time of damper fabrication. Damper actuator shall be electric type for 120 volt or 24 volt operation. Damper actuator shall be externally mounted on stand-offs to allow complete insulation coverage.

C. Damper blades shall be hollow extruded aluminum airfoil type with structural reinforcing tube running full length of each blade. Damper frame shall be galvanized steel formed into a structural hat channel shape with reinforced corners. Bearings shall be sintered bronze sleeve type rotating in extruded holes in the damper frame. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber designed to inflate and provide a tighter seal against leakage as pressure on either side of the damper increases. Jamb seals shall be stainless steel compression type with silicone rubber backing. Damper must be rated for mounting vertically (with blades running horizontal) or horizontally and be UL 555S rated for leakage and airflow in either direction through the damper.

2.7 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Combination Fire Smoke Dampers meeting the following specifications shall be furnished and installed where shown on plans and/or as described in schedules. Dampers shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A, 92A, and 92B and further shall be tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest edition of UL Standards 555 and 555S. Dampers shall have a UL555 fire rating of 11/2 hours and be of low leakage design qualified to UL 555S Leakage Class I.

B. Each damper /actuator combination shall have a UL555S elevated temperature rating of 350 °F minimum and shall be operational and dynamic rated to operate at maximum design airflow at its installed location. Each damper shall be supplied with an appropriate actuator installed by the damper manufacturer at the time of damper fabrication. Damper actuator shall be electric type for 120 volt or 24 volt operation.

C. Damper blades shall be of the double skin airfoil type and shall have an equivalent thickness of 14 ga. Damper frame shall be galvanized steel formed into a structural hat channel shape with reinforced corners. Bearings shall be sintered bronze sleeve type rotating in extruded holes in the damper frame. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber designed to inflate and provide a tighter seal against leakage as pressure on either side of the damper increases. Jamb seals shall be stainless steel compression type with silicone rubber backing. Blades shall be completely symmetrical relative to their axle pivot point, presenting identical resistance to airflow in either direction or pressure on either side of the damper. Damper must be rated for mounting vertically (with blades running horizontal) or horizontally and be UL 555S rated for leakage and airflow in either direction through the damper. Each damper shall be supplied with a 165 °F fusible link.

2.8 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Fabricated or manufactured access doors shall be in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

B. Access doors shall be double wall construction with 1" fiberglass insulation sandwiched between the walls. No insulation shall be exposed to the airstream. All doors shall be fully gasketed where they meet the frame.

C. Access door and frame material shall match the duct material.


D. Access doors up to and including 12 inches square may be secured with metal sash locks. A minimum of two locks are required. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

E. Access doors larger than 12 inches square shall have a continuous piano hinge be secured with sash locks. Sash locks may be used to secure doors where clearance is not available to operate hinged style door.

2.9 DIFFUSERS, BOOTS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

A. General

1. Performance Test Data:

a) Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ARI 650

b) Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ARI 885

c) Air Diffusion Council ADC 1062

d) Air Movement and Control Association AMCA 500

e) ASHRAE Standard 70

f) National Fire Protection Association NFPA 90A

2. Air terminals shall have a maximum NC rating of 35 unless specifically specified otherwise.

3. Contractor shall review all ceiling drawings and details and provide all ceiling mounted devices with appropriate dimensions and trim for the specific locations.

4. Provide manufacturer's standard gasket.

5. Materials: Steel or aluminum as specified herein.

6. Exposed Fastenings: The same material as the respective inlet or outlet. Fasteners for aluminum may be stainless steel.

7. Finish: Manufacturers standard finish in color as selected by the Architect unless custom finish is specified herein.

B. Basis of Design: Price Industries

C. Ceiling Supply Diffusers (CD):

1. Square Face: SMD Series - Steel construction, square face with square neck duct connection. Provide diffuser manufacturer's square to round transition where connection to round duct is required. Flush vane type core shall be removable without tools and be available in 1, 2, 3 or 4-way air distribution pattern as noted on the drawings. Air distribution shall be in a fixed horizontal pattern. Border style shall be coordinated with ceiling type. Provide manufacturers standard finish unless otherwise noted. Color shall be white.

2. Fire-Rated Construction: SMD-FR Series:

a) Diffusers shall be Fire-Rated Assemblies listed in the UL, Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory and in the ULC, Underwriters Laboratories of Canada Equipment and Materials Directory.

b) Diffusers shall meet UL time versus temperature test criteria and NFPA 90A requirements.


c) This design is intended for use in an exposed grid suspended ceiling (T-bar Lay-in) with up to a three-hour rating and must be installed in accordance with the installation instructions.

d) The diffuser shall be supplied with a galvanized steel, non-adjustable, butterfly-type ceiling radiation damper.

e) The diffuser shall be externally wrapped with a non-asbestos thermal blanket.

f) The diffuser shall be supplied with a steel volume control damper that is room side adjustable with an Allen key for balancing.

g) The diffuser shall be supplied with a fusible link rated for:

1) 165 degrees Fahrenheit.

D. Ceiling Registers (RR, ER and TR): 80 Series - Aluminum construction, cube type core with ½-inch x ½-inch x 1-inch deep grids with opposed blade damper. Damper shall be operable through register face. Border style shall be coordinated with ceiling type. Provide manufacturers standard finish unless otherwise noted. Color shall be white.

E. Fire Rated Ceiling Registers: Model 80-FR Series:

1. Furnish and install Price Model 80-FR fire-rated egg crate registers of sizes and mounting types designated by the plans and air distribution schedule. Grilles shall be Fire-Rated Assemblies listed in the UL Fire Resistance Directory, and in the ULD Equipment and Materials Directory. The grilles shall meet UL time versus temperature test criteria and NFPA 90A requirements.

2. This design is intended for use in an exposed grid suspended celling (T-bar lay-in) with up to a three-hour rating and must be installed in accordance with the installation instructions.

3. Grilles shall be formed steel border and filter frame construction, and an aluminum egg crate core. The egg crate core shall have (select one):

4. Grilles shall be formed steel border and filter frame construction, and an aluminum egg crate core. The egg crate core shall have an aluminum ½ x ½ x ½ inch grid.

5. The register shall incorporate a non-adjustable, non-asbestos, curtain-type ceiling radiation damper.

6. The diffuser shall be externally wrapped with a non-asbestos thermal blanket.

7. The diffuser shall be supplied with a fusible link rated for:

a) 165 degrees Fahrenheit.

3 EXECUTION


A. Install devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Seal all connections airtight.

C. Clean and remove all dirt and debris.

D. Re-paint/touch-up as necessary.


3.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

A. General: Fabricate and install ductwork and accessories in accordance with referenced SMACNA Standards:

1. Drawings show the general layout of ductwork and accessories but do not show all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect ducts to equipment, boxes, diffusers, grilles, etc., and to coordinate with other trades. Fabricate ductwork based on field measurements. Provide all necessary fittings and offsets at no additional cost to the owner. Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location of HVAC equipment and accessories on ceiling grid.

2. Duct sizes on the drawings are inside clear dimensions. When ducts are lined their dimensions shall be increased as necessary to maintain the listed dimensions. The Contractor may alter the listed dimensions where necessary to avoid interference's and clearance difficulties to sizes with the same air handling characteristics.

3. Provide duct transitions, offsets and connections to dampers, coils, and other equipment in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section II. Provide streamliner, when an obstruction cannot be avoided and must be taken in by a duct.

4. Repair damaged or altered galvanized areas with galvanizing repair compound.

5. Provide bolted construction and tie-rod reinforcement in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section VI.

6. Construct casings, eliminators, and pipe penetrations in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section VI. Design casing access doors to swing against air pressure so that pressure helps to maintain a tight seal.

7. Proper provisions shall be made for expansion and contraction of ductwork.

8. Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Section IV. Hanger spacing shall not exceed 8 feet.

9. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal cap with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage.

10. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities.

11. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering the ductwork system.

12. Provide dielectric joints where dissimilar duct materials are in contact.

B. Casings and Plenums: Construct in accordance with SMACNA Standards Section VI, including curbs, access doors, pipe penetrations, eliminators and drain pans. Provide drain for outside air intake louver plenums where indicated. Drain piping shall be routed to the nearest floor drain. Outside air plenum shall have exterior insulation.

C. Round and Flat-Oval Ducts: Furnish duct and fittings made by the same manufacturer to insure good fit of slip joints. When submitted and approved in advance, round and flat oval duct, with size converted on the basis of equal pressure drop, may be furnished in lieu of rectangular duct design shown on the drawings.

1. Elbows: Diameters 3 through 8 inches shall be two section die stamped, all others shall be gored construction, maximum 18 degree angle, with all seams continuously welded or standing seam. Coat galvanized areas of fittings damaged by welding with corrosion resistant aluminum paint or galvanized repair compound.


2. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible provide turning vanes.

3. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees.

4. Provide bellmouth, conical tees or taps, laterals, reducers, and other low loss fittings as shown in SMACNA Standards.

5. Ribbed Duct Option: Lighter gage round/oval duct and fittings may be furnished provided certified tests indicating that the rigidity and performance is equivalent to SMACNA standard gage ducts are submitted.

a) Ducts: Manufacturer's published standard gage, G90 coating, spiral lock seam construction with an intermediate standing rib.

b) Fittings: May be manufacturer's standard as shown in published catalogs, fabricated by spot welding and bonding with neoprene base cement or machine formed seam in lieu of continuous welded seams.

6. Provide flat side reinforcement of oval ducts as recommended by the manufacturer and SMACNA Standard S3.13. Because of high pressure loss, do not use internal tie-rod reinforcement unless approved by the Engineer.

3.3 FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT

A. Refer to SMACNA Standards, Section III. Ducts shall be continuous, single pieces not over eight (8) feet long. Support ducts as per SMACNA standards. Runs shall be as straight and short as feasible. Centerline radius of bends shall be not less than two duct diameters. Make connections with clamps as recommended by SMACNA. Clamp per SMACNA S3.33 and S3.34 with one clamp on the core duct and one on the insulation jacket.

B. Flexible ducts shall not penetrate floors, or any chase or partition designated as a fire or smoke barrier, including corridor partitions fire rated one hour or two-hour.

C. Furnish and install insulated steel adjustable elbow or other approved device on round neck diffusers for connection of flexible duct to avoid kinking of duct.

3.4 AIR TURNING DEVICES

A. Provide air-turning devices in all radiused elbows with a radius less than or equal to the duct width.

B. All square elbows in supply, return and outdoor air intake systems shall have double width turning vanes. Turning vanes are not required in transfer, relief and exhaust air systems unless specifically noted on the drawings.

3.5 MANUAL VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Provide manual volume control (balancing) dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing and where indicated on plans.

B. Provide operator shaft extensions as required to clear ductwork insulation.

C. All dampers shall be full size of duct unless noted otherwise.

D. All dampers shall have locking quadrants.


3.6 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated.

B. Contractor shall include damper manufacturer’s installation instructions as part of the fire damper submittal. These instructions shall describe the applicable requirements for damper sleeve thickness, retaining angles, methods of attachment, duct-to-sleeve connections, preparation of wall or floor openings, and all other requirements to provide an installation equivalent to that tested by the damper manufacturer during the UL Standard 555 qualification procedures. Contractor shall detail any proposed installations that deviate from these manufacturers instructions and explain the needed deviations. All fire damper installations shall comply with the manufacturer’s installation instructions or any submitted deviations and must be acceptable to the appropriate authority having jurisdiction.

C. Contractor shall provide suitable access at each fire damper to allow inspection, cycling or testing of the fire damper and replacement of the fusible link. This includes furnishing and installing duct access doors and wall or ceiling access panels as may be required. Contractor installing fire dampers shall be responsible for these access doors and panels unless they are specifically shown to be supplied by other trades.

D. Upon request contractor shall demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative.

E. Install dampers square and free from racking.

F. The installing contractor shall provide and install bracing for multiple section assemblies to support assembly weight and to hold against system pressure.

G. Do not compress or stretch the damper frame into the duct or opening.

3.7 SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Provide smoke dampers at locations indicated.

B. Contractor shall provide suitable access at each smoke damper to allow inspection, cycling or testing of the damper. This includes furnishing and installing duct access doors and wall or ceiling access panels as may be required. Contractor installing dampers shall be responsible for these access doors and panels unless they are specifically shown to be supplied by other trades.

C. Upon request contractor shall demonstrate operation of dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative.

D. Install dampers square and free from racking.

E. The installing contractor shall provide and install bracing for multiple section assemblies to support assembly weight and to hold against system pressure.

F. Do not compress or stretch the damper frame into the duct or opening.

G. Smoke damper control devices (smoke detectors or duct detectors) shall be provided by the Fire Alarm Contractor unless otherwise specified. This contractor shall install duct detectors as provided by the Fire Alarm Contractor in accordance with the detector manufacturers written instructions.


H. Mechanical Contractor shall provide power wiring to the smoke damper actuator. Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible to derive 120V power from a 20 amp single pole circuit breaker in an approved panelboard. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate power requirements and panelboard locations with the Electrical Contractor prior to installation. Mechanical Contractor shall provide new breakers in panelboard if spare breakers are not available. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate panel schedule labeling with Electrical Contractor for all circuits utilized. Mechanical Contractor shall provide all transformers (if required) and wiring interlocks between the smoke dampers and fan relays.

3.8 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Provide combination fire/smoke dampers at locations indicated.

B. Contractor shall include damper manufacturer’s installation instructions as part of the fire damper submittal. These instructions shall describe the applicable requirements for damper sleeve thickness, retaining angles, methods of attachment, duct-to-sleeve connections, preparation of wall or floor openings, and all other requirements to provide an installation equivalent to that tested by the damper manufacturer during the UL Standard 555 qualification procedures. Contractor shall detail any proposed installations that deviate from these manufacturers instructions and explain the needed deviations. All fire damper installations shall comply with the manufacturer’s installation instructions or any submitted deviations and must be acceptable to the appropriate authority having jurisdiction.

C. Contractor shall provide suitable access at each fire damper to allow inspection, cycling or testing of the fire damper and replacement of the fusible link. This includes furnishing and installing duct access doors and wall or ceiling access panels as may be required. Contractor installing fire dampers shall be responsible for these access doors and panels unless they are specifically shown to be supplied by other trades.

D. Upon request contractor shall demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to authorities having jurisdiction and Owner's representative.

E. Install dampers square and free from racking.

F. The installing contractor shall provide and install bracing for multiple section assemblies to support assembly weight and to hold against system pressure.

G. Do not compress or stretch the damper frame into the duct or opening.

H. Smoke damper control devices (smoke detectors or duct detectors) shall be provided by the Fire Alarm Contractor unless otherwise specified. This contractor shall install duct detectors as provided by the Fire Alarm Contractor in accordance with the detector manufacturers written instructions.

I. Mechanical Contractor shall provide power wiring to the smoke damper actuator. Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible to derive 120V power from a 20 amp single pole circuit breaker in an approved panelboard. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate power requirements and panelboard locations with the Electrical Contractor prior to installation. Mechanical Contractor shall provide new breakers in panelboard if spare breakers are not available. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate panel schedule labeling with Electrical Contractor for all circuits utilized. Mechanical Contractor shall provide all transformers (if required) and wiring interlocks between the smoke dampers and fan relays.


3.9 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Provide access doors, sized and located for maintenance work, upstream of the equipment with respect to direction of airflow, in the following locations:

1. Each motor operated damper.

2. Each fire damper, smoke damper and combination fire/smoke damper. Minimum size of 18 inches by 16 inches (24-inch by 16-inch preferred) where duct size permits. Access door shall be located in the bottom of the duct if possible. Access doors shall be labeled with minimum ½” high letters to indicate the location of the fire protection device(s) within.

3. Each duct mounted smoke detector. Access doors shall be labeled with minimum ½” high letters to indicate the location of the fire protection device(s) within.

B. Openings shall be as large as feasible in small ducts, 12-inch by 12-inch minimum where possible. Access doors in insulated ducts shall be double-wall, insulated.

1. For rectangular ducts: Refer to SMACNA Standards (Figure 2-12).

2. For round and flat oval duct: Access sections shall be not less than 20 gage housing welded or riveted to a duct section.

3.10 DIFFUSERS, BOOTS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

A. Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure the products serve intended functions.

B. Coordinate exact location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. Refer to Reflected Ceiling Plans (where applicable) for general locations. Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling modules.

C. Check and verify the various ceiling and wall types with the Architect and General Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for ordering the correct type inlet and/or outlet with all associated hardware, mounting accessories and trims, for accommodating the type ceiling or wall in which inlets and/or outlets are to be installed.

D. Where diffusers, registers and grilles cannot be installed to avoid seeing inside the duct, paint the inside of the duct with flat black paint to reduce visibility.

E. Furnish to the Owner, with receipt, three operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that requires them.

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-1

SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to all Division 16 Sections; in addition to the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions of Contract, and Division 1 - General Requirements.

2. General Requirements:

a) Intent

b) Responsibility of Bidders

c) Quality Assurance

d) Products

e) Submittals

f) Substitutions

g) Guarantees

h) Applicable Publications

i) Regulatory Requirements

j) Project/Site Conditions

k) Delivery, Storage and Handling

l) Sequence and Scheduling

m) Demolition

n) Cutting and Patching

o) Hazardous Materials

p) Operating and Maintenance Manuals

q) Record Drawings

r) Cleaning

s) Painting

t) Special Equipment Conditions

u) Final Acceptance

v) Owner Instruction

3. Products:

a) Firestopping


1. General and Supplementary Conditions of Contract.

2. Administrative Requirements of Division 1.


3. All Division 16 sections.

1.2 INTENT

A. Provide complete and fully operational electrical systems with facilities and services to meet all of the requirements described herein and in complete accordance with all applicable codes and ordinances.

1. The term “provide”, as used in these specifications and on the drawings, shall be understood to mean “furnish and install, complete and operational, with all required hardware, accessories and appurtenances.” Unless indicated otherwise, this shall also include all associated power and/or signal wiring required for electrical systems furnished under this Contract.

2. The manufacturer's recommendations for the particular equipment or system, the National Electrical Code and the Architect/Engineer shall determine what is the complete and proper installation and proper operation.

B. Provide connections to all equipment furnished under other contracts and by Owner, including uncrating equipment, installing, starting, and testing.

C. Provide all temporary services and/or equipment as required for all installations.

D. Protect all equipment installed under this contract, until final acceptance of the project.

E. Test all equipment installed under this Contract and adjust the operation of such equipment, leaving all systems in perfect operating condition.

F. Upon completion of the work, thoroughly clean all equipment, leaving the job site and installation in first-class condition.

G. The drawings are diagrammatic and approximately to scale unless detailed otherwise. They establish scope, material and quality and are not detailed installation instructions.

H. The Contractor will be held responsible for proper installation of materials and equipment to true intent and meaning of both Drawings and Specifications. All items of labor, material and equipment not specified in detail or shown on the drawings, but incidental to or necessary for the complete installation and proper operation of the several branches of work described herein or depicted on the drawings; or reasonably implied in connection therein; shall be provided as if called for in detail by the Drawings and/or Specifications.

I. In cases of discrepancies between drawings, or between the drawings and the specifications, the Engineer will make the final determination as to which is correct. In cases where items appear in the specifications but not on the drawings, or appear on the drawings but not in the specifications they shall be considered as noted on both. Unless written clarification in the form of an addendum is received, the bid shall be interpreted to include the most expensive installation, equipment or work and all associated costs.

J. The Engineer reserves the right of interpretation of the specifications and drawings. The Engineers decisions of interpretations shall be final.

1.3 RESPONSIBILITY OF BIDDERS

A. Examine all contract documents issued. Visit the site and become thoroughly acquainted with the existing conditions prior to submitting a proposal. The submission of a proposal shall be considered as evidence that a site visit was conducted; no extra compensation will be allowed for any error


resulting from failure to visit job site. Prior to submitting a proposal, bidders must familiarize themselves with the codes, rules, and regulations in effect at the site of the work, to determine existing conditions that affect their installation.

B. Carefully examine the Architectural; Structural; Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning; Plumbing; Fire Protection; and/or Miscellaneous Contract Drawings and Specifications. If any discrepancies occur between the drawings or between the drawings and specifications, report such discrepancies to the Architect in writing and obtain written instructions as to the manner in which to proceed. Do not make departures from the Contract Drawings without prior written approval of the Architect.

C. The terms “electrical contractor”, "the contractor" and "this contractor", mentioned in these Division 16 specifications and on the electrical drawings, refer to the Contractor responsible for all work and equipment included in the Division 16 specifications.

1. Subcontractors: Any reference to, or letting of work contained in these specifications to, any Subcontractor or Manufacturer does not relieve this Contractor of his responsibility for all work, material and equipment in this specification.

D. In all cases where equipment and materials are specified in the singular or plural number, assume that such references shall apply to as many such items as are required to complete the installation.

E. Execute all work, construct and install all equipment in accordance with the current requirements of all Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), the National Electrical Code (NEC) as amended to date, Underwriters Laboratories (UL), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), owner's insurance underwriters and/or other authorities having jurisdiction over premises, public utilities which have connection with any systems specified, and all Federal, State, County and Local ordinances and regulations. Nothing contained in these specifications or shown on the drawings shall be construed to conflict with the aforesaid codes, ordinances, or regulations. Contractor shall be held responsible for accident to persons, material or property caused by failure to adhere to the proper code requirements until the Owner has accepted work.

F. The Contractor shall be qualified or licensed to perform the types of work involved under this Division of the Specifications in the state, county and/or municipality of this project as required.

G. Secure and pay for all permits, inspections and approvals required by foregoing authorities in connection with all work specified herein, unless otherwise noted. All costs associated with permits, inspections and approvals shall be included in the contract price unless directed otherwise. Obtain certificates of approval from departments responsible for issuing same. Deliver certificates in tripli-cate to the Architect/Engineer, at which time they shall become property of the Owner.

H. Wherever any installation, product, equipment item, etc. specified herein is not permitted to be handled or installed, or is otherwise restricted by union regulations, etc., notify the Engineer in writing before submitting a bid, in ample time for modifications in the requirements to be made. If such notification is not given, this Contractor shall be responsible to complete the installation as specified, to the Engineer’s satisfaction and at no additional cost to the Owner.


A. Products Criteria:

1. Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least three years. See applicable specification sections for any additional requirements.


2. Equipment Service: Products shall be supported by a service organization that maintains a complete inventory of repair parts and is located reasonably close to the site.

3. Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.

4. Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components made by others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.

5. Nameplates: Nameplates bearing manufacturer’s name or identifiable trademark shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.

6. Underwriter’s Labels: Where applicable, all material and equipment shall bear the label of approval of the Underwriter’s Laboratory, Inc.

B. Manufacturer’s Recommendations: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide all required hardware, accessories and appurtenances as recommended by the manufacturer to complete the intended installation and function, even though such items may not be specifically called out or detailed on the drawings or in the specifications.

1. The term “manufacturer” as used in these Specifications or on the Drawings shall be understood as applying to a company of established reputation in the manufacture of the particular equipment, system or apparatus from products of their own make or others; and who assumes full responsibility for products utilized in said outfits, which are not manufactured by them.

C. The Contractor is responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction and for worker safety.

1.5 PRODUCTS

A. Products, if any, named on the Contract Drawings or documents, and products of manufacturers named first throughout the Project Manual and/or documents, generally constitute the Engineer’s Basis of Design, whether or not specifically denoted as such.

B. Products of named manufacturers appearing throughout the Project Manual and/or documents, or on the Contract Drawings or documents, other than the first named manufacturer, are accepted as Equal; however the requirements of the General Conditions regarding equipment shall apply.

C. Where three or more (Acceptable) Manufacturers are named, either in the specifications or on the drawings, contractor shall provide products by one these manufacturers only. Where fewer than three (Acceptable) Manufacturers are listed, and unless specifically indicated otherwise, contractor shall assume the phrase “Or Equal” and may submit standard product of any manufacturer, subject to compliance with these specifications and acceptance or Approval by the Engineer/Architect.

D. If products of manufacturers, other than those named first, differ from those named first in the Project Manual and/or documents, or on the Contract Drawings or documents, to the extent that their proper incorporation into the work requires changes to structural, piping, mechanical, electrical, and/or instrumentation work, or any other changes whatsoever in nature is required; then this Contractor shall be responsible for all such change(s) and all associated cost(s).

E. Thus, if the Contractor provide equipment other than the Engineer’s Basis of Design, then the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs, by all trades, as required to accommodate the equipment provided.


1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. General Requirements Applicable to all Division 16 Sections:

1. Submit under provisions of Division 1 and in accordance with the following:

a) Within 30 days after signing the contract, submit to the Architect/Engineer a complete list of proposed equipment and materials, giving the name and address of manufacturer and, when required for proper identification, trade names or catalog numbers. Itemize each type of material and each piece of equipment (omitting duplicates).

b) Submit samples of materials for approval at the site as requested by the Engineer. Such materials may be incorporated into the project after approval and serving their purpose as samples.

c) Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products and accessories in a single submittal. Produce shop drawings to indicate fabrication details and proposed layouts for shop or field fabrications as named herein.

d) Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. Include contract drawing identification, type, quantities, capacities, accessories, rough-in dimensions, manufacturer’s name, model number, connection sizes, wiring diagrams, installation instructions, motor horsepower, voltage, phase and amperage, colors, finishes and other pertinent data.

e) Certify, by submittal, that the materials or equipment proposed are satisfactory for the intended application, and that the materials or equipment are in current production with no known plans to cease manufacture.

f) Submittals processed by the Architect/Engineer do not constitute change orders. The purpose of the submittal process is to demonstrate the Contractor’s understanding of the design concept and intent; the Contractor demonstrates this understanding by indicating which equipment and materials he intends to provide and the fabrication and installation methods that he intends to use.

g) If deviations, discrepancies or conflicts between submittals and the contract documents (in the form of design drawings, specifications and addenda) are discovered, either prior to or after submittals are processed by the Architect/ Engineer, the contract documents shall control and shall be followed.

h) Submittals shall bear the Contractor’s approval stamp as evidence that he has checked the drawings. Any submittals without this stamp of approval will not be evaluated and will be returned to the Contractor for proper resubmission. Material and equipment reviews by the Architect/Engineer are only for general conformance to the design intent of the project and compliance with information given in the contract documents. Dimensions shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site by the installing Contractor and installation shall be coordinated with other trades. Specifically excluded from shop drawing review are equipment quantities.

i) The basis of this contract is for a maximum of two (2) reviews of any submittal by the Engineer. If additional reviews of a submittal are required for approval, the Contractor shall compensate the Engineer for additional process charges.

j) Electronic versions of the electrical drawings may be obtained from the Engineer for a nominal fee.


B. Submittals are the contractor's documents; the Architect's and Engineer's approval constitutes an acknowledgment that the documents have been submitted and nothing more. It is the contractor's responsibility to check his own submissions for compliance with the Contract Documents and job conditions.

C. Material and equipment reviews by Architect and/or Engineer are only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and compliance with information given in the Contract Documents. Specifically excluded from the Engineer’s shop drawing review are material quantities, connection details, mounting trim, etc.

D. The Contractor is solely responsible for providing materials in conformance with the Contractor Documents. Dimensions shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site by the installing Contractor and installation shall be coordinated with other trades. Shop drawing approval does not modify the Contractor’s duty to comply with the Contract Documents.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Refer to Division 1 – General Requirements.

B. Pre-Bid substitutions will not be accepted during the bidding phase. Bids shall be based on the products as indicated on the contract documents and specifications. Any substitutions shall be submitted by the contractor for review and approval by the engineer during the submittal process.

C. Throughout the specifications, types of materials may be specified by manufacturer's name and catalog number in order to establish standards of quality and performance and not for the purpose of limiting competition. Unless specifically stated otherwise, assume the phrase "or approved equal", except that the burden is upon the bidder to prove such equality.

D. If the bidder elects to prove such equality, he shall request, in writing, review of the substitution by the Architect/Engineer in accordance with all Supplementary Conditions and/or Division 1 requirements. All such requests shall include manufacturer’s literature, specifications, drawings, catalog cuts, performance data or other references or information necessary to completely describe the item.

E. The Contractor shall be responsible for all structural, mechanical, and electrical changes required for their installation, at no additional cost to the Owner.

F. A substitution request constitutes a representation that the Contractor:

1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the originally specified product.

2. Will provide the same or greater warranty than the originally specified product.

3. Will coordinate the installation and make changes to all other work including coordination and compensation to other trades which may be required for the substituted product to be installed with no additional cost to the Owner.

4. Waive claims for additional costs or time extensions, which may subsequently become apparent.

5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re-approval by authorities.

G. When this contractor desires to furnish equipment of a manufacturer other than that specified or intended, he shall include a complete specification of the substituted item, along with each submission copy of shop drawings, indicating the necessary modifications to the substituted


product to satisfy the requirements of the contract specifications. Manufacturer's specifications shall be written as close as possible over the contract specifications so that an accurate comparison can be made.

H. The verification specification shall include the exact wording of the contract specification and the revised wording, identified properly, indicating all the deviations proposed. If no deviations are noted, the contractor shall furnish the material or equipment in accordance with the contract specifications.

I. Substitutions will be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor.

J. Also, when the contractor submits equipment or materials of the manufacturers specified, verification specifications must be submitted at the request of the Architect or Engineer.

K. In cases where specific manufacturers are listed the Engineer reserves the right to consider alternate manufacturers. In all cases where equipment and materials are specified as “Basis of Design” alternate manufacturers who meet the referenced Standards, these specifications and the standard of quality of the basis of design manufacturer shall be acceptable. It is not the intent of these specifications to be biased or proprietary unless a specific list of “Approved Manufacturers” is given or an item is specified as “NO SUBSTITUTIONS”. The Engineer reserves the right of final determination of the equality of an alternate manufacturer.

L. The Architect and Engineer reserve final acceptance of substitutions.

M. Pre-Approval of a manufacturer and/or proposed system/equipment for bidding does not constitute Final shop drawing/submittal approval; nor does it guarantee same. Engineer reserves right to review and approve, comment on, or reject any and all proposed equipment during required submittal process, after award of contract, regardless of manufacturer being named Acceptable or Pre-Approved.

1.8 GUARANTEES

A. Guarantee all equipment, materials and workmanship and make good any defects in same for a minimum of one (1) year following date of acceptance of the project. Provide additional/special warranties where called for in the technical specifications.

1. Lamps shall be warranted for a period of three (3) months following date of acceptance.

2. Defects determined to be the result of misuse of apparatus by the Owner, his employees, tenants or building occupants shall not be covered by this warranty.

B. Warranty shall be in writing and shall include written copies of factory warranties with expiration dates on items of equipment where warranty date might differ from the acceptance date. No warranty shall start before date of acceptance in writing by the Architect. Repair or replace any defective work developing during this period, at no cost to Owner. Where defective electrical work results in damage to work of other contracts, this contractor shall be responsible to repair and/or restore such work to its original condition, again at no additional cost to Owner.

C. The equipment and materials manufacturers are expected to recognize that they are responsible for the failure of their products to perform in accordance with data furnished by them or their authorized representatives, as well as misrepresentations of such data. If the products have been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's published or written instructions and recommendations, and such products fail, then the Contractor and the manufacturers are responsible for replacement of the products and all associated work and materials, at no cost to the Owner.



A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. When a standard is specified by reference, comply with requirements of that standard, except when requirements are modified by the Contract Documents or applicable codes establish stricter standards.

C. The Publication or Standard is the publication in effect as of the bid date, except when a specific date is listed.

D. National Electric Code (NEC)

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

F. International Code Council Electrical Code (ICCEC)

G. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

H. Underwriters Laboratory (UL)

I. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

J. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA), Lighting Standards and Recommended Practices

K. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

L. ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)


A. Electrical: Conform to the latest requirements of the National Electrical Code and the International Code Council Electrical Code. In addition, all applicable Federal, State, Municipal or other authority laws, rules and regulations shall apply.

B. Secure and pay for any and all permits and inspections required by any of the foregoing authorities having jurisdiction, and pay all other costs in connection with the work, unless otherwise noted.

C. Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) listings and National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association’s (NEMA) stamps or seals shall be evidenced where applicable to electrical apparatus.

D. Conform to applicable regulations of Department of Environmental Protection, Department of Labor and Industry, and OSHA. Comply with applicable safety related work practices described in NFPA-70E.

E. Secure rough-in and final wiring certificates from the Middle Department Inspection Association or other independent inspection agency acceptable to the Engineer. Certificates shall be in triplicate and shall be delivered to the Architect prior to project close out.

F. Updated Standards: At the request of the Architect/Engineer, submit a change order proposal where an applicable industry code or standard has been revised and reissued after the date of contract documents and before performance of the work affected. The Architect/Engineer will decide whether to issue a change order to proceed with the updated standard.


1.11 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS


B. Install work in locations shown on the drawings, unless prevented by project conditions.

C. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of work to meet project conditions, including changes to work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of the Architect and/or Engineer before proceeding.

D. Perform all minor cutting and patching, and make all changes, relocations and installations with a minimum of noise. All present and new equipment, floors, walls, etc., shall be adequately protected from dust and dirt caused by the work. Protection shall include suitable temporary barriers or coverings. Maintain exterior and interior premises of the building as clean as possible during construction. At no time shall the Contractor interfere with the normal operation of the building by allowing debris, excess earth, etc., to remain on the premises.

E. Dust Prevention: Due to critical dust prevention requirements, obtain approval from the Owner's representative on the site before starting any cutting of the present building. Approval shall be obtained for each location prior to cutting. Provide any temporary work including materials required to retain the dust generated by this work. Provide temporary dust containment barriers, curtains, etc. as directed by the Architect/Owner and remove some when no longer needed.

F. Generally, inspection and maintenance should only be performed on equipment to which power has been turned off, disconnected and electrically isolated so that no accidental contact can be made with energized parts. Follow all manufacturer’s warnings and instructions.

1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


B. Deliver materials and equipment to the project site in a clean condition with openings plugged or capped (or otherwise sealed by packaging) both during shipping and during temporary storage. Deliveries shall be scheduled to minimize the amount of time in temporary storage.

C. Delivered equipment crating and/or packaging shall clearly identify pick points or lifting points. In the absence of crating or packaging, pick points or lifting points must be identified on the equipment.

D. When unloading materials and equipment provide special lifting harness or apparatus as may be required by manufacturers. Handle materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

E. Determine the required equipment needed for unloading operations and have such equipment on site to perform unloading work on the date of equipment delivery.

F. Store materials on site only where directed by the Owner. Materials and equipment, both on site and off site, shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Store all materials in dry locations, off ground and keep moisture free at all times.

G. The Contractor shall protect at his own expense, his work, materials, and equipment during construction. Units and devices, both before and after being set in place, shall be securely protected from carelessly or maliciously dropped tools, materials, grit, dirt or any foreign matter. Contractor shall be held responsible for damage so done until work is fully and finally accepted.


H. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all apparatus, equipment and appurtenances furnished by him or his subcontractors in connection with the work, taking special care to protect all parts thereof in such manner as may be necessary or as may be directed.

1. Protection shall include covers, crating, sheds or other means to prevent dirt, grit, plaster, or other foreign substances from entering the working parts of machinery or equipment.

I. Materials and equipment shall be stored in areas designated by the Owner and/or the General Contractor. Where equipment must be stored outside the building, it shall be totally covered and secured with heavy, waterproof tarps and kept dry at all times. Where equipment has been subjected to moisture, it shall be suitably dried out before being placed in service.

J. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products and equipment to assure that they are being maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration.

1.13 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING


B. Interference:

1. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work. The Contractor is responsible for modifying the work with offsets, bends, or other fittings to avoid minor interference's and structural obstructions. Perform such modifications at no increase in cost to the Owner.

2. Construct electrical systems in a manner not to delay or interfere with other operations of work in the project.

3. Prior to making electrical installations, coordinate electrical work locations with other operations of work, especially in congested areas such as mechanical rooms and above hung ceilings (if applicable).

4. In the event that interferences develop, the Architect/Engineer’s decision will be final and no additional compensation will be allowed for relocation of electrical products, regardless of which work was installed first.

C. Contract Interface:

1. Work performed in cooperation with other contracts: The responsibility for performing work of this contract in cooperation with work of other contracts rests solely with this Contractor.

a) Prior to rough-in, coordinate exact electrical requirements and characteristics for all electrically-operated equipment with contractor furnishing same.

b) Make connections of electrical systems specified in the various sections of this contract to those systems or installations of other contracts requiring such connections.

c) These connections are generally indicated as contract breaks on the drawings.

1.14 DEMOLITION

A. The intent is to demolish all work as shown on the drawings and as required for new installations. The drawings are diagrammatic in nature and are intended to represent only the general scope of demolition; neither the demolition drawings or notes shall be considered as all inclusive. The contractor shall review the existing facility, along with the demolition drawings, and shall be


responsible to determine the exact extent of the electrical demolition work required to fulfil the intent of the contract documents.

B. This contractor shall disconnect and remove any electrical circuits (120V and above), connections (and associated wiring or conduit) from other trades work that involves electrical connections. Contractor shall reference other trades drawings and determine the exact extent of demolition work required.

C. Perform all demolition work with care and protect portions of the existing installation that are to remain from damage. Damage to existing building equipment, systems, finishes, etc. so incurred shall be repaired by this contractor at no additional cost.

D. Restore damaged or defaced work remaining in place to its original condition.

E. Existing equipment and materials, removal of which is not indicated by the contract documents or required to accomplish the project intent, shall remain unless noted otherwise.

F. Refer to the new work drawings for additional information which may affect demolition work, prior to beginning demolition.

Disconnect and remove any ceiling mounted devices that interfere with removal of existing ceiling; store for reinstallation. Retain all associated wring and conduit for reinstallation.

1.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING


B. Perform all cutting and patching required for the installation of work under Division 16, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Perform finishing and roof flashing, in areas of existing building or roof not being disturbed under general construction, for installation of work under Division 16.

C. Obtain approval from Owner’s representative before cutting existing work.

D. Where openings are to be made in existing roof, obtain bonding company approval, if roof bond is still in effect, before such openings are made.

E. All existing surfaces shall be repaired and finished to match existing adjacent surfaces. Disturbed areas, drives, roads, streets, and grass areas shall be repaired where these surfaces have been disturbed by installation of work under Division 16 unless these areas are also being disturbed by work under general portions of the specifications.

F. All openings must be neatly drilled, bored or cut in a workmanlike manner, with materials and equipment suitable for the purpose. Punching or chipping of concrete will not be permitted. All openings shall be drilled, bored or cut in a manner satisfactory to and at locations approved by the Architect. Materials damaged under this contract shall be patched or replaced as directed by the Architect.

1.16 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Should hazardous or toxic materials be encountered in any existing work, notify the Owner immediately. Do not disturb surfaces or equipment containing hazardous materials without written authorization of the Owner/Architect. All such materials, equipment or components removed by this contractor shall be properly disposed of in accordance with applicable rules and regulations.


B. No known hazardous or toxic materials shall be incorporated into the final construction or any equipment provided under this Contract.

C. Hazardous or toxic materials utilized as a construction aid shall not be stored within the building and shall be removed promptly from the job site when no longer required.

1.17 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS


B. Provide heavy-duty catalogue binders with appropriate labeling.

C. Binder shall be indexed by material and/or system type and at a minimum shall include:

1. Title page with clear plastic protection cover.

2. List of Drawings.

3. Description of Systems: Provide complete and detailed description of systems.

4. Operating Division: Provide complete and detailed operation of major components.

5. Maintenance Division: Provide preventative maintenance schedule for major components.

6. List of Equipment Suppliers and Contractors: Provide list of equipment suppliers and contractors, including address and telephone number.

7. Certification: Include copy of tests performed on insulation, grounding, continuity, phase balancing and signal systems; electrical equipment tag identification and wiring color code; inspection approval certificates for electrical systems and operational tests on applicable electrical equipment.

8. Shop Drawings and Maintenance Bulletins: Provide materials received in compliance with clause 'Shop Drawings', arrange alphabetically.

9. Short Circuit and Protective Device Coordination Studies and Arc Flash Hazard Analysis: final report summarizing results.

D. Divider Tabs: Laminated Mylar plastic and colored according to Section.

E. Submit documents for approval prior to being turned over to the Owner.

1.18 RECORD DRAWINGS


B. Keep on site at all times an extra set of drawings and specifications recording changes and deviations from contract documents including all addendum, bulletin and request for information data. Documents shall be updated on a daily basis. This set of documents shall be used specifically for this purpose.

C. The record drawings shall accurately reflect the as-built conditions at the time of the project completion.

D. Record drawings shall be presented with maintenance manuals to the Architect at the time of final acceptance of the project.


1.19 CLEANING


B. Prior to the date set for final inspection and at the direction of the Architect, all new lighting fixtures, switch and receptacle plates, engine generator and electrical distribution equipment, in general, shall be cleaned as required to remove plaster, dust, paint splashes, labels, etc., from the equipment and fixtures.

C. Any damage in the electrical system or other damage to any part of the building, its finish or furnishings, due to failure to properly clean electrical equipment and or associated components, shall be repaired by the Contractor with no additional cost to the Owner.

1.20 PAINTING


B. Prepare for painting of exterior surfaces of unfinished materials, equipment, ironwork, etc., exposed in finished areas by cleaning surface of foreign matter, grease, dirt, and dust.

C. Paint exposed items or equipment, and all structural steel or miscellaneous metal, installed under this portion of the specifications.

D. Surfaces shall be primed and finish painted. Refer to Division 1 Painting Section. Each coat shall be a different shade, with final coat of the color as selected by the Architect.

E. Paint on factory finished equipment chipped or scrapped during installation shall be touched up. Touch up paint to be supplied by equipment manufacturer.

1.21 FINAL ACCEPTANCE


B. When the installation is reported in writing by the contractor to be complete and ready for acceptance, an inspection shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer to ascertain whether it complies with the contract documents. If in the opinion of the Engineer it fails to do so, the Contractor shall at once remedy all defects and shortcomings. Any additional tests that may be required shall be entirely at the Contractor's expense. All of the testing work shall be done when and as directed by the Engineer.

1.22 OWNER INSTRUCTION


B. The Contractor shall furnish the services of qualified personnel, approved by the Engineer and thoroughly familiar with the completed installation, to instruct the Owners permanent operating personnel in the proper operation of all systems included under this contract, and the proper care of all equipment and apparatus. These services shall be furnished for a period of one 8-hour day, after the operation of the systems has been taken over by the Owner.

C. When instructions are provided under this contract, the Contractor shall have in his possession three copies of an identifying letter which shall list the names of the Contractor's qualified instruction personnel, including manufacturers' representatives and subcontractors that will be giving the instructions. Likewise, on this same letter, spaces shall be provided for the Owner's personnel who


will receive the instructions. After instructions have been given and received for each system, the Contractor's representatives and subcontractors shall sign and date the letter, and the Owner's personnel shall sign and date the letter acknowledging that they have received adequate instructions for operating and maintaining the systems and equipment. One signed copy shall be delivered to the Owner, one copy to the Engineer and one copy shall be retained by the Contractor.

D. In addition to the verbal instructions outlined above, the Contractor and his manufacturers' representatives and subcontractors shall furnish written basic instructions indicating the proper operation of each system and associated equipment. Each manufacturer shall also submit a brochure on his equipment, including instructions on operation, recommended spare parts, and instructions on preventative, routine and breakdown maintenance.

E. The Contractor shall combine the written instructions and the manufacturers' equipment brochures in complete volumes with hardback binders which shall be turned over to the Owner before final acceptance of the contract work. The Contractor shall obtain two copies of a signed receipt from the Owner for the written instructions and equipment brochures. One copy of the receipt shall be delivered to the Engineer and one copy retained by the Contractor.

2 PRODUCTS

2.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Compliance

1. In accordance with IBC requirements and Authority Having Jurisdiction.

2. ASTM: E84-96 and E814-94

3. Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM)

4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1479

5. Warnock Hersey (WH)

B. Materials

1. Use either factory built firestop devices or field erected through-penetration firestop systems to form a specific building system maintaining required integrity of the fire barrier and stop the passage of gases or smoke.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems and firestop devices tested in accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479 using the "F" or "T" rating to maintain the same rating and integrity as the fire barrier being sealed. "T" ratings are not required for penetrations smaller than or equal to 4 in nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall cross sectional area.

3. Products requiring heat activation to seal an opening by its intumescence shall exhibit a demonstrated ability to function as designed to maintain the fire barrier.

4. Firestop sealants used for firestopping or smoke sealing shall have following properties:

a) Contain no flammable or toxic solvents.

b) Have no dangerous or flammable outgassing during the drying or curing of products.

c) Water-resistant after drying or curing and unaffected by high humidity, condensation or transient water exposure.

d) When used in exposed areas, shall be capable of being sanded and finished with similar surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface.


5. Firestopping system or devices used for penetrations by glass pipe, plastic pipe or conduits, unenclosed cables, or other non-metallic materials shall have following properties:

a) Classified for use with the particular type of penetrating material used.

b) Penetrations containing loose electrical cables, computer data cables, and communications cables protected using firestopping systems that allow unrestricted cable changes without damage to the seal.

c) Intumescent products which would expand to seal the opening and act as fire, smoke, toxic fumes, and, water sealant.

6. Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke development of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

7. FM, UL, or WH rated or tested by an approved laboratory in accordance with ASTM E814.

8. Materials to be asbestos free.

3 EXECUTION


A. All work shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner by craftsmen experienced in the trade involved and shall be acceptable to the Engineer. All details of installation shall be mechanically and electrically correct. All materials and equipment shall be new, and without imperfections or blemishes, unless otherwise noted.

1. Only qualified personnel familiar with proper voltage equipment shall perform work covered by this Division of the Specifications.

B. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the site and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No compensation will be allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and measurements and those indicated on the drawings. Any difference, which may be found, shall be submitted to the Engineer for consideration before proceeding with the work.

C. This specification includes under each item all labor, material and equipment necessary to properly install complete, adjust, and place in operating condition, satisfactory to the Engineer, the several branches of work described herein. This shall include all necessary interconnections between the several branches of work described herein, and connections to work under other sections of specifications and other contractors.

D. All items of labor, material or equipment not described in detail by specifications or drawings, but which are incidental to or necessary for complete installation and proper operation of several branches of work described herein, or reasonably implied in connection therewith, shall be furnished and/or installed as if called for in detail by drawings or specifications.

E. Follow all safety requirements as required by Code, including but not limited to those listed below:

1. Printed instructions shipped with the equipment.

2. Code-required and/or industry-accepted practices.

3. Electrical safety guidelines and practices.


F. The drawings are generally indicative of the work required and shall be followed as closely as circumstances will permit, however they do not indicate all bends, fittings, boxes and accessories which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions affecting work and arrange work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, accessories, etc., required to meet such conditions. Contractor will be held responsible for proper installation of materials and equipment to the true intent and meaning of contract documents.

G. The Contractor shall carefully examine all contract documents including those of all other trades, and carry on his work so as not to delay or interfere with the work of other trades. He shall obtain in writing from the other contractors such data as is necessary to coordinate his work with other trades.

H. The Contractor shall lay out his work from dimensions of architectural and structural drawings and actual dimensions taken at the site and from the approved dimensions of equipment being installed. Layouts in congested areas should not be scaled from the electrical and mechanical drawings. No extra compensation will be allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and measurements and those indicated on the drawings. Any difference, which may be found, shall be submitted to the Engineer for consideration before proceeding with the work.

I. Coordinate location of luminaires, conduit, wire, wiring devices, equipment, etc., to be clear of windows, doors, openings, diffusers, return grilles, sprinklers and other services and utilities. This Contractor shall be held responsible to coordinate his work with that of the other trades so that all work may proceed in an orderly manner and conflicts and delays may be avoided. Where drawings indicate special space allocation for different contracts, contractors shall rigidly adhere to sequence of installation designated by the Engineer or as required to allow all the trades to work equipment or materials into place in respective order. Special attention shall be paid to work under the floor slabs, above ceilings and in locations otherwise concealed. All work shall be tested before they are closed in.

J. Secure dimensions of all recessed lighting fixtures, telephone, data and similar device outlets and other equipment immediately upon the award of the Contract. Work closely with the General, HVAC, Plumbing and other Contractors and provide them with the necessary information and dimensions so that there will be no interference between piping, duct work, structural steel, furring channels, etc., and recessed lighting fixtures or other electrical equipment.

K. Where required and as necessary, firmly support and secure all materials and equipment installed under this Contract to the building construction.

L. Contractor shall determine in advance, location and size of chases and openings necessary for proper installation of his work, and have same provided during erection of work in which chases and openings occur. He shall furnish and set sleeves, hangers, and anchors, and be responsible for their proper and permanent location.

M. In cases where cutting of new building construction is necessary due to failure to set proper sleeves or inserts, or due to the failure to provide proper openings and chases such cutting shall be done and repaired to match the original condition of the work by the contractor under this specification.

N. Points of connection and termination of work under this specification are shown on drawings or stated within the specification, but in case of doubt as to such points, the Engineer’s decision will be final.

O. Luminaires, conduit, wire, wiring devices and other electrical work shall be installed as to preserve access to items that are intended to be accessible (i.e. cabinet doors, valves, filters, accessories, etc.), both those furnished under this specification, and those furnished under other specifications. Clearances shall be provided on all sides of equipment as required for proper maintenance purposes,


recommended by the equipment manufacturer, required by the National Electrical Code or required by other applicable codes.

P. Follow manufacturer’s published recommendations for installation methods not otherwise specified. The Contractor shall furnish the services of manufacturer's representatives for each piece of major equipment furnished under these contract documents. The amount of factory service provided by the contractor shall be as normally recommended and furnished by the various equipment manufacturers unless specified otherwise. Testing of equipment shall be made under the direct supervision of competent authorized service representatives. Any and all expenses incurred by the equipment manufacturers' representatives shall be borne by the contractor.

Q. Contractor shall seal all openings left in building construction by the installation of work specified under this section. Sealing shall be in accordance with “Cutting and Patching” section specified herein.

R. Where the vapor barrier of any insulation is broken due to the installation of conduit and equipment, the Contractor shall properly repair all insulation and seal all openings with vapor barrier covering and vapor barrier adhesive of type installed with the insulation.

S. Upon completion of the work, all remaining waste materials and rubbish resulting from the contract work shall be removed from the building and premises.

T. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer for clarification. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.

U. The Contractor and his subcontractors shall satisfactorily complete the systems so that they are functional and operating to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All systems, their controls and their sequencing must be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

V. Field Adjustments: Adjust relay and protective device settings according to recommended settings provided by the coordination study. Make minor modifications required to equipment for conformance with short circuit and protective device studies; notify owner in writing of any major equipment modifications which may be required prior to proceeding.

3.2 EXTENSION OF EXISTING CIRCUITS

A. Where existing equipment is indicated as being relocated and a circuit connection is not shown or noted, this Contractor shall extend and connect the existing circuit required. In areas where the general construction work interrupts the continuity of a circuit this Contractor shall relocate portion of the circuit required.

3.3 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Terminate and make final connections to circuits shown on the drawings for each piece of equipment requiring electric service.

B. The drawings show generally the location of electric service to each piece of equipment. However, this contractor shall secure detailed shop drawings showing dimensioned locations for electric service to each piece of equipment from various contractors supplying such equipment prior to roughing-in.

C. This contractor will be required to relocate any misplaced outlet at his own expense if he fails to secure detailed shop drawings prior to roughing-in for equipment.


3.4 SPLICES

A. Splices shall be made with approved type solderless connectors of the insulated type. However, at locations where the non-insulated type are used, they shall be covered with rubber and friction tape to the same thickness as the original insulation of the wire used.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install sleeves and firestopping at all openings in fire and smoke rated barriers around wiring and equipment installed under this contract to maintain the rating of the barrier.

B. Firestopping materials shall maintain the fire rating of the barrier in accordance with the requirements of NFPA, the local governing bodies and other applicable codes.

C. Refer to the Architectural drawings for locations and ratings of all fire and smoke rated barriers.

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 RACEWAYS 16110-1

SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Raceways for electrical wiring; complete, including all necessary elbows, couplings, fittings and associated accessories. Types of raceways in this section include the following:

a) Rigid Metal Conduit

b) Electrical Metallic Tubing


1. Section 16050 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

2. Section 16120 – Wires and Cables

3. Section 16190 – Supporting Devices


A. The raceways, including all necessary elbows, couplings, fittings and associated accessories shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with the latest editions and applicable sections of the following codes and standards:

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70, National Electrical Code (NEC)


3. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) listed and labeled.

1.3 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. The Electrical Contractor shall document exact routing of all “feeders” (including notation of conduit rises, conduit drops and locations of junction boxes) on final set of As-Built drawings (i.e. panelboard feeders, transformers feeders, switchboard feeders, elevator feeders, feeders for large pieces of HVAC equipment, etc.).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data sheets to Engineer in accordance with requirements of section 16050 and General Conditions of Contract.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Conduit:

a) Allied Tube & Conduit

b) Wheatland Tube Company


c) Eastern Wire & Conduit

d) Western Tube & Conduit

e) Cantex

2.2 RIGID METAL CONDUIT

A. Rigid metal conduit (RGS) shall be made of zinc-coated steel piping complying with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. It shall be of sufficient weight and toughness to withstand cracking and peeling during bending. Galvanizing shall consist of a coating of zinc of uniform thickness applied to inside and outside of walls by either electrolytic or hot metal dip process.

B. Each piece of conduit shall be straight, free from blisters and other defects, cut square and taper reamed and shall be furnished in 10 foot lengths, threaded at each end. Couplings shall be supplied at one end and protection for the other end. All threads shall be cleanly cut. Each length shall bear the Underwriters' Label.

C. Fittings:

1. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10-2007, Selection and Installation Guidelines for Fittings for Use With Non-Flexible Metallic Conduit or Tubing.

2. Zinc-coated steel, if size 2-1/2 inches or less, and zinc-coated malleable iron if larger. Dependent upon application, fittings shall be rated rain tight or concrete tight when applicable.

2.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING

A. Electrical Metallic Tubing shall be the same general construction as rigid metal conduit specified above, except for wall thickness and fittings, which shall be zinc-coated steel compression type for all sizes. Set screw type fittings will not be acceptable.

B. Electrical Metallic Tubing shall be constructed in compliance with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with requirements of Section 16050 and manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. The entire conduit installation shall be concealed in the construction except that it may be run exposed in unfinished areas and mechanical rooms. Where un-plastered concrete slab ceilings occur, conduit shall be installed in ceiling slab. No exposed conduits will be permitted on finished walls or ceilings, unless otherwise noted.

C. Unless noted on the drawings or required for installation (i.e. floor boxes), conduit is NOT permitted to be installed underground within the building footprint for feeders or branch circuits without prior approval from the engineer/owner.

D. Electrical metallic tubing may be utilized at all other locations as allowed by the NEC, except where subject to damage or otherwise specified.

E. Flexible Connections: Use short extension (maximum of 6 feet) of flexible metal conduit for connection to recessed or semi-recessed lighting fixtures; equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for motors. If located in exterior, moist or humid locations;


corrosive atmospheres; or where subject to water spray, dripping oil, grease or water then use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

F. Conduits shall be run as straight and direct as possible to limit number of bends or offsets to a minimum. Exposed conduits shall be installed with runs parallel or perpendicular to walls and ceilings, and with right angle turns utilizing conduit bodies or symmetrical bends. Exposed vertical conduit runs shall be run on the building walls or columns, where possible. Where switch and receptacle outlets occur in exposed runs, zinc-coated cast iron device boxes shall be used at these locations. Review all portions of exposed raceways in finished areas with the Architect prior to installation.

G. Not more than the equivalent of four (4) 90-degree bends will be allowed in any one run of con-duit. Where more bends are necessary, a pull box shall be installed. All couplings shall be pulled up tight so as to provide an electrical bond throughout the entire conduit system.

H. No conduit smaller than 3/4 inch trade size shall be used in any part of the various systems, nor shall the conduit be smaller than the size recommended by the manufacturer for the Fire Alarm System, Local Telephone Company, etc. The contractor shall secure this information from the manufacturer of the Fire Alarm System equipment, Local Telephone Company, etc. Crowding wiring will not be permitted.

I. Conduit bends shall be of the large radius, machine-made, without kinks, flattening or crushing. Conduit may be bent by using an approved pipe bending machine or hickey.

J. Conduits installed directly under roof decking shall be installed a minimum distance of 1 1/2” below the roof deck.

K. Conduit ends shall be square cut and reamed to remove burrs. Cut EMT utilizing a hack saw or band saw; do not use roll-type tubing cutters. Conduit shall be installed in such a manner that wires may be removed and replaced at a later date.

L. Approved threaded couplings, such as the 3-piece coupling (Erickson) or suitable union, shall be used where construction requires the use of a union. Running threads will not be permitted. Expansion fittings shall be used where conduit crosses expansion joints.

M. Where steel conduit is threaded in the field, the thread shall be coated with an approved electrically-conductive, corrosion-resistant compound. Coatings for this purpose, listed under UL category “FOIZ” are available; zinc-rich paint or other coatings acceptable to the AHJ may also be used.

N. Raceway supports shall be installed in accordance with specification section 16190, supporting devices, and the NEC. Raceways are permitted to be mounted directly to the building structure. Assure that supporting means and associated fasteners are compatible with the mounting surface from which they are supported. Raceways supports shall be installed only on conduit of the trade size indicated on the fitting (or smallest respective shipping container).

O. Each end of every conduit run terminating in a pressed steel box of any type shall be provided with a galvanized locknut and bushing inside and a locknut outside. All feeder conduits shall be provided with hardwood or fiber bushings at all junction boxes, panels, etc.

P. Do not rely upon locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings or finishes on enclosures. Such coatings shall be removed in the locknut contact area only prior to raceway assembly, to ensure continuity of ground path. Touch up bare areas as needed after fitting assembly.


Q. Outlet, junction and pull boxes shall be securely anchored to structural members as required or indicated on the drawings and not dependent on conduit for support. If structural members are not provided at locations of boxes for support, this contractor shall furnish and install same.

R. A separation of 6 inches shall be maintained between all conduit and hot water, steam lines and flues in the building. Where conduits, hot water and steam lines are closer than 6 inches an approved pipe covering shall be used over the conduit for the length of the run of such exposure.

S. Provide temporary closure protection for conduits during construction to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. Provide conduit caps for empty conduits that are installed as spares to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.

T. Raceway systems shall be installed complete, including tightening of joints, from termination point to termination point prior to the installation of conductors.

U. Install nylon pull line in empty raceways.

3.2 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS

A. Perform field adjustments to the raceway systems as required. The adjustments shall include, but not be limited to: inspecting the interiors of raceways; clearing blockages and removing burrs, dirt, and construction debris.

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 WIRES AND CABLES 16120-1

SECTION 16120 - WIRES AND CABLES

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wires and cables and associated connectors, splices and terminations for power, lighting, control and related systems rated 600 V and less. Refer to individual system sections for special wire and cable specifications. Types of wires and cables in this section include the following:

a) Building Wire and Cable (600 Volt and less)

b) Metal-Clad (MC) Cable (Limited Usage)



2. Section 16110 – Raceways

3. Section 16190 – Supporting Devices


A. The wires and cables, including all associated connectors, splices and terminations shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with the latest editions and applicable sections of the following codes and standards:


2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)/Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)

3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data sheets to Engineer in accordance with requirements of Section 260500 and General Conditions of Contract for the following equipment:

1. All cabling types (utilized on the project).

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems

2. Southwire

3. American Insulated Wire Corporation

4. General Cable


2.2 BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES (600 V and less)

A. Provide wires and cables of sizes indicated on the drawings and suitable for the temperature, conditions and location where installed.

B. Conductor material shall be 98 percent conductivity copper (or greater) rated at 600 V.

C. Conductors in sizes up to and including #10 AWG shall be furnished solid. Size #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded.

D. Insulation shall be type THHN/THWN, THW or XHHW as appropriate for the locations and space temperature where installed.

E. Factory-applied nylon or PVC external jacketed wires and cables shall be utilized in all locations where conduit or duct is installed underground, under slabs on grade, in damp/wet locations, in pulls over 100-feet in length or in pulls that contain more than three equivalent 90 degree bends.

F. Conduit and wiring shall be utilized in fabricated air plenum spaces; no exceptions.

2.3 METAL-CLAD (MC) CABLE (LIMITED USAGE)

A. Use of MC cable will not be permitted except at the following dry locations:

1. Final flexible connections (6ft maximum length) to recessed lighting fixtures and/or ceiling mounted devices.

2. Extension of the building conduit and junction box system for service to outlets installed in existing partitions and wall surfaces to eliminate cutting and patching of existing surfaces. Transition MC cabling to building wire and conduit in junction box located at nearest point above accessible ceiling.

B. Provide MC cables of sizes indicated on the drawings and suitable for the temperature, conditions and location where installed. MC cable not allowed for use in areas other than dry locations (unless provided with outer jacket).

C. Conductor material shall be 98 percent conductivity copper (or greater) rated at 600 V

D. Insulation shall be type THHN.

E. MC cable is permitted to be installed above the ceiling in an air plenum environment per NEC 300.22 (without an overall nonmetallic covering).

F. Factory-applied PVC external jacketed MC cables shall be used in all locations where cable is installed in damp/wet locations.

G. MC cable shall be constructed of galvanized steel interlocking armor assembly, and provided with all necessary MC connectors and shall be in compliance with UL 1569 and NEC 330.

1. UL Classified as a through-penetrating product (XHLY) for use in one, two or three-hour through-penetration firestop systems (XHEZ).

2. Assembly shall be suitable for use in cable trays in accordance with NEC.

H. Multi-conductor cables shall be provided as indicated in panel schedules on contract drawings. Green copper ground wire shall be provided for all branch circuits.


I. Armor shall be pre-painted / color coded to ID the cabling color within the armor.

1. Basis of design: AFC Cable; Color Spec

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. All wiring shall be run in raceways in accordance with Section 16110 and the manufacturer’s recommendations, unless specifically noted otherwise.

C. Wire and cable supports shall be installed in accordance with specification section 16190, supporting devices, and the NEC.

D. In general, wires and cables shall be installed as shown on the drawings. However, the drawings are diagrammatic and are not intended to show actual raceway routing or exact equipment location. Therefore, it is the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to coordinate with other trades and account for actual field conditions.

E. The grouping of single-phase branch circuits will be permitted. However, not more than three phase conductors of separate phases and a neutral shall occupy one raceway. The sharing of neutral conductors on receptacle circuits or for non-linear loads is not permitted.

F. Pull all conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in the same raceway. Great care shall be exercised in pulling wires into raceways so as not to damage insulation. UL listed pulling compounds or lubricants may be used, where necessary.

G. Conceal all cable in finished spaces. Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow surface contours, where possible.

H. No wires or cables smaller than #12 AWG shall be used for branch circuits, pilot and control circuits shall not be smaller than #14 AWG.

I. Switches shall not be connected to the neutral conductor.

J. For convenience in maintenance and testing, make full use of color-coded wire in all installations. Wire having a white insulation shall be used only for the neutral conductor. Wire having a green insulation shall be used only for the ground conductor.

K. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splice shall be made except within outlet or junction boxes.

L. Splices located in wet locations indoors, or direct buried, in manholes, vaults and handholes outdoors shall utilize 3M cold shrink splices with compression cable connection, and be approved for wet locations.

M. Balance all circuits so as to provide as close an electrical balance as possible across the phase wires of the branch panels and the main distribution panel.

N. Identification:

1. All wires and cables shall be identified at each end and within pull boxes, junction boxes, manholes, cable vaults, etc., indicating circuit number and equipment or area served.


Identification shall be attached to each cable. Underground site lighting circuit conductors shall be identified in all manholes and at each light standard or fixture.

2. Identification shall be constructed of plastic material permanently stamped with lettering of contrasting color. Plastic shall be of heavy thickness and attached to cable by nylon cord or other suitable attachment means. Submit samples of tag and attachment means for approval before purchase.

3.2 TESTS

A. Prior to energizing, check installed wires and cables with megohmmeter to determine insulation resistance levels to insure requirements are fulfilled.

B. Prior to energizing, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits.

3.3 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS

A. Subsequent to wire and cable final connections and tests, energize circuits and demonstrate proper functioning.

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-1

SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. This Section includes secure support from the building structure for electrical items by means of hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals, and associated fastenings.



2. Section 16110 – Raceways

3. Section 16120 – Wires and Cables

4. Section 16130 - Boxes


A. The supporting devices, including all necessary components and associated accessories shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with the latest editions and applicable sections of the following codes and standards:




B. Comply with the current governing building codes regarding restraints due to earthquake loads.

1.3 RESERVED

1.4 RESERVED

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 RESERVED

2.2 COATINGS

A. Coating: Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic. Products for use outdoors shall be hot-dip galvanized.

2.3 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps.

B. Fasteners: Types, materials, and construction features as follows:


1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.

2. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type.

3. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel, designed specifically for the intended service.

C. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory-fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for sealing around conduit, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.

D. U-Channel Systems: 16-gage steel channels, with 9/16-inch-diameter holes, at a minimum of 8 inches on center, in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of the same manufacture.

2.4 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. General: Shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U-channel components.

B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports.

C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:

1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the following gage metal for sleeve diameter noted:

a) Up to 6-inch: 16-gage.

b) Over 6-inch: 14-gage.

2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently from the primary building structure in accordance with NEC requirements.

B. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements:

1. Support all cables at intervals not exceeding 6 feet.

2. The use of wire ties for raceway and component attachment is not permitted.

3. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports.

4. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by a safety factor of at least four.


a) Where this determination results in a safety allowance of less than 200 lbs, provide additional strength until there is a minimum of 200 lbs safety allowance in the strength of each support.

5. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

6. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers.

7. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use 1/4-inch-diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing.

8. Space supports for raceways in accordance with the NEC.

9. Support exposed and concealed raceway within 1 foot of an unsupported box and access fittings. In horizontal runs, support at the box and access fittings may be omitted where box or access fittings are independently supported and raceway terminals are not made with chase nipples or threadless box connectors.

10. In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals.

D. Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices.

E. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be supported separately except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved type of fastener not more than 24 inches from the box.

F. Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls and all other fire-rated floors and walls for raceways and cable installations. For sleeves through fire rated-wall or floor construction, apply UL-listed firestopping sealant or system in gaps between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables in accordance with “Firestopping” requirements of Section 16050.

G. Conduit Seals: Install seals for conduit penetrations of exterior walls below grade and where indicated. Tighten sleeve seal screws until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal.

H. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards, transformers, boxes, disconnect switches, and control components in accordance with the following:

1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel. Threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used instead of expansion bolts and machine or wood screws. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws.


2. Holes cut to depth of more than 1-1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used.

3. Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof test load. Use vibration- and shock-resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs.

END OF SECTION

Proj. No. 18144.01 GROUNDING 16450-1

SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING

1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. General grounding and bonding requirements of electrical installations for personnel safety and to provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents.




A. The grounding and bonding equipment, including all necessary accessories shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with the latest editions and applicable sections of the following codes and standards:



3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)


5. American National Standards Institute/Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronics Industries Alliance (ANSI/TIA/EIA)-607, Grounding and Bonding

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data sheets to Engineer in accordance with requirements of section 16050 and General Conditions of Contract.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Provide an insulated full size green ground wire in the same conduit as the branch circuit or feeder wiring for all branch circuits and for all feeders. The raceway/conduit system shall NOT be relied upon as the sole grounding means.

B. All grounding and bonding connections shall be solderless except where indicated otherwise on the drawings or hereinafter. System grounding shall be performed in strict accordance with the NEC, particularly Article(s) 250 and 517 as applicable.

C. The terms “connect” and “bond” are used interchangeably in this specification and have the same meaning.

D. It is essential and extremely important that the contractor familiarize himself thoroughly with all applicable codes prior to the installation of grounding system. All ground conductors, methods of installation, etc., shall be in accordance with Code requirements.


E. In particular, the Contractor’s attention is called to Sections 250.50 and 250.52 of the NEC. Be aware that, in general, all concrete footers and foundations containing reinforcing steel, shall be considered as “Concrete Encased Electrodes” and MUST BE CONNECTED to the Ground Electrode System. Coordination between the installing electrician and the General Contractor will be necessary early on in the project so that proper arrangements are in place for bonding of rebar, prior to concrete pour. Verify quantity of rebar bonding point(s)/extent of bonding required with the local Electrical Inspector as part of this early coordination process.

1. Failure to ascertain specific requirements with the local Electrical Inspector or to coordinate installation of same with the General Contractor shall not constitute grounds for a change order.

2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING CONDUCTORS

A. Equipment grounding conductors shall be insulated stranded copper, except that sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid copper. Insulation color shall be continuous green for all equipment grounding conductors, except that wire sizes No. 4 AWG and larger shall be permitted to be identified per the NEC.

B. All connection of ground conductors to ground rods, bus bars, rebar, structural members, pipes or fences, and splices of ground conductors, shall be made by exothermic welds except where otherwise noted. All connections to bar lugs shall be exothermic weld or compression type. Bolted type connection of ground conductors may only be made where terminal lugs or blocks have been furnished and installed in equipment by the manufacturer. The basis of design for exothermic welds shall be the "Cadweld" process manufactured by Erico.

C. Bonding conductors shall be bare stranded copper, except that sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid bare copper wire.

D. Conductor sizes shall not be less than what is shown on the drawings and not less than required by the NEC, whichever is greater.

2.3 SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS

A. Components shall meet or exceed UL standards and be clearly marked with the manufacturer, catalog number, and permitted conductor size(s).

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


3.2 GENERAL

A. Ground in accordance with the NEC and as shown on drawings.

B. Equipment Grounding: Raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, and other conductive items shall be bonded and grounded.

C. Special Grounding: For patient care area electrical power system grounding, conform with relevant section of NFPA 99, and Article 517 of the NEC.


3.3 SECONDARY EQUIPMENT AND CIRCUITS

A. Conduit Systems:

1. Ground all metallic conduit systems. All metallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding conductor.

2. Non-metallic conduit systems shall contain an equipment grounding conductor, except that non-metallic feeder conduits which carry a grounded conductor from exterior transformers to interior or building-mounted service entrance equipment need not contain an equipment grounding conductor.

3. Conduit containing only a grounding conductor, and which is provided for mechanical protection of the conductor, shall be bonded to that conductor at the entrance and exit from the conduit.

B. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and power and lighting branch circuits (interior and exterior circuits).

C. Boxes:

1. Bond the equipment grounding conductor to each pullbox, junction box, outlet box, device box, cabinets, and other enclosures through which the conductor passes (except for special grounding systems for intensive care units and other critical units shown).

D. Ground lighting fixtures to the equipment grounding conductor of the wiring system.

END OF SECTION